Você está na página 1de 372

212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

E-Class
Sedan
Operator’s Manual
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 2
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols
Trademarks:
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RPRE-SAFE® is a registered trademark of
Daimler.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result in


damage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information you


may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Our company and staff congratulate you on


the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company

2125845881 É21258458817ËÍ
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 2
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 3
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 75

Operation ........................................... 219

Practical hints ................................... 267

Technical data ................................... 345


212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 4
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Pelvis ............................................... 42


Safety guidelines ............................. 39
4-ETS Side impact ...................................... 41
see ETS/4-ETS Window curtain ................................ 42
4MATIC Air conditioning refrigerant and
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) lubricant ............................................. 362
Air distribution .................................. 189
A Air filter .............................................. 299
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 62 AIRMATIC
Indicator lamp ................................ 305 Damping system ............................ 163
Messages in the multifunction Introduction ................................... 163
display ................................... 288, 289 Messages in the multifunction
Accessory weight .............................. 249 display ........................................... 292
Accidents ........................................... 112 Vehicle level control ...................... 163
Air bags ........................................... 37 Air pressure
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 208 see Tire inflation pressure
NECK-PRO active front head Air pressure (tires) ............................ 250
restraints ........................................ 54 Air pump (electric) ............................ 327
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Air recirculation mode ...................... 190
see Headlamps Air volume .......................................... 189
Adaptive Brake .................................... 64 Alarm system
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............... 100 see Anti-theft systems
Switching on or off ......................... 142 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) ...... 326
AdBlue® ...................................... 333, 364 All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 161
Refilling ......................................... 334 Alternator
Additives Messages in the multifunction
Engine oil ....................................... 362 display ................................... 284, 297
Gasoline ......................................... 364 Alternator (Technical data)
Address change ................................... 21 see Vehicle specification
Advanced Tire Pressure AMG adaptive sport suspension
Monitoring System (Advanced system (E 63 AMG) ............................ 164
TPMS) ................................................. 233 AMG menu ......................................... 131
Messages in the multifunction Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 365
display ........................................... 285 Antilock Brake System
Air bags ................................................ 37 see ABS
Emergency call upon deployment . . 208 Anti-theft systems ............................... 71
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 72
Front passenger front air bag off Immobilizer ...................................... 71
indicator lamp (Canada Aquaplaning
only) ........................................ 46, 313 see Hydroplaning
Front passenger front air bag off Armrest, front
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 43, 314 Storage compartment .................... 202
Knee bag .......................................... 40 Armrest, rear
Messages in the multifunction Storage compartment .................... 202
display ........................................... 276 Ashtrays ............................................. 206
OCS (Occupant Classification Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 250
System) ........................................... 43 Assistance menu ............................... 137
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 5
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 5

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................... 178 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System


Messages in the multifunction PLUS) .................................................... 63
display ........................................... 292 Batteries, SmartKey
Switching on or off ......................... 138 Checking condition .......................... 79
Audio menu ........................................ 134 Replacing ....................................... 317
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 95 Battery, Vehicle ................................. 336
Automatic central locking .......... 80, 144 Charging ........................................ 337
Automatic climate control Jump starting ................................. 338
see Climate control system Messages in the multifunction
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 98 display ................................... 284, 297
Automatic interior lighting control .. 103 Bead (tire) .......................................... 250
Automatic locking when driving ...... 144 Beverage holders
Automatic shift program .................. 120 see Cup holders
Automatic transmission ................... 114 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
Automatic shift program ................ 120 engine) ............................................... 333
Gear range indicator ...................... 120 Blind Spot Assist ............................... 175
Gear ranges ................................... 120 Messages in the multifunction
Gear selector lever ........................ 115 display ........................................... 281
Hill-start assist system .................. 160 Switching on or off ......................... 138
Kickdown ....................................... 119 BlueTEC
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 124 AdBlue® tank ................................. 333
Manual shift program ..................... 122 Brake Assist System
One-touch gearshifting .................. 121 see BAS
Program mode indicator ................ 121 Brake Assist System PLUS
Program mode selector dial see BAS PLUS
(E 63 AMG) ............................ 121, 123 Brake fluid
Program mode selector switch Checking level ............................... 227
(automatic shift program) .............. 120 Messages in the multifunction
Shifting procedure ......................... 118 display ........................................... 289
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 122 Brake lamps
Transmission position indicator ..... 118 Cleaning lenses ............................. 262
Transmission positions .................. 118 Brake pads
AUX socket ........................................ 201 Messages in the multifunction
Axle oils .............................................. 360 display ........................................... 287
Brakes ................................................ 254
B Ceramic brake system ................... 256
High-performance brake system .... 256
BabySmart™
Parking brake ................................ 113
Air bag deactivation system ............. 46
Warning lamp ................................. 305
Self-test ........................................... 47
Break-in period .................................. 220
Backrest
Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 224
see Seats
Bulbs
Backup lamps
see Replacing bulbs
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 300
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 250
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 6
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

6 Index

C Cigarette lighter ................................ 206


Climate control
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23 see Climate control system
California retail buyers and Climate control system .................... 180
lessees, important notice for ............. 21 Air conditioning ............................. 185
Calls (phone) ...................................... 135 Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 362
Can holders Air distribution ............................... 189
see Cup holders Air recirculation mode ................... 190
Capacities and recommended Air volume ..................................... 189
fuel/lubricants .................................. 359 Automatic mode ............................ 186
Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 199 Deactivating system ...................... 185
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 266 Front defroster .............................. 189
Center console ..................................... 32 Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 190
Central locking Residual heat and ventilation ......... 191
Automatic ................................ 80, 144 Temperature .................................. 186
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 77 Cockpit ................................................. 27
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 81 Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 250
SmartKey ......................................... 76 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 270
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 81 COMAND system
Ceramic brake system ...................... 256 see separate COMAND system
Certification label .............................. 346 operating instructions
Children in the vehicle Combination switch .......................... 100
Air bags ........................................... 37 Compass ............................................ 216
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation Control system .................................. 126
system ............................................. 46 Multifunction display ..................... 128
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 60 Multifunction steering wheel ......... 126
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Resetting to factory settings .......... 139
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 59 Control system menus ...................... 129
Indicator lamp, front passenger AMG ............................................... 131
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46 Assistance ..................................... 137
Indicator lamp, front passenger Audio ............................................. 134
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 43 Navi ............................................... 134
Infant and child restraint systems .... 56 Service ........................................... 138
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – Settings ......................................... 139
LATCH-type) ..................................... 59 Telephone ...................................... 135
OCS (Occupant Classification Trip ................................................ 129
System) ........................................... 43 Control system submenus
Override switch ................................ 60 Convenience .................................. 145
Safety notes ..................................... 56 Instrument cluster ......................... 140
Tether anchorage points .................. 58 Lighting .......................................... 141
Top tether ........................................ 58 Vehicle ........................................... 144
Child safety Convenience submenu
see Children in the vehicle Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 145
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Seat belt adjustment function ....... 145
(ISOFIX) Coolant
see Children in the vehicle Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 365
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Capacities ...................................... 361
cleaning .............................................. 266 Checking level ............................... 226
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 7
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 7

Messages in the multifunction Displays


display ........................................... 295 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 151
Temperature gauge ........................ 125 Maintenance service indicator ....... 258
Warning lamp ................................. 311 Messages in the multifunction
Corner-illuminating lamps ................ 102 display ........................................... 272
Replacing bulbs ............................. 319 Multifunction display ..................... 128
Cruise control .................................... 146 Symbol messages .......................... 287
Activating ....................................... 147 Text messages ............................... 274
Canceling ....................................... 147 Trip computer ................................ 129
Changing the set speed ................. 148 Vehicle status message memory ... 139
Last stored speed .......................... 148 Vehicle system settings ................. 139
Lever .............................................. 147 DISTRONIC PLUS ............................... 149
Messages in the multifunction Cleaning system sensors ............... 263
display ........................................... 279 Displaying the distance graphic ..... 152
Resume function ............................ 148 Displays in the multifunction
Setting current speed .................... 147 display ........................................... 151
Cup holders ........................................ 203 Distance warning lamp .......... 151, 309
Curb weight ....................................... 250 Driving ........................................... 154
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Driving with .................................... 157
Customer Relations Department ....... 23 Lever .............................................. 153
Messages in the multifunction
D display ........................................... 280
Resume function ............................ 156
Damping system ............................... 163 Sensor cover .................................. 263
Dashboard Speed settings ............................... 155
see Instrument cluster Stopping ........................................ 155
Data recording ..................................... 23 Door control panel .............................. 34
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 98 Door handles ........................................ 34
Switching on or off ......................... 141 Doors
Deep water Child safety locks ............................ 60
see Standing water Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 77
Defroster Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76
Front (Climate control system) ...... 189 Messages in the multifunction
Rear window .................................. 191 display ........................................... 293
Delayed shut-off Opening from inside ......................... 80
Exterior lamps ................................ 142 Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 212
Interior lighting .............................. 143 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 211
Department of Transportation Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 314
see DOT DOT (Department of
Diesel fuel Transportation) .................................. 250
see Fuel Drinking and driving ......................... 254
Difficulties Drive-dynamic multicontour seat ...... 91
While driving .................................. 112 Driving
With starting .................................. 110 Abroad ........................................... 257
Dimensions (vehicle) Hydroplaning ................................. 257
see Vehicle specification Instructions ........................... 109, 254
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 241 In winter ........................................ 253
Problems ....................................... 112
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 8
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

8 Index

RACE START (E 63 AMG) ............... 159 Electronic Stability Control


Safety systems ................................ 61 see ESC
Systems ......................................... 146 Electronic Traction System
Through standing water ................. 257 see ETS/4-ETS
With DISTRONIC PLUS ................... 157 Emergency, in case of
Driving and parking First aid kit ..................................... 268
Safety notes .................................. 109 Flat tire .......................................... 323
Driving off .................................. 111, 257 Hazard warning flasher .................. 101
Driving safety systems ....................... 61 Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 210
ABS .................................................. 62 Towing the vehicle ......................... 340
Adaptive Brake ................................ 64 Emergency calls
BAS .................................................. 63 Tele Aid .......................................... 208
BAS PLUS ........................................ 63 Emergency operations
EBP .................................................. 64 Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 212
ESC .................................................. 65 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 211
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 65 Trunk lid, emergency release ........... 84
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 69 Emergency Tensioning Device
Driving systems see ETD
AIRMATIC (except E 63 AMG) ........ 163 Emission control ............................... 258
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 161 Information label ............................ 347
AMG adaptive sport suspension System warranties ........................... 20
system (E 63 AMG) ........................ 164 Engine
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 178 Break-in recommendations ............ 220
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 175 Cleaning ......................................... 261
Cruise control ................................ 146 Compartment ................................ 223
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149 Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 310
Hill-start assist system .................. 160 Messages in the multifunction
HOLD function ............................... 161 display ........................................... 295
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 177 Number .......................................... 347
Night View Assist Plus ................... 172 Starting .......................................... 109
Parking Guidance ........................... 168 Turning off ..................................... 113
Parktronic system .......................... 165 Engine (Technical data)
RACE START (E 63 AMG) ............... 159 see Vehicle specification
Rear view camera .......................... 171 Engine compartment
Driving tips, automatic Radiator ......................................... 224
transmission ...................................... 119 Engine coolant
see Coolant
E Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 225
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 93, 145
Additives ........................................ 362
EBP (Electronic Brake
Checking level ............................... 224
Proportioning) ...................................... 64
Consumption ................................. 224
Electrical system
Messages in the multifunction
Improper work on or
display ........................................... 298
modifications ................................... 22
Oil dipstick ..................................... 225
Power outlets ................................. 207
Recommended engine oils and oil
Electrical system (Technical data)
filter ............................................... 361
see Vehicle specification
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 9
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 9

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ...... 65 Front lamps


ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 65 see Headlamps
Messages in the multifunction Front passenger front air bag ............ 40
display ........................... 288, 289, 290 Messages in the multifunction
Warning lamp ................................. 309 display ........................................... 276
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Front passenger front air bag off
Device) ................................................. 52 indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 313
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 Front passenger front air bag off
ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 43, 314
System) ................................................ 65 Fuel ..................................................... 220
Express operation Additives ........................................ 364
Panorama roof ............................... 195 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 361
Power windows .............................. 105 Diesel fuel ...................................... 363
Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 192 Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 254
Exterior lamp switch ........................... 97 Fuel consumption statistics ........... 130
Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 95 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 222
Parking position ............................... 95 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp ..... 310
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 362
Refueling ........................................ 220
F Requirements ................................ 363
Fuel filler flap ..................................... 222
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 50
Opening manually .......................... 316
First aid kit ......................................... 268 Fuel gauge ......................................... 126
Flat tire ............................................... 323 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 359
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 328 Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 323 engine) ............................................... 333
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 323
Fuel tank
Spare wheel ........................... 323, 358
Capacity ........................................ 361
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 329
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 222
Floormats ........................................... 217
Refueling ........................................ 220
Fluids
Fuses .................................................. 343
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 360
Brake fluid ..................................... 361
G
Capacities ...................................... 359
Engine coolant ............................... 361 Garage door opener .................... 33, 212
Engine oil ....................................... 360 Gasoline
Power steering fluid ....................... 360 see Fuel
Washer and headlamp cleaning GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 250
system ........................................... 361 Gear range ......................................... 120
Fog lamps ............................................. 99 Indicator ........................................ 120
Messages in the multifunction Limiting .......................................... 122
display ................................... 300, 302 Shifting into optimal ...................... 122
Four-wheel drive Gear selector lever ............................ 115
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Cleaning ......................................... 265
Front air bags Gearshift pattern ........................... 115
see Air bags Shifting procedure ......................... 118
Front axle oil ...................................... 360 Transmission position indicator ..... 118
Transmission positions .................. 118
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 10
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

10 Index

Generator Heated steering wheel ........................ 94


see Alternator Height adjustment
Global locking/unlocking Seat belt outlet ................................ 51
see Key, SmartKey Seats ............................................... 87
Glove box ........................................... 201 Vehicle level control ...................... 163
Gross Axle Weight Rating High-beam flasher ............................. 101
see GAWR High-beam headlamps .............. 100, 319
Gross Vehicle Weight Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 100
see GVW Indicator lamp .................................. 29
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Replacing bulbs ............................. 319
see GVWR High-performance brake system ..... 256
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 250 Hill-start assist system ..................... 160
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight HOLD function ................................... 161
Rating) ................................................ 250 Hood ................................................... 223
Messages in the multifunction
H display ........................................... 293
Hydroplaning ..................................... 257
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps
I
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 265
Hazard warning flasher .................... 101 Identification labels .......................... 346
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 102 Identification number, vehicle
Headlamps (VIN) ................................................... 346
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 97 Ignition ................................... 85, 86, 110
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 100 Immobilizer .......................................... 71
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 98 Indicator lamps
Bi-Xenon .................................. 97, 319 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Cleaning lenses ............................. 262 Infant and child restraint systems
Cleaning system ............................ 102 see Children in the vehicle
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 98 Inflation pressure
Delayed shut-off ............................ 142 see Tires, Inflation pressure
Halogen ......................................... 319 Inside door handle .............................. 80
High-beam flasher ......................... 101 Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 125
High-beam headlamps ................... 100 Illumination .................................... 125
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 98 Lamps ............................................ 304
Messages in the multifunction Multifunction display ..................... 128
display ........................................... 299 Instrument lighting
Replacing bulbs ............................. 318 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Switch .............................................. 97 Instrument panel
Headliner and shelf below rear see Instrument cluster
window, cleaning and care of .......... 266 Instruments and controls
Head restraints .................................... 87 see Cockpit
Adjustment ................................ 87, 89 Interior lighting
Comfort head restraint .................... 89 Delayed shut-off ............................ 143
Folding back .................................... 89 Emergency lighting ........................ 103
NECK-PRO active front head Front .............................................. 103
restraints ......................................... 54 Front reading lamps ....................... 103
Rear seat head restraints ................. 89
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 11
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 11

Rear ............................................... 104 Replacing ......................................... 80


Rear reading lamps ........................ 104 Replacing batteries ........................ 317
Interior rear view mirror ..................... 94 Restoring to factory setting ....... 77, 79
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 95 Selective setting ........................ 77, 79
Interior storage spaces Starter switch positions ................... 85
see Storage compartments KEYLESS-GO
Intermittent wiping ........................... 104 Starter switch positions ................... 86
Rain sensor .................................... 104 Kickdown ........................................... 119
IR emitter Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 124
Replacing bulbs ............................. 319 Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 250
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – Knee bag .............................................. 40
LATCH-type)
see Children in the vehicle L
Labels
J
Certification ................................... 346
Jack ..................................................... 270 Emission control information ......... 347
Jump starting ..................................... 338 Tire and Loading Information
placard ........................................... 237
K Tire inflation pressure .................... 230
Lamps, exterior
Key, Mechanical
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97
Loss of ............................................. 79
Front .............................................. 319
Replacing ......................................... 80
Messages in the multifunction
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 314
display ........................................... 299
Valet locking .................................... 85
Switching on/off .............................. 97
Key, SmartKey
Lamps, indicator and warning
Battery check lamp .......................... 79
ABS .......................................... 29, 305
Checking batteries ........................... 79
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 100
Factory setting ........................... 77, 79
Brakes ........................................... 305
Global locking (KEYLESS-
Coolant .......................................... 311
GO) .................................................. 79
Distance warning lamp .......... 151, 309
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 77
Engine malfunction ........................ 310
Global unlocking (KEYLESS-
ESC .......................................... 29, 309
GO) .................................................. 79
ESC OFF ........................................ 308
Global unlocking
Fog lamps ........................................ 99
(SmartKey) ....................................... 77
Front passenger front air bag off
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 78
(Canada only) .......................... 46, 313
Locking/unlocking ........................... 76
Front passenger front air bag off
Loss of ............................................. 79
(USA only) ................................ 43, 314
Messages in the multifunction
Fuel tank reserve ........................... 310
display ........................................... 293
High-beam headlamps ............. 29, 100
Opening, trunk ................................. 82
Instrument cluster ......................... 304
Opening and closing the power
Low-beam headlamps ................ 30, 98
tilt/sliding sunroof or the
Low tire pressure/TPMS
panorama roof ............................... 107
malfunction telltale ........................ 312
Opening and closing the windows . 107
Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 52, 307
Remote control ................................ 76
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 12
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

12 Index

SRS .......................................... 36, 308 Manual shift program ....................... 122


Turn signals ..................................... 29 Maximum engine speed
Lane Keeping Assist .......................... 177 see Vehicle specification
Messages in the multifunction Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 250
display ........................................... 283 Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 250
Switching on or off ......................... 138 Maximum permissible tire
LATCH-type child seat anchors (ISOFIX) inflation pressure .............................. 251
see Children in the vehicle Mechanical key
License plate lamps see Key, Mechanical
Messages in the multifunction Media interface ................................. 201
display ........................................... 301 Memory function ................................. 96
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 265 Menus
Lighter see Control system menus
see Cigarette lighter Minispare wheel
Lighting ................................................ 97 see Spare wheel
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 98 Mirrors .................................................. 94
Exterior ............................................ 97 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 95
Interior ........................................... 103 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Limp-home mode .............................. 124 position ............................................ 95
Load index (tires) ...................... 246, 250 Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 95
Loading Interior rear view mirror ................... 94
see Vehicle loading Memory function .............................. 96
Locator lighting ................................. 142 Vanity mirror .................................. 205
Locking the vehicle MOExtended system ......................... 329
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 77 MOExtended tires ..................... 329, 353
Manually ........................................ 315 MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 363
SmartKey ......................................... 76 Motor Octane Number
Loss of see MON
Key .................................................. 79 Multifunction display ........................ 128
Service and Warranty Information Symbol messages .......................... 287
booklet .......................................... 346 Text messages ............................... 274
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 98 Vehicle status messages ............... 272
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97 Multifunction display messages
Indicator lamp .................................. 30 ABS ....................................... 288, 289
Replacing bulbs ............................. 319 Active headlamps .......................... 299
Switching on .................................... 98 Advanced TPMS ............................. 285
Lubricants .......................................... 359 Air bags ......................................... 276
Lumbar support ................................... 89 Air filter .......................................... 299
AIRMATIC ...................................... 292
M Alternator .............................. 284, 297
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 292
Maintenance ........................................ 21
Automatic
Maintenance System
transmission .......................... 283, 284
Service indicator display ................ 259
Backrests ....................................... 293
Service indicator message ............. 258
Battery ................................... 284, 297
Service term exceeded .................. 259
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 281
Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Brake fluid ..................................... 289
beam headlamps) ................................ 98
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 13
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 13

Brake pads ..................................... 287 N


Child seat ...................................... 279
Coolant .......................................... 295 Navigation system
Corner-illuminating lamps .............. 303 see Separate operating instructions
Cruise control ................................ 279 Navi menu .......................................... 134
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 280 NECK-PRO active front head
Doors ............................................. 293 restraints ............................................. 54
EBP ................................................ 289 Resetting ....................................... 316
Engine oil ....................................... 298 Nets, parcel ....................................... 199
ESC ............................... 288, 289, 290 Night View Assist Plus ...................... 172
Fog lamps .............................. 300, 302 Cleaning the windshield in front of
Front passenger front air bag ........ 276 the camera .................................... 263
Gas cap .......................................... 298 Normal occupant weight .................. 251
High-beam lamps ........................... 301 Number, vehicle identification
Hood .............................................. 293 (VIN) ................................................... 346
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 283
License plate lamps ....................... 301 O
Light sensor ................................... 302 Occupant Classification System
Low-beam lamps ............................ 302 see OCS (Occupant Classification
Parking brake ................................ 289 System)
Parking lamps ................................ 301 Occupant distribution ....................... 251
Power steering ............................... 295 Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® .................................... 274 Air bags ........................................... 37
Radar sensors ................................ 282 BabySmart™ .................................... 46
Reserve fuel ................................... 298 Children and air bags ....................... 37
Reverse lamp ................................. 300 Children in the vehicle ..................... 56
Side marker lamps ......................... 300 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
SmartKey ....................................... 293 (ISOFIX) ........................................... 59
SRS ................................................ 290 Fastening the seat belts ................... 50
Tele Aid .......................................... 290 Front passenger front air bag off
Tire inflation pressure ............ 284, 304 indicator lamp (Canada
Tire pressure monitor .................... 285 only) ........................................ 46, 313
Tires ...................................... 284, 304 Front passenger front air bag off
Trunk ............................................. 293 indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 43, 314
Turn signals ................................... 303 Infant and child restraint systems .... 56
Washer fluid ................................... 294 Introduction ..................................... 36
Multifunction steering wheel ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –
Adjustment ...................................... 93 LATCH-type) ..................................... 59
Buttons .......................................... 126 OCS (Occupant Classification
Cleaning ......................................... 265 System) ........................................... 43
Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 93, 145 PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 53
Gearshift control ............................ 122 Seat belts .................................. 39, 48
Heating ............................................ 94 OCS (Occupant Classification
Memory function .............................. 96 System) ................................................ 43
Overview .......................................... 30 Self-test ........................................... 46
Odometer ........................................... 129
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 14
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

14 Index

Oil, oil level PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp


see Engine oil (Canada only)
On-board computer see Front passenger front air bag
see Control system off indicator lamp (Canada only)
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 121 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Operating safety .................................. 22 (USA only)
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 262 see Front passenger front air bag
Overhead control panel ...................... 33 off indicator lamp (USA only)
Passenger safety
P see Occupant safety
Pedals ................................................. 254
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 261 Pelvis air bags ..................................... 42
Paintwork code ................................. 347 Phone
Panic alarm .......................................... 61 see Telephone
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 265
sliding panel ...................................... 195 Power assistance .............................. 254
Cleaning ......................................... 265 Power outlets .................................... 207
Operation ....................................... 195
Power seats
Roller sunblinds ............................. 194
see Seats
Synchronizing ................................ 196
Power steering
Parcel nets ......................................... 199
Messages in the multifunction
Parking ............................................... 113
display ........................................... 295
Parking Guidance .................. 168, 170
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Parktronic system .......................... 165
Operation ....................................... 192
Parking and standing lamp
Synchronizing ................................ 194
Replacing bulbs ............................. 319
Power washer .................................... 261
Parking brake .................................... 113
Power windows ................................. 105
Messages in the multifunction
Cleaning ......................................... 264
display ........................................... 289
Operation ....................................... 105
Parking Guidance .............................. 168
Rear door window, override
Canceling ....................................... 171
switch .............................................. 60
Detecting a parking space ............. 169
Synchronizing ................................ 107
Parking .......................................... 170
Practical hints ................................... 268
Parking position
Preglow indicator lamp ..................... 110
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 95
PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 53
Transmission position .................... 118
Messages in the multifunction
Parktronic system
display ........................................... 274
Cleaning system sensors ............... 263
Malfunction .................................... 168 PRE-SAFE® Brake ................................. 69
Minimum distance ......................... 167 Activating/deactivating ................. 137
Sensor range ................................. 166 Messages in the multifunction
Switching on/off ........................... 168 display ........................................... 274
System sensors ............................. 166 Problems
Warning indicators ................... 27, 167 While driving .................................. 112
Parts service ...................................... 346 With vehicle ..................................... 23
With wipers .................................... 105
Product information ............................ 20
Production options weight ............... 251
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 15
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 15

Program mode selector dial (E 63 AMG) Reminder, Seat belt


Automatic shift program ........ 121, 123 see Seat belts, Telltale
Program mode selector switch Remote control
Automatic shift program ................ 120 see Key, SmartKey
Proximity key Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ............. 212
see Key, SmartKey Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 211
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 251 Replacing
Key .................................................. 80
R Replacing bulbs ................................. 318
Reporting safety defects .................... 23
RACE START (E 63 AMG) ................... 159
Research Octane Number
RACETIMER ........................................ 132
see RON
Radar sensors
Reserve fuel
Messages in the multifunction
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 282
display ........................................... 298
Switching on or off ......................... 144
Warning lamp ................................. 310
Radiator ..................................... 224, 252
Restraint systems
Radio
see Occupant safety
Selecting stations .......................... 134
Retaining hook .................................. 199
Radio transmitters ............................ 257
Rims ........................................... 251, 353
Rain sensor
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 210
see Intermittent wiping
Roller sunblinds ................................. 194
Rear axle oil ....................................... 360
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 363
Rear center console ashtray
Roof rack ............................................ 198
see Ashtrays
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 265
Rear center seat belt
Run-flat tires
Unblocking ....................................... 51
see MOExtended tires
Rear doors
Child safety locks ............................ 60
Rear door window
S
Override switch ................................ 60 Safety
Rear fog lamp Driving safety systems ..................... 61
see Fog lamps Occupant safety ............................... 36
Rear lamps Reporting defects ............................ 23
see Tail lamps Safety belts
Rear seat head restraints see Seat belts
see Head restraints Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52
Rear view camera .............................. 171 Seat belts ............................................. 48
Cleaning the camera lens .............. 263 Adjustment function ........................ 51
Rear window defroster ..................... 191 Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 53
Recommended tire inflation Children in the vehicle ..................... 56
pressure ..................................... 229, 251 Cleaning ......................................... 266
Refilling Fastening ......................................... 50
AdBlue® ......................................... 334 Height adjustment ........................... 51
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 362 Proper use of ................................... 49
Refueling ............................................ 220 Rear center seat .............................. 51
Regular checks .................................. 222 Safety guidelines ............................. 39
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 16
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

16 Index

Safety notes ..................................... 48 Sidewall (tires) .................................. 251


Telltale ............................... 29, 52, 307 SmartKey
Seat heating ......................................... 92 see Key, SmartKey
Seating capacity ................................ 238 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Seats ..................................................... 87 see Key, SmartKey
Adjustment ...................................... 87 Snow chains ...................................... 252
Drive-dynamic multicontour seat ..... 91 Snow tires
Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 93 see Winter tires
Heating ............................................ 92 Spare wheel ....................................... 353
Memory function .............................. 96 Mounting ....................................... 323
Messages in the multifunction Storage location ............................ 271
display ........................................... 293 Speedometer ....................................... 28
Split rear seat bench ..................... 199 Speed settings
Ventilation ....................................... 92 Cruise control ................................ 147
Securing cargo DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 199 Resume function ................... 148, 156
Selective setting SRS
see Key, SmartKey Indicator lamp .................................. 29
Selector lever SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
see Gear selector lever Indicator lamp ......................... 36, 308
Self-test Messages in the multifunction
BabySmart™ .................................... 47 display ........................................... 290
OCS (Occupant Classification Standing water, driving through ...... 257
System) ........................................... 46 Starter switch positions
Tele Aid .......................................... 208 KEYLESS-GO .................................... 86
Service SmartKey ......................................... 85
see Maintenance Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 110
Service, parts .................................... 346 Starting the engine ........................... 109
Service and warranty information ..... 20 Steering column
Service intervals see Multifunction steering wheel,
see Maintenance System, Service Adjustment
indicator message Steering wheel
Service life (tires) .............................. 242 see Multifunction steering wheel
Service menu ..................................... 138 Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 122
Settings Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 212
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 79 Storage compartments ..................... 201
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 77 Storing tires ....................................... 243
Memory function .............................. 96 Sunroof
Menu ............................................. 139 see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 79 Sunshade
Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 77 Rear window .................................. 205
Shelf below rear window, cleaning .. 266 Sun visors .................................. 204, 205
Side impact air bags ........................... 41 Suspension tuning
Side marker lamps see AIRMATIC
Cleaning lenses ............................. 262
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 300
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 17
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 17

T Remote door unlock ...................... 211


Roadside Assistance button .......... 210
Tachometer .................................. 28, 126 Search & Send ............................... 211
Overspeed range ........................... 126 SOS button .................................... 209
Tail lamps Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 212
Cleaning lenses ............................. 262 System self-test ............................. 208
Tar stains ........................................... 261 Telephone ............................................. 30
Technical data Answering/ending a call ................ 136
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 362 Hands-free microphone ................... 33
Brake fluid ..................................... 362 Menu ............................................. 135
Capacities fuels, coolants, Operation ....................................... 135
lubricants etc. ................................ 359 Phone book .................................... 136
Coolant .......................................... 365 Redialing ........................................ 137
Engine oil additives ........................ 362 Temperature
Engine oils ..................................... 361 Coolant .......................................... 125
Fuel requirements .......................... 363 Interior temperature ...................... 186
Gasoline additives .......................... 364 Outside .......................................... 126
Identification labels ....................... 346 Tether anchorage points
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 362 see Children in the vehicle
Rims and tires ................................ 353 Through-loading feature ................... 198
Spare wheel ................................... 358 Tie-down rings ................................... 199
Vehicle specification E 350 ............ 348 Tightening torque
Vehicle specification Wheels ........................................... 328
E 350 4MATIC ................................ 349 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 251
Vehicle specification Tire and Loading Information
E 350 BlueTEC ............................... 348 placard ............................................... 237
Vehicle specification E 550 ............ 350 Tire and loading terminology ........... 249
Vehicle specification TIREFIT ............................................... 329
E 550 4MATIC ................................ 351
Tire Identification Number
Vehicle specification E 63 AMG ..... 352
see TIN
Washer and headlamp cleaning
Tire inflation pressure
system ................................... 361, 367
Checking ........................................ 231
Technical data (dimensions)
Important notes on ........................ 230
see Vehicle specification
Label on the inside of fuel filler
Technical data (electrical system)
flap ................................................ 230
see Vehicle specification
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 237
Technical data (engine)
Tire labeling ....................................... 245
see Vehicle specification
Tire load rating .................................. 250
Technical data (weights)
Tire ply composition and material
see Vehicle specification
used .................................................... 251
Tele Aid ............................................... 207
Tire pressure loss warning system . 232
Emergency calls ............................. 208
Tire repair kit
Information button ......................... 210
see TIREFIT
Initiating an emergency call
Tires ........................................... 228, 353
manually ........................................ 209
Advanced Tire Pressure
Messages in the multifunction
Monitoring System (Advanced
display ........................................... 290
TPMS) ............................................ 233
Remote door lock .......................... 212
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 18
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

18 Index

Air pressure ................................... 229 Towing eye bolt ................................. 341


Care and maintenance ................... 242 Traction ...................................... 244, 251
Cleaning ......................................... 243 Transfer case ..................................... 124
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 241 Transmission
Important notes on tire inflation see Automatic transmission
pressure ........................................ 230 Transmission fluid level .................... 226
Inflation pressure ........................... 231 Transmission gear selector lever
Information placard ....................... 237 see Gear selector lever
Inspection ...................................... 242 Transmission positions .................... 118
Labeling ......................................... 245 Traveling abroad ............................... 257
Load index ............................. 246, 250 Tread (tires) ....................................... 251
Load rating .................................... 250 Tread depth (tires) .................... 242, 252
Messages in the multifunction Treadwear .......................................... 243
display ................................... 284, 304 Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 242, 252
MOExtended .................................. 353 Trip menu ........................................... 129
Ply composition and material Trunk
used ............................................... 251 Closing ............................................. 82
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 231 Fuse box ........................................ 343
Retreads ........................................ 228 Messages in the multifunction
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 353 display ........................................... 293
Rotation ......................................... 244 Opening ........................................... 82
Service life ..................................... 242 Opening/closing system .................. 83
Sizes .............................................. 353 Tie-down rings ............................... 199
Snow chains .................................. 252 Trunk lid emergency release ............ 84
Speed rating .......................... 247, 251 Unlocking manually ....................... 315
Storing ........................................... 243 Valet locking .................................... 85
Temperature .......................... 230, 244 Turning off the engine ...................... 113
Terminology ................................... 249 Turn signals ....................................... 100
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 329 Cleaning lenses ............................. 262
Tire Identification Number ............. 251 Indicator lamps ................................ 29
Tire pressure loss warning system . 232 Messages in the multifunction
TPMS low tire pressure/ display ........................................... 303
malfunction telltale ........................ 312 Replacing bulbs ............................. 319
Traction ................................. 244, 251
Tread ............................................. 251 U
Tread depth ........................... 242, 252
Treadwear ...................................... 243 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear indicators ............. 242, 252 Standards .................................. 243, 252
Vehicle maximum load on .............. 252 Units
Wear pattern .................................. 244 Selecting speedometer display
Winter tires ............................ 252, 353 mode ............................................. 141
Tire speed rating ....................... 247, 251 Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 362
Top tether Unlocking the vehicle
see Children in the vehicle KEYLESS-GO .................................... 77
Total load limit ................................... 251 Manually ........................................ 314
Towing SmartKey ......................................... 76
Towing eye bolt .............................. 341 Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 266
Vehicle ........................................... 340 Useful features .................................. 203
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 19
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Index 19

V W
Valet locking ........................................ 85 Warning sounds
Vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 151
Battery ........................................... 336 Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 52
Care ............................................... 260 Parking brake ................................ 289
Control system .............................. 126 Parking Guidance ........................... 170
Identification Number (VIN) ........... 346 Parktronic system .......................... 168
Locking/unlocking ........................... 76 Seat belt telltale ............................ 307
Lowering (wheel change) ............... 328 Warranty coverage ............................ 346
Modifications and alterations, Washer and headlamp cleaning
Operating safety .............................. 22 system ................................................ 367
Towing ........................................... 340 Washer fluid
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 314 Messages in the multifunction
Vehicle dimensions display ........................................... 294
see Vehicle specification Mixing ratio .................................... 367
Vehicle Identification Number Refilling .......................................... 227
(VIN) ................................................... 346 Washing the vehicle .......................... 260
Vehicle jack Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 244
see Jack Weights (vehicle)
Vehicle level control see Vehicle specification
see AIRMATIC Wheel
Vehicle lighting .................................... 97 Changing ....................................... 323
Vehicle loading Removing ....................................... 326
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 199 Spare ............................................. 323
Instructions .................................... 197 Tightening torque ........................... 328
Load limit ....................................... 238 Wheels, sizes ..................................... 353
Roof rack ....................................... 198 Wheels, Tires and .............................. 228
Split rear seat bench ..................... 199 Window curtain air bags ..................... 42
Terminology ................................... 249 Windows
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 252 see Power windows
Vehicle specification Windows, cleaning ............................ 264
E 350 ............................................. 348 Windshield
E 350 4MATIC ................................ 349 Cleaning wiper blades .................... 264
E 350 BlueTEC ............................... 348 Washer fluid ................................... 367
E 550 ............................................. 350 Wipers ........................................... 104
E 550 4MATIC ................................ 351 Windshield wipers
E 63 AMG ...................................... 352 Replacing wiper blades .................. 322
Vehicle status message memory .... 139 Winter cover .............................. 224, 252
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 268 Winter driving
Vehicle washing Instructions .................................... 253
see Vehicle care Radiator cover ............................... 252
Vehicle weights Snow chains .................................. 252
see Vehicle specification Tires ............................................... 252
Winter tires ................................ 252, 353
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 266
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 20
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

20 Introduction

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our


product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 21
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Introduction 21

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC


Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Important notice for California retail Maintenance


buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
more of the following occurs: (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (in the USA) or the
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Roadside Assistance section of the Service
writing of the need for its repair, and Warranty Information Booklet (in
(2) the same substantial defect or Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or ownership
notified us in writing of the need for its If you change your address, be sure to send
repair, or in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of the Service and Warranty Information
repair of the same or different substantial Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
total of more than 30 calendar days. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
Written notification should not be sent to a
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
dealer, it should be addressed to

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 22
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

22 Introduction

contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety


need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all G Warning!
literature with the vehicle to make it available Work improperly carried out on electronic
to the next operator. components and associated software could
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to cause them to cease functioning. Because the
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” vehicle’s electronic components are
found in the Service and Warranty interconnected, any modifications made may
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- produce an undesired effect on other
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the systems. Electronic malfunctions could
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes seriously impair the operating safety of your
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in vehicle.
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Operating your vehicle outside the
Other improper work or modifications on the
USA or Canada
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign the operating safety of the vehicle.
countries, please be aware that: Some safety systems only function while the
RService facilities or replacement parts may engine is running. You should therefore never
not be readily available. turn off the engine while driving.
RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with G Warning!
catalytic converters may not be available;
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
catalysts.
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower Such blows can be caused, for example, by
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause running over an obstacle, road debris or a
engine damage. pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
for delivery in Europe under our European that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Delivery Program. For details, consult an Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: Rslow down carefully
In the USA:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department distance from the road
One Mercedes Drive Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
In Canada: appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
European Delivery Department qualified maintenance or repair facility for
98 Vanderhoof Avenue further inspection or repairs.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 23
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Introduction 23

Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects


Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
For the USA only:
familiar with the following information and
rules: The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Rtraffic rules and regulations of 1966”.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Reporting safety defects
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to which could cause a crash or could cause
make you and others aware of various risks. injury or death, you should immediately
Do not remove any of these warning labels inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
unless explicitly instructed to do so by Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
information on the label itself. Removing notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
warning labels may cause you and others to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
be unaware of certain risks which may result open an investigation, and if it finds that a
in an accident and/or personal injury. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Vehicle data recording
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department (Including notice pursuant to California Code
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. § 9951)
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 24
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

24 Introduction

This information helps, for example, to


diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 25
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

25

Exterior view ....................................... 26


Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28

At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 30
Center console .................................... 32
Overhead control panel ...................... 33
Door control panel .............................. 34
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 26
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

26 Exterior view

Exterior view
At a glance

i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Trunk: Cleaning 264
Locking and unlocking 76 D Doors:
Opening and closing 81 Locking and unlocking 76,
Valet locking 85 314
; Rear window defroster 191 E Wipers 104
Wiper blades, replacing 322
= Rear lamps 318
Wiper blades, cleaning 264
? Fuel filler flap 220
F Hood 223
A Exterior rear view mirrors 95
G Front lamps 318
Parking position 95
H Headlamp cleaning system 102
B Roof:
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 192 I Front towing eye 341
Panorama roof with power J Tires and wheels 228
tilt/sliding panel 194
Rims and tires 353
C Windshield: K Rear towing eye 341
Wiping with washer fluid 105
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 27
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Cockpit 27

Cockpit

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel gearshift KEYLESS-GO start/stop
control 121 button 86

; Cruise control lever:


H Steering wheel adjustment
stalk 93
Cruise control 146
DISTRONIC PLUS 149 I Combination switch:
Turn signals 100
= Instrument cluster 125
Wipers 104
? Multifunction steering High beam 100
wheel 126
J Parking brake pedal 113
A Horn
K On-board diagnostics
B Gear selector lever 115 (OBD) socket
C Front Parktronic warning L Hood lock release 223
indicators 167
M Parking brake release 113
D Overhead control panel 33
N Door control panel 34
E Glove box 201
O Exterior lamp switch 97
F Center console 32
P Night View Assist Plus 172
G Starter switch 85

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 28
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

28 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster
At a glance

i Please refer to the overview of the


indicator and warning lamps
(Y page 29).
Function Page
: Fuel gauge 126
; Speedometer
= Cruise control speed
segments 146
DISTRONIC PLUS
segments 151
? Multifunction display 128
A Coolant temperature gauge 125
B Tachometer 126
C Clock
D Instrument cluster
illumination 125
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 29
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Instrument cluster 29

Indicator and warning lamps

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: ESC OFF warning lamp 308 G Engine malfunction
indicator lamp 310
; Preglow indicator lamp,
diesel engine only 110 H Brake warning lamp,
Canada only 306
= Front foglamp indicator
lamp 99 I Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS
? Rear foglamp indicator malfunction telltale, USA 233,
lamp 99 only 312
A Left turn signal indicator Low tire pressure telltale, 233,
lamp 100 Canada only 312
B ESC warning lamp 308 J Coolant temperature
warning lamp 311
C Distance warning lamp1 309
K Brake warning lamp, USA
D Right turn signal indicator only 306
lamp 100
L Antilock Brake System
E Seat belt telltale 307 (ABS) indicator lamp 305
F Supplemental Restraint M High-beam headlamp
System (SRS) indicator indicator lamp 100
lamp 308

1 Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It
should go out when the engine is running.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 30
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

30 Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Multifunction steering wheel


N Low-beam headlamp
At a glance

indicator lamp 97
O ESC SPORT warning lamp 67
P Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp 310

Function Page
: Multifunction display 128
; Press button W or X
to set the volume. 134
Press button ~:
to end a call 136
to reject an incoming call 136
Press button 6:
to answer a call 136
to dial2 136
to redial2 137
Press button 8 to mute.
= Press button ? to
activate the Voice Control
System3.

2 Function only available in telephone menu.


3 Function only available in vehicles with Voice Control System.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 31
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Multifunction steering wheel 31

Function Page Function Page


? Press button % briefly: Press button a:

At a glance
to go to the next higher to confirm selection or
menu level 128 message 128
to confirm display message 128 to switch to the phone
book2 135
to cancel the Voice Control
System3 to dial a selected phone
number2 136
Press and hold button
% to select the standard
display. 128
A Press button = or ;: 128
to call up line for menus
to scroll to the left or right
to select menus
Press button 9 or :
briefly: 128
to select submenus
to scroll up or down through
lists
to select previous or next
track, scene, or stored
station within Audio menu 134
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Tel menu 135
Press and hold button
9 or :: 128
to select previous or next
track or scene with quick
search or to select previous
or next station in waveband
(if no station list is
available) within Audio
menu 134
to start the quick search in
the phone book within Tel
menu 135

3 Function only available in vehicles with Voice Control System.


2 Function only available in telephone menu.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 32
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

32 Center console

Center console
At a glance

Function Page Function Page


: Hazard warning flasher E Rear seat head restraints
switch 101 switch, folding down 89
; Alarm system indicator F Rear window sunshade
lamp 72 switch 205
= Front passenger front air G Dual-zone automatic
bag off indicator lamp, USA 43, climate control 181
only 314 3-zone automatic climate
Front passenger front air control, Canada only 183
bag off indicator lamp, 46, Rear window defroster 191
Canada only 314
H Storage compartment 201
? Electronic Stability Control Ashtray 206
system (ESC) switch 65
Cup holder 203
A COMAND system, see
I Damping system switch 163
separate operating
instructions J Vehicle level control switch 163
B Seat heating switch 92 K Storage compartment 201
C Seat ventilation switch 92 L Program mode selector
switch 120
D Parktronic system
deactivation switch 168 M COMAND controller, see
separate operating
instructions
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 33
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Overhead control panel 33

Overhead control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Rear interior lighting on/off 103 E Garage door opener 212
; Automatic interior lighting F Hands-free microphone for
control 103 Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
= Right reading lamp on/off 103
Voice Control System4
? Roof panel switch 192, G Roadside Assistance
195
button (Tele Aid system) 210
A Information button (Tele H Left reading lamp on/off 103
Aid system) 210
I Front interior lighting on/
B SOS button (Tele Aid
off 103
system) 209
C Interior rear view mirror 94
D Integrated electronic
compass 216

4 See separate operating instructions.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 34
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

34 Door control panel

Door control panel


At a glance

Function Page
: Memory function (for
storing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel
settings) 96
; Seat adjustment switches 88
= Central locking/unlocking
switch 81
? Inside door handle 80
A Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 95
B Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 105
C Rear door window override
switch 60
D Trunk opening switch, trunk
opening/closing system 81
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 35
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

35

Vehicle equipment .............................. 36


Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
Anti-theft systems .............................. 71

Safety and security


212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 36
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

36 Occupant safety

Vehicle equipment G Warning!


Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security

purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 56) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH) also known as ISOFIX
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp 6 is not lit while the engine is running.
- USA only: Front passenger seat with
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 37
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 37

G Warning! However, no system available today can


The SRS self-check has detected a completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp Deployment of the air bags temporarily
6 releases a small amount of dust from the air
Rdoes not come on at all bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful

Safety and security


to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
Rfails to go out after approximately vehicle. The dust might cause some
4 seconds after the engine was started temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rcomes on after the engine was started or asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
while driving this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
For your safety, we strongly recommend that
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
Center immediately to have the system
air by opening a window or door.
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
G Warning!
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS
To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
might also deploy unexpectedly and
bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
unnecessarily which could also result in injury
and front passenger to always be in a properly
as well.
seated position and to wear their respective
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates seat belt.
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
For maximum protection in the event of a
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work
collision always be in normal seated position
on the SRS must therefore only be performed
with your back against the seat backrest.
by qualified technicians. Contact an
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
properly positioned on your body.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
speed and force, a proper seating position
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
and correct positioning of the hands on the
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
Air bags inflates with great force instantaneously:
G Warning! RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential position that is as upright as possible with
of injury and fatality in certain your back against the seat backrest.
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
side knee bag) possible, still permitting proper operation
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center of
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
You should be able to accomplish this by

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 38
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

38 Occupant safety

adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If G Warning!


you have any difficulties, please contact an Accident research shows that the safest place
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
steering wheel or dashboard. related injury if occupants, especially
Safety and security

RKeep hands on the outside of the steering children, are not properly seated or restrained
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside when next to a side impact air bag which
the rim can increase the risk and potential needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver order to do its job.
front air bag inflates. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
when the seat is occupied. wear the seat belt properly, and for
children 12 years old and under,
ROccupants, especially children, should
use an appropriately sized infant
never place their bodies or lean their heads
restraint, toddler restraint, or
in the area of the door where the side
booster seat recommended for the
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
size and weight of the child.
serious injuries or death should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s
booster seat recommended for the size and side knee bag)
weight of the child. Rside impacts (side impact air bags, pelvis
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and air bags and window curtain air bags) if the
under must never ride in the front seat, system determines the need for air bag
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized deployment
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag
Only in the event of such a situation will they
deactivation system installed in the vehicle
provide their supplemental protection.
to deactivate the front passenger front air
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise The driver and passengers should always
they will be struck by the air bag when it wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious possible for the air bags to provide their
or fatal injury will result. supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
Failure to follow these instructions can result
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
bags will not deploy. The driver and
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you passengers will then be protected to the
make the buyer aware of this safety extent possible by a properly fastened seat
information. Be sure to give the buyer this belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
Operator’s Manual. needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 39
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 39

whether or not your vehicle is equipped with RDo no change or remove any component or
air bags. part of the SRS.
It is important to your safety and that of your RDo not install additional trim material, seat
passengers to have deployed air bags covers, badges, etc. over the steering
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air wheel hub, front passenger front air bag

Safety and security


bags repaired. This will help to make sure the cover, outboard sides of the seat
air bags will continue to provide supplemental backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
crash protection for occupants. trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) electronic equipment on or near SRS
and air bag components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
G Warning! free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have umbrellas, etc.).
been subjected to stress in an accident RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
from the coat hooks or handles over the
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
door. These items may be thrown around in
installed or supplied by an authorized
the vehicle and cause head and other
Mercedes-Benz Center.
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency deployed.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain RAir bag system components will be hot after
perchlorate material, which may require
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check with your local RNever place your feet on the instrument
government’s disposal guidelines. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
California residents, see keep both feet on the floor in front of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ seat.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD causing unintended air bag deployment.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Work on the SRS must therefore only be
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible performed by qualified technicians.
pre-tensioners in addition to the Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pyrotechnic ETDs. Center.
RDo RFor your protection and the protection of
not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear. others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo modifications of any kind may be made of the air bags, there is the possibility of
to any components or wiring of the SRS.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 40
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

40 Occupant safety

abrasions or other, potentially more serious Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. passenger front air bag deployment is
additionally influenced by the passenger’s
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly weight category as identified by the Occupant
recommend that you inform the subsequent Classification System (OCS) (Y page 43).
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
Safety and security

Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the


Also refer them to the applicable section in front passenger-side occupant, the higher the
the Operator’s Manual. vehicle deceleration rate required for second
stage inflation of the front passenger front air
Front air bags bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger based on OCS weight sensor readings,
front air bag ; are designed to provide detects that the front passenger seat is
increased protection for the driver and front occupied
passenger against the risk of injuries to the Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center
head and thorax. console is not lit (USA only: (Y page 43),
Driver and front passenger front air bag and Canada only: (Y page 46))
driver’s side knee bag are deployed Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts threshold
Rif the system determines that air bag ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deployment can offer additional protection deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
to that provided by the seat belt place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front passenger seat. This could cause
belt is in use the front or side impact air bag on the front
Rindependently of the side impact air bags, passenger side to deploy in a crash which
pelvis air bags and/or the window curtain exceeds the system’s deployment
air bags threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been Knee bag
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Knee bag = is designed to provide increased
the air bags to have different rates of inflation. protection for the driver against the risk of
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle injuries to the knees, thighs and lower legs.
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag Knee bag = is located on the driver side
control unit.
lower instrument panel. It is designed to
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 41
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 41

operate together with the driver front air bag Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
in certain frontal impacts if the system impacted side of the vehicle are in use
determines that air bag deployment can offer Rindependently of the front air bags
additional protection to that provided by the
Rindependently of the ETDs
seat belt. Knee bag = operates best in
conjunction with a properly positioned and Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front

Safety and security


fastened seat belt. passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
Side impact air bags seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the
G Warning! front passenger side impact air bag will
deploy independently of the empty seat.
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
control are located in the doors. Do not
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
modify any components of the doors or door
properly inserted into the buckle.
trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers. The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the
Improper repair work on the doors or the
system’s deployment threshold.
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side The side impact air bags will not deploy in the
impact air bags inoperative or causing event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
doors must therefore only be performed by the preset deployment threshold for the side
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized impact air bags.
Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
Front side impact air bags : and rear side interfere with or prevent the deployment of
impact air bags ; are designed to provide the side impact air bags and/or pelvis air
increased protection for the thorax but not bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the head, neck and arms. Center for availability.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 42
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

42 Occupant safety

Pelvis air bags G Warning!


G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
Safety and security

the side impact air bags and/or pelvis air


bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.

Window curtain air bags


G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.

Pelvis air bags : are designed to provide


increased protection for the pelvis.
Pelvis air bags : are deployed
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Rindependently of whether the seat belt is in
use
Rindependently of the front air bags Window curtain air bags : are designed to
Rindependently provide increased protection for the head but
of the ETDs
not the chest or arms.
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: Front Window curtain air bags : are deployed
passenger pelvis air bag : will not deploy if
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
the OCS senses that the front passenger seat
is empty and the front passenger seat belt is Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
not fastened. With the front passenger seat vehicle deceleration or acceleration
empty and the seat belt fastened, front Rindependently of the front air bags
passenger pelvis air bag : will deploy
Rregardless of whether the front passenger
independently of the empty seat. Whether a
seat belt is recognized as fastened depends seat is occupied
on whether or not the latch plate is properly Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the
inserted into the buckle. impacted side of the vehicle is in use
Pelvis air bags : are not deployed in side Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
impacts which do not exceed the system’s determines that air bag deployment can
deployment threshold. offer additional protection to that provided
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in the event by the seat belt
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
deceleration or acceleration exceeds the in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
preset deployment threshold for pelvis air deployment threshold.
bags :.
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
indicated by the arrows.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 43
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 43

Occupant Classification System herself in the seat until the 45


indicator lamp goes out.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
standard equipment in USA. In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
The OCS activates or deactivates the front
deployment when the OCS has classified the
passenger front air bag automatically. The

Safety and security


front passenger seat occupant as weighting
respective status is based on the classified
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
occupant weight category determined by
old child in a standard child restraint or if the
weight sensor readings from the front
front passenger seat is classified as being
passenger seat.
empty.
The system does not deactivate
When the OCS senses that the front
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag passenger seat occupant is classified as
Rthe pelvis air bag being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Rthe
12-month-old child in a standard child
window curtain air bag
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) illuminate when the engine is started and
To be classified correctly, the front passenger remain illuminated, indicating that the front
must sit passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
Rin a position that is as upright as possible the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
with the back against the seat backrest when the engine is started and remain
Rwith the feet on the floor illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning When the OCS senses that the front
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to passenger seat occupant is classified as
properly approximate the occupant’s weight being heavier than the weight of a typical
category. 12-month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
If your seat, including the trim cover and
as a young teenager or a small adult), the
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then, depending on occupant
Only seat accessories approved by
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
illuminated or go out. With the 45
Both the driver and the front passenger indicator lamp illuminated, the front
should always use the 45 indicator passenger front air bag is deactivated. With
lamp as an indication of whether or not the the 45 indicator lamp out, the front
front passenger is properly positioned. passenger front air bag is activated.
G Warning! When the OCS senses that the front
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates passenger seat occupant is classified as an
when an adult or someone larger than a small adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the front passenger seat, have individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
the front passenger reposition himself or illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then goes out,

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 44
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

44 Occupant safety

indicating that the front passenger front air properly and use an appropriately sized infant
bag is activated. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, recommended for the size and weight of the
the front passenger front air bag is child.
deactivated and will not be deployed. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
Safety and security

If the 45 indicator lamp is not an inflating air bag. Note the following
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag important information when circumstances
is activated and will be deployed require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment technology designed to deactivate the front
threshold passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Rindependently of the side impact air bags when the system senses the weight of a
or pelvis air bag typical 12-month-old child or less along
If the front passenger front air bag is with the weight of a standard appropriate
deployed, the rate of inflation will be child restraint on the front passenger seat.
influenced by RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as front passenger seat will be seriously
assessed by the air bag control unit injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as could occur under some circumstances,
identified by the OCS even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
For more information on air bag display
completely eliminate this risk is to never
messages in the multifunction display, see
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
(Y page 276).
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
G Warning! recommend that you always place a child
According to accident statistics, children are in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
safer when properly restrained in the rear RIf you must install a rear-facing child
seating positions than in the front seating restraint on the front passenger seat
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that because circumstances require you to do
children be placed in the rear seats whenever so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp
possible. Regardless of seating position, is illuminated, indicating that the front
children 12 years old and under must be passenger front air bag is deactivated.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate Should the 45 indicator lamp not
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster illuminate or go out while the restraint is
seat recommended for the size and weight of installed, please check installation.
the child. Periodically check the 45 indicator
The infant or child restraint must be properly lamp while driving to make sure the
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the remains out, do not transport a child on the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. front passenger seat until the system has
Occupants, especially children, should always been repaired.
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 45
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 45

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the


front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

Safety and security


facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
45 indicator lamp : will be
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
children larger than the typical 12-month-
removed from the starter switch or with the
old child, the front passenger front air bag
starter switch in position 0.
may or may not be activated.
G Warning!
Deployment of the driver front air bag does If the red SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
not mean that the front passenger front air instrument cluster and the 45
bag also should have deployed.
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
The OCS may have determined is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
weight up to or less than that of a typical this case. Have the system checked by
12-month-old child seated in a standard qualified technicians as soon as possible.
child restraint – both of which are instances Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
where the system suppresses deployment Center.
of the front passenger front air bag even Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
though the impact met the criteria and was authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
of sufficient severity to deploy the driver In order to ensure proper operation of the air
front air bag bag system and OCS:
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
individual (such as a young teenager or a position that is as upright as possible with
small adult) or a child who weighs more your back against the seat backrest.
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
RWhile seated, an occupant should not
child in a standard child restraint – both of
which are instances where the system may position him/herself in such a way as to
suppress deployment of the front cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
passenger front air bag even though the from the seat bottom as this may result in
impact met the criteria and was of the OCS being unable to correctly
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front approximate the occupant’s weight
air bag category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 46
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

46 Occupant safety

OCS Self-test G Warning!


After turning the SmartKey in the starter According to accident statistics, children are
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the safer when properly restrained in the rear
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or seating positions than in the front seating
twice, the 45 indicator lamp position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
Safety and security

illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly children be placed in the rear seats whenever
sitting on the front passenger seat and the possible. Regardless of seating position,
system classifies the occupant as an adult, children 12 years old and under must be
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate seated and properly secured in an appropriate
and go out after approximately 6 seconds. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
If the seat is not occupied and the system
the child.
classifies the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 45 indicator lamp will The infant or child restraint must be properly
illuminate and not go out. secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
G Warning! top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
If the 45 indicator lamp does not child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You Occupants, especially children, should always
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
Center before seating any child on the front properly and use an appropriately sized infant
passenger seat. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
For more information, see the “Practical
child.
hints” section (Y page 314).
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
G Warning! an inflating air bag. Note the following
Never place anything between seat cushion important information when circumstances
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces require you to place a child in the front
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and passenger seat:
back of the child seat must make full contact RChildren 12 years old and under must never
with the passenger seat cushion and ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
backrest. Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger child seat, which operates with the
seat backrest. BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause to deactivate the front passenger front air
injuries to the child in case of an accident, bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
instead of increasing protection for the child. they will be struck by the air bag when it
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
installation of child seats. or fatal injury will result.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation injured or even killed if the front passenger
system front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
even with the air bag technology installed
is standard equipment in Canada.
in your vehicle. The only means to
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 47
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 47

completely eliminate this risk is to never indicator lamp go out while the restraint is
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint installed, please check installation. If the
in the front seat. We therefore strongly 45 indicator lamp remains out, do not
recommend that you always place a child use the BabySmart™ restraint to transport a
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. child on the front passenger seat until the

Safety and security


RIf you must install a BabySmart™ system has been repaired.
compatible rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 45 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 45 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 45 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,
the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
remains out, do not transport a child on the
system, are required for use with the
front passenger seat until the system has
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
been repaired.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the Center for information on availability. With
front passenger seat will be seriously the special child seat installed properly, the
injured or even killed if the front passenger front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
front air bag inflates.
45 indicator lamp : will be
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- illuminated, except with the SmartKey
facing child restraint on the front passenger removed from the starter switch or with the
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, starter switch in position 0.
use the proper child restraint The system does not deactivate
recommended for the age, size and weight
Rthe side impact air bag
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child Rthe pelvis air bag
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Rthe window curtain air bag
G Warning! Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front Self-test BabySmart™ without special
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if child seat installed
the 45 indicator lamp remains After turning the SmartKey in the starter
illuminated. switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
Please be sure to check the 45 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
indicator lamp every time you use a twice, the 45 indicator lamp comes
BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the on for approximately 6 seconds and then
front passenger seat. Should the 45 goes out.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 48
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

48 Occupant safety

If the 45 indicator lamp should not Seat belts


come on or is continuously lit, the system is
not functioning. You must see an authorized Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any The use of seat belts and infant and child
child on the front passenger seat. More restraint systems is required by law in all 50
information can be found in the “Practical
Safety and security

states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.


hints” section (Y page 313). territories and all Canadian provinces.
G Warning! Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile occupants should have their seat belts
phones, electronic tags such as those used in fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
ski passes and like electronic devices on the i See “Children in the vehicle”
front passenger seat. Signals from such (Y page 56) for information on
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™ Rinfants and children traveling with you in
air bag deactivation system. Such signal the vehicle
interference may cause the 45
Rrestraint systems for infants and children
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp 6 and/or the G Warning!
45 indicator lamp could be
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
continuously lit, indicating that the system is Always make sure all of your passengers are
not functioning. The front passenger front air properly restrained. You and your passengers
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to should always wear seat belts.
deploy in an accident.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
G Warning! position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
accident.
will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
with child seats which are not BabySmart™ be considerably more severe without your
compatible. seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
Never place anything between seat cushion
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system. The bottom of the child In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
seat must make full contact with the front death is lessened if you are properly wearing
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the as intended if the occupants are properly
child in case of an accident, instead of wearing their seat belts.
protecting the child.
G Warning!
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
installation of special child seats.
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 49
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 49

seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, driver side knee
wearer is in a position that is as upright as bag, front passenger front air bag, side
possible and the seat belt is properly impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window
positioned on the body. curtain air bags for door windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
G Warning!

Safety and security


seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than bolsters.
there are seat belts available. Make sure The system is designed to enhance the
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly protection offered to properly belted
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a driver’s side knee bag, and ETDs) and side
time. (side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
G Warning! which exceed preset deployment
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have thresholds and in certain rollovers (window
been subjected to stress in an accident must curtain air bags and ETDs).
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
points must be checked.
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
Only use seat belts which have been approved In a frontal crash, your body would move
by Mercedes-Benz. too far forward. That would increase the
Do not make any modifications to the seat chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation belt would also apply too much force to the
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when ribs or abdomen, which could severely
necessary. injure internal organs such as your liver or
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may spleen.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
not be able to provide adequate protection. section is located as close as possible to
Have all work carried out only by qualified the middle of the shoulder. It should not
technicians. Contact an authorized touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
Mercedes-Benz Center. portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
Proper use of seat belts the seat belt outlet.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
G Warning! your hips and not across the abdomen. If
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY the lap belt is positioned across your
RSeat belts can only protect when used abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other a crash.
way than as described in this section, as RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
that could result in serious injuries in case breakable objects in or on your clothing,
of an accident. such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
REach occupant should wear their seat belt these might cause injuries.
at all times, because seat belts help reduce RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
the likelihood of and potential severity of snugly. Take special care of this when
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. wearing loose clothing.
The integrated restraint system includes

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 50
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

50 Occupant safety

RNever use a seat belt for more than one children be placed in the rear seats whenever
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt possible. Regardless of seating position,
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
Safety and security

crash, you would not have the full width of restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the size and weight of the child. For additional
The twisted seat belt against your body information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on
restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen. G Warning!
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
as upright as possible. deactivation system, Canada only: Children
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make 12 years old and under must never ride in the
sure it is properly positioned. front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child
RNever place your feet on the instrument seat, which operates with the BabySmart™
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always system installed in the vehicle to deactivate
keep both feet on the floor in front of the the front passenger front air bag when it is
seat. installed properly. Otherwise they will be
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
booster seats, always follow the child seat will result.
manufacturer’s instructions.

G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.

Fastening the seat belts


G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 51
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 51

X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out Releasing the seat belts
of seat belt outlet :.
X Press seat belt release button ?
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
(Y page 50).
across the top of your shoulder and the lap Allow the retractor to completely rewind
portion across your hips. the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;

Safety and security


X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it (Y page 50).
clicks.
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat ! Make sure the seat belt retracts
belts on both front seats adjust to the completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
upper body automatically as necessary latch plate could get caught or pinched in
(Y page 51). the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the damage the seat belt and impair its
correct height (Y page 51). effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
Limited Warranty.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
belt have special seat belt retractors to
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
secure child restraints properly. For more
Center.
information on special seat belt retractors,
see “Infant and child restraint systems”
(Y page 56).
Rear center seat belt
To release the seat belt with seat belt release The seat belt of the rear center seat may be
button ?, see (Y page 51). blocked when the left rear seat backrest is
folded forward and back (Y page 199). The
Seat belt adjustment function seat belt can then not be pulled out.
X Unblocking the seat belt of the rear
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the
center seat: Pull the center seat belt
seat belts on both front seats to the upper
approximately 1 in (25 mm) out of the seat
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The
belt outlet in the seat backrest and release
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that
it.
purpose when
The seat belt is retracted and unblocked.
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter Seat belt outlet height adjustment
switch to position 2
Rthe You can adjust the height of the seat belt
SmartKey in the starter switch is in
outlet for the driver’s and front passenger
position 2 and you then engage the latch
seat.
plate in the buckle
The seat belt adjustment function takes place
with a certain amount of retracting force
when the system senses slack between the
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You
can activate or deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function via the control system
(Y page 145).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 52
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

52 Occupant safety

sounds with increasing intensity for a


maximum of 60 seconds or until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
If you and/or your passenger release the
Safety and security

seat belt during driving, the seat belt


telltale 7 starts flashing and the
warning chime sounds as described before.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
adjuster upward. continues to be illuminated.
The seat belt outlet height adjuster After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
engages in different positions. is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
X Lowering: Press and hold release 7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed
button :. once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
downward. both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
X Release release button : and make sure seat belt (with the front passenger seat
the seat belt outlet height adjuster engages occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
into place. standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
Enhanced seat belt reminder system (Y page 307).
When the engine is started, the seat belt Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
telltale 7 will always illuminate for seat belt force limiter
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts. The seat belts for the front seats and rear
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
the engine is started, an additional warning belt force limiters.
chime will sound. The warning chime goes out The ETDs are designed to activate in the
after approximately 6 seconds or once the following cases:
driver’s seat belt is fastened. Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the the system’s preset deployment threshold
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with preset deployment threshold on the far
front doors closed, side of the impact
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains Rin certain vehicle rollovers
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened. functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
lamp” (Y page 36)
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
7 starts flashing and a warning chime if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 53
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 53

The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive
with or without the respective seat belts measures to better protect the occupants
fastened. from the possibility of personal injuries in the
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the following hazardous situations:
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit Remergency braking situations, e.g. if the

Safety and security


more snugly against the body. Seat belt force Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 63) is
limiters, when activated, are employed to activated
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
or when
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS:
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat the BAS PLUS (Y page 63) or the PRE-
position or incorrectly worn seat belts. SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) is strongly
The ETDs do not pull occupants back engaging
toward the seat backrest. Rwhen the radar sensors recognize the
G Warning! immediate risk of collision in certain
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be situations (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS)
replaced. Rcriticaldynamic driving situations, e.g.
For your safety, when disposing of the when the vehicle has been caused to
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety understeer or oversteer because it has
instructions. These are available at any exceeded its physical limitations or in case
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds
The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h)
operated reversible pre-tensioners that do The PRE-SAFE® system takes the following
not require replacement after activation. measures when it is activated:
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt automatically.
RIf the front passenger seat is in an
An automatic comfort-fit feature for the front
seats reduces the retracting force of the seat unfavorable position, the seat will be
belts when they are in normal use. adjusted to a position that seeks to better
protect the occupant.
RThe system increases the air pressure in
Preventive occupant safety (PRE- the air pockets (on the sides of the seat
SAFE®) cushion and backrest) of the drive-dynamic
multicontour front seats.
G Warning!
RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
situation, the door windows and the tilt/
the effects of an accident on vehicle
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with tilt/
occupants who are wearing their seat belt
sliding panel also closes, except for a
properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
minimal gap that remains open.
with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
personal injuries occurring as a result of an If the closing procedure of any of these
accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore, elements is blocked, it will stop and open
always drive carefully and adjust your driving slightly.
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic Once the hazardous situation no longer exists
conditions. and an accident has been avoided, the PRE-
SAFE® system loosens the seat belt pre-
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 54
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

54 Occupant safety

tension and decreases the air pressure in the Using other seat or head restraint covers may
air pockets of the drive-dynamic multicontour interfere with or prevent the activation of the
front seats. All of the PRE-SAFE® system NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
settings can be re-adjusted following the or the deployment of the front side impact air
critical driving event. bags or pelvis air bags.
Safety and security

If the seat belts do not release: Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center


X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to for availability.
the rear until the seat belt tension is When the NECK-PRO active front head
reduced. restraints have been triggered in an accident,
The locking mechanism releases. the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
! When moving the seats, make sure there must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
are no items in the footwell or behind the active front head restraints cannot offer any
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the additional protection in the event of another
seats and/or the items. rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
For information on the seat belt adjustment NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
function as an integrated comfort feature of “Resetting activated head restraints”
the PRE-SAFE® system, see (Y page 51). (Y page 316).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints.
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints G Warning!
The NECK-PRO active front head restraints For your protection, drive only with properly
are intended to offer the driver and front positioned head restraints.
passenger increased protection from Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear- to the head as possible and the center of the
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head head restraint supports the back of the head
restraints are designed to move forward and at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
up in the direction of travel. They thus provide injury to the head and neck in the event of an
the head with increased support earlier on in accident or similar situation.
the collision sequence. The NECK-PRO active
front head restraints will move forward and For information on head restraint adjustment,
up whether the seats are occupied or not. see “Head restraint height” (Y page 89), or
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”
G Warning! (Y page 89).
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
PRO active front head restraints may not be Correct driver seat adjustment
able to function properly or offer the intended
degree of protection they were designed for
G Warning!
in the event of a rear-end collision. In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
G Warning! vehicle is put into motion:
Only use seat or head restraint covers which Rseat adjustment
have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Rhead restraint adjustment
Benz for your vehicle model.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 55
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 55

Rsteering wheel adjustment Make sure:


Rrear view mirror adjustment RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
Rfastening of seat belts RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.

Safety and security


RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
as possible on your hips.

Seat and head restraint


G Observe Safety notes, see page 87.
XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 88) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
Steering wheel accelerator/brake pedal safely.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 93. RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
X
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
Position steering wheel : properly
(Y page 93). RThe seat backrest must be in a position that

Make sure: is as nearly upright as possible.


RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows. edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
your legs.
RYou can move your legs freely.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
RAll displays (including malfunction and close to the head as possible and the
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster center of the head restraint supports the
are clearly visible. back of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
Seat belt any moving parts while the seat is being
G Observe Safety notes, see page 48. adjusted.
X Fasten and position your seat belt ;
correctly (Y page 50).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 56
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

56 Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo


increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
Safety notes of
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the Rstrong braking maneuvers

vehicle: Rsudden changes of direction


Safety and security

X Secure the child using an infant or child Ran accident


restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
Infant and child restraint systems
secured at all times while the vehicle is in G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
motion.
We recommend all infants and children be
G Warning! properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always Canada only:
take the SmartKey with you and lock the Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in restraint for the front passenger seat in this
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child vehicle.
restraint system, or with access to an All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised belt have special seat belt retractors for
access to a vehicle could result in an accident secure fastening of child restraints.
and/or serious personal injury. The children To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
could restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle mounting.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through To activate the special seat belt retractor:
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with let it retract.
vehicle equipment that can be operated During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting
even if the SmartKey is removed from the sound can be heard to indicate that the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle, special seat belt retractor is activated.
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel The seat belt is now locked.
adjustment, or the memory function X Push down on child restraint to take up any

If children open a door, they could injure other slack.


persons or get out of the vehicle and injure To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
themselves or be injured by following traffic. X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
Do not expose the child restraint system to seat belt retract completely.
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s The seat belt can then again be used in the
metal parts, for example, could become very usual manner.
hot, and the child could be burned by these
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor
parts.
for the front passenger seat, the front
G Warning! passenger seat must be in the most backward
position.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless they
are firmly secured in place.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 57
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 57

G Warning! infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster


Never release the seat belt buckle while the seat recommended for the size and weight of
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt the child.
retractor will be deactivated. The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat

Safety and security


i Information on child seats with mounting belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
fittings for tether anchorages top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
(Y page 58). child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For information on LATCH-type (ISOFIX) Occupants, especially children, should always
child seat anchors (Y page 59). sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
The use of infant or child restraints is required
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
by law in all 50 states, the District of
recommended for the size and weight of the
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
child.
Canadian provinces.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
Infants and small children should be seated
an inflating air bag. Note the following
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
important information when circumstances
system. They must be properly secured in
require you to place a child in the front
accordance with the manufacturer’s
passenger seat:
instructions for the child restraint. All infant
or child restraint systems must comply with RUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards bag technology designed to deactivate the
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. when the system senses the weight of a
A statement by the child restraint typical 12-month-old child or less along
manufacturer of compliance with these with the weight of a standard appropriate
standards can be found on the instruction child restraint on the front passenger seat.
label on the restraint and in the instruction RUSA only: For children larger than the
manual provided with the restraint. typical 12-month-old child, the front
When using any infant restraint, toddler passenger front air bag may or may not be
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to activated. Always make sure the
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
instructions for installation and use. indicating that the front passenger front air
Please read and observe warning labels bag is deactivated.
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
infant or child restraints. under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
G Warning!
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
According to accident statistics, children are operates with the BabySmart™ system
safer when properly restrained in the rear installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
seating positions than in the front seating front passenger front air bag when it is
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that installed properly. Otherwise they will be
children be placed in the rear seats whenever struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
possible. Regardless of seating position, crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
children 12 years old and under must be will result.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 58
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

58 Occupant safety

RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
front passenger seat will be seriously significantly increased if the child restraints
injured or even killed if the front passenger are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
front air bag inflates in a collision which or the child is not properly secured in the child
could occur under some circumstances, restraint.
Safety and security

even with the air bag technology installed Children too big for a toddler restraint must
in your vehicle. The only means to ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
completely eliminate this risk is to never shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint face or neck. A booster seat may be
in the front seat. We therefore strongly necessary to achieve proper seat belt
recommend that you always place a child positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
RIf you must install a rear-facing child fits properly without a booster.
restraint on the front passenger seat When the child restraint is not in use, remove
because circumstances require you to do it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp belt to prevent the child restraint from
is illuminated, indicating that the front becoming a projectile in the event of an
passenger front air bag is deactivated. accident.
Should the 45 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is Installation of infant and child restraint
installed, please check installation. systems
Periodically check the 45 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
G Warning!
the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
remains out, do not transport a child on the
position when the rear seats are occupied by
front passenger seat until the system has
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their
been repaired.
upright position before installing top tether
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the straps or when the extended cargo
front passenger seat will be seriously compartment is not in use. Make sure that
injured or even killed if the front passenger seat backrests are secured properly by
front air bag inflates. pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
facing child restraint on the front passenger seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, no longer be supported properly or positioned
use the proper child restraint to provide its intended benefit. That could
recommended for the age, size and weight cause serious or even fatal injuries.
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
This vehicle is equipped with tether
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
G Warning! Top tether straps enable an additional
Infants and small children should never share
connection to be made between child
a seat belt with another occupant. During an
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
accident, they could be crushed between the
(ISOFIX) anchors and rear seats. This can
occupant and seat belt.
further reduce the risk of injury.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 59
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Occupant safety 59

Once hook ? is attached, the child restraint


itself can be secured.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap A according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety and security


After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap A:
X Pull down and close anchorage ring
cover ; from respective anchorage ring
=.
X Move the respective head restraint : to
its uppermost position (Y page 90).
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
X Lift up anchorage ring cover ; from
(ISOFIX)
anchorage ring =.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
X Guide top tether strap A between head Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
restraint : and top of the seat backrest. instructions.
X Securely fasten hook ?, which is part of The child seat must be firmly attached to both
top tether strap A, to anchorage ring =. anchors.
Make sure An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
Rhook loose during an accident which could result in
? is attached to anchorage ring =
serious injury or death to the child.
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
Rtop tether strap A is not twisted child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Rhead restraint : is installed (if removable)
Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type
and positioned such that top tether strap
(ISOFIX) anchors for the installation of a
A can pass freely between head
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat with matching
restraint : and top of the seat backrest mounting fittings.
X Lower head restraint : if necessary Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
(Y page 90). also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 60
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

60 Occupant safety

The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors are


blended with covers.
Safety and security

X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of


arrow :.
Information sign : on the cover indicates the X Check to make sure the child safety locks
position of anchor ;. are working properly.
X Install a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat X Releasing: Press the lever down in
according to the manufacturer’s direction of arrow ;.
instructions.
The anchorage ring covers of anchors ; Override switch
swings back with insert the mounting G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
fittings of a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat. With the override switch you can disable the
A rigid connection between the child seat rear door window switches in the rear door
and the body of the vehicle is established. panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear you have children riding in the rear passenger
center seat can operate freely with a child compartment.
seat installed.
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
Child safety are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
Child safety locks children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. window opening.
G Warning!
Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.

The child safety locks on the rear doors


enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is X Activating: Press override switch :.
unlocked. Indicator lamp ; comes on.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 61
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 61

The rear door windows can no longer be i USA only:


operated using the respective switch This device complies with Part 15 of the
located in the rear doors. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
You can still operate the rear door windows following two conditions:
using the switches located on the door 1. This device may not cause harmful

Safety and security


control panel of the driver’s door. interference, and
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
2. this device must accept any
again. interference received, including
Indicator lamp ; goes out. interference that may cause undesired
The rear door windows can be operated operation.
again using the respective switch located Any unauthorized modification to this
in the rear doors. device could void the user’s authority to
For more information on power windows, see operate the equipment.
the “Controls in detail” section
(Y page 105). i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
Panic alarm the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

X Activating: Press and hold ! Driving safety systems


button : for at least 1 second.
Introduction
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate. This section contains information about the
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again. following driving safety systems:
or RABS (Antilock Brake System)
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. RAdaptive Brake
or RBAS (Brake Assist System)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
inside the vehicle.
RESC (Electronic Stability Control)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Preventive Occupant
Safety System Brake)

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 62
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

62 Driving safety systems

i In winter operation, the maximum ABS


effectiveness of most of the driving
systems described in this section is only G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains G Warning!
as required.
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
Safety and security

brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the


Safety notes brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
G Warning! and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents: The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
RExcessive speed, especially in turns the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
RWet and slippery road surfaces
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
RFollowing another vehicle too closely The ABS is functional above a speed of
The driving safety systems described in this approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent of road surface conditions.
the natural laws of physics from acting on the On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or respond even to light brake pressure.
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by The ABS indicator lamp ! in the
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires instrument cluster comes on when you switch
or the traction afforded. on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can is running.
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the Braking
driving safety systems described in this
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
section must never be exploited in a reckless
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ABS is in the regulating mode.
Always adjust your driving style to the
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and pedal while you feel the pulsation.
objects on the street. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
safety systems may also switch off. Observe namely braking power and the ability to steer
indicator and warning lamps that may come the vehicle.
on as well as messages in the multifunction The pulsating brake pedal can be an
display that may appear. indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.

Emergency brake maneuver


X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 63
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 63

G Warning! sensor system for vehicles from outside of


If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety Canada.
systems such as the BAS or the ESC are also When you switch off the radar system, the
switched off. Observe indicator and warning following functions are deactivated:
lamps that may come on as well as messages RBAS PLUS

Safety and security


in the multifunction display that may appear.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)
capability and extending the braking distance.
G Warning!
BAS PLUS is a convenience system designed
to assist the driver during vehicle operation.
BAS
The responsibility for the vehicle speed and
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62. the distance to the vehicle ahead, including
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in most importantly brake operation to assure
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes safe stopping distance, always remains with
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake the driver.
boost automatically, thereby potentially Always pay attention to traffic conditions
reducing the braking distance. even while BAS PLUS is switched on.
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
the emergency braking situation is over. dangerous situations until it is too late and
The ABS will prevent the wheels from could cause an accident. Personal or fatal
locking. injury to you or others may be the result.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
i This device has been approved by the FCC
function again as normal. The BAS is then
deactivated. as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
G Warning! radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still altering of the device will void any
functions, but without the additional brake warranties, and is not permitted by the
boost available that the BAS would normally FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
provide in an emergency braking maneuver. any non-approved way.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase. Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
BAS PLUS BAS PLUS detects obstacles that are in your
The Brake Assist System PLUS (BAS PLUS) driving path for a sufficient period of time to
operates in emergency braking situations and permit the system to recognize these
uses radar sensors to assess the traffic obstacles. If you approach the detected
situation. BAS PLUS assists you in braking at obstacle quickly, BAS PLUS calculates the
speeds above approximately 20 mph level of brake power boost appropriate for the
(30 km/h). circumstance to supply when the driver
When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not applies the brakes.
registered in Canada, you must switch off the When you step quickly on the brake pedal in
radar sensor system (Y page 144). Canadian an emergency braking situation, BAS PLUS
law does not permit the use of the radar automatically regulates the brake power

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 64
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

64 Driving safety systems

boost to a level that is suitable for the traffic BAS PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles
situation. driving in front of you, such as motorcycles
If BAS PLUS requires a particularly high brake and vehicles driving offset from your vehicle
power boost, PRE-SAFE® is activated at the center.
same time.
After a hard collision or damage to the front
Safety and security

X Keep constant pressure on the brake pedal


of the vehicle from an accident, have the
until the emergency braking situation is adjustment and operation of the radar
over. sensors checked by an authorized Mercedes-
During this process, the ABS prevents the Benz Center.
wheels from locking up.
If BAS PLUS is not available due to a radar
The brakes will resume normal operation sensor malfunction, the braking system will
after continue to function normally with full brake
Rthe brake pedal is released boost and full standard BAS function.
Rno obstacles are detected in your path
Rthe system no longer senses a risk of a Adaptive Brake
collision
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
BAS PLUS is then deactivated. braking safety as well as increased braking
BAS PLUS can react to stationary obstacles comfort. Adaptive Brake takes driver and
such as standing or parked vehicles at road vehicle characteristics into consideration,
speeds of up to approximately 40 mph thus achieving an optimal braking effect.
(70 km/h). In addiditon, Adaptive Brake provides the
BAS PLUS can only assist you when the radar HOLD function (Y page 161) and the hill-start
sensors are switched on and functional. You assist system (Y page 160).
can check whether the sensors are active by For more information on the brake system,
switching on DISTRONIC PLUS see (Y page 254).
(Y page 149) or using the Radar sensors
function in the instrument cluster control
system. EBP
G Warning! G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
BAS PLUS will only respond with brake The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
assistance if it has clearly detected an object. enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
Detection can be impeded by the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
Rdirty or covered sensors of the braking effort in straight-line braking
Rsnowfall or heavy rain without a loss of vehicle stability.
Rdisturbance from other radar sources G Warning!
Rstrong radar reflection such as in parking If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
garages still function with full brake boost. However,
the rear wheels could lock up during
BAS PLUS uses radar signals that are not emergency braking situations, for example.
reflected well by narrow objects and You could lose control of the vehicle and
absorptive materials. For this reason BAS cause an accident.
PLUS will not react to persons, animals, and
Adapt your driving style to the changed
approaching traffic or cross-traffic.
driving characteristics.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 65
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 65

ESC Active braking action through the ESC may


otherwise seriously damage the brake
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62. system which is not covered by the
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
operational as soon as the engine is running.
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: Because the

Safety and security


adhesive friction between the tires and the ESC operates automatically, the engine
road surface) and handling. and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in
The ESC recognizes that the vehicle deviates starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-
from the direction of travel as intended by the GO start/stop button in position 0 or 1)
driver. By applying brakes to individual when the parking brake is being tested on
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the a brake test dynamometer or when the
ESC works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESC is vehicle is being towed with one axle raised.
especially useful while driving off and on wet Active braking action through the ESC may
or slippery road surfaces. The ESC also otherwise seriously damage the brake
stabilizes the vehicle during braking and system which is not covered by the
steering maneuvers. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESC warning lamp ä in the instrument
! The ESC will only function properly if you
cluster comes on when you switch on the
use wheels of the recommended tire size
ignition. It goes out when the engine is
as specified in the “Technical data” section
running.
of this Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
Never switch off the ESC when you see the i The DISTRONIC PLUS and cruise control
ESC warning lamp ä flashing in the switch off automatically when the ESC
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as engages.
follows:
Electronic Traction System
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as (ETS/4-ETS)
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
pedal. The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and
RAdapt
4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
your speed and driving style to the
System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are
prevailing road conditions.
components of the ESC. The ETS/4-ETS
Failure to observe these guidelines could improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESC cannot available traction, especially under slippery
prevent accidents resulting from excessive road conditions by applying the brakes to a
speed. spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
transfer more power to the wheel(s) with
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Because the ESC traction.
operates automatically, the engine and When you switch off the ESC, the
ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in ETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-
GO start/stop button in position 0 or 1)
when the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 66
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

66 Driving safety systems

Switching the ESC off or on cluster flashes. However, the ESC will then
(except E 63 AMG) not stabilize the vehicle.

G Warning!
The ESC should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
Safety and security

circumstances described below. Disabling


the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel
is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off


the ESC. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for X Switching off: With the engine running,
example press ESC switch : until the ESC OFF
Rwhen driving with snow chains warning lamp å in the instrument
Rin deep snow cluster comes on.
The ESC is switched off.
Rin sand or gravel
G Warning!
G Warning! When the ESC OFF warning lamp å is on,
Switch on the ESC immediately if the the ESC is switched off.
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
When the ESC warning lamp ä and the
anymore. Otherwise the ESC will not stabilize
ESC OFF warning lamp å are on
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
wheel is spinning. continuously, the ESC is not operational due
to a malfunction.
When you switch off the ESC, When the ESC is switched off or not
Rthe ESC does not stabilize the vehicle operational, vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
road conditions and to the non-operating
into surfaces for better grip
status of the ESC.
Rthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
a spinning wheel ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe ESC continues to operate when you are extended period with the ESC switched off.
braking This may cause serious damage to the
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS drivetrain which is not covered by the
cannot be activated Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS X Switching on: Press ESC switch : until
switch off if activated the ESC OFF warning lamp å in the
instrument cluster goes out.
i When the ESC is switched off and one or You are now again in normal driving mode
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESC with the ESC switched on.
warning lamp ä in the instrument
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 67
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 67

E 63 AMG When you switch on ESC SPORT


Rthe ESC stabilizes the vehicle only to a
Switching ESC SPORT on or off
limited extent
G Warning! Rthe engine output is limited, but only to the
ESC SPORT should not be switched on during extent that allows the drive wheels to spin

Safety and security


normal driving. and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
Switching ESC SPORT on will result in the
Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
following:
spinning wheel
Rno restriction to engine torque
Rthe ESC continues to operate when you are
Rsystem-supported traction control is braking hard
limited
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
ESC SPORT is designed for driving on closed cannot be activated
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
and understeer characteristics are desired
and requires a highly skilled and experienced
switch off if activated
driver able to handle these critical driving i When ESC SPORT is switched on and one
situations. or more drive wheels are spinning, the ESC
You could lose control of your vehicle and warning lamp ä in the instrument
cause an accident. cluster flashes. However, the ESC will then
Please be aware of these limits when you stabilize the vehicle only to a limited extent.
switch on ESC SPORT.
Do not switch on ESC SPORT when a spare
wheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch on


ESC SPORT. This allows the drive wheels to
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip,
for example
Rwhen driving with snow chains
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel
X Switching on: With the engine running,
G Warning! press ESC SPORT switch : briefly.
Switch off ESC SPORT and switch on the ESC The ESC SPORT warning lamp ì in the
immediately if the aforementioned instrument cluster comes on. The message
circumstances do not apply anymore. ESC-SPORT appears in the multifunction
Otherwise ESC will only stabilize the vehicle display.
to a limited extent when it is starting to skid X Switching off: With the engine running,
or a wheel is spinning. press ESC SPORT switch : briefly.
The ESC SPORT warning lamp ì in the
instrument cluster goes out. The message
ESC-ON appears in the multifunction
display.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 68
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

68 Driving safety systems

ESC SPORT switches off automatically when When you switch off the ESC,
you turn off the engine. When starting the Rthe ESC will not stabilize the vehicle
engine, the ESC is activated automatically.
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
Switching the ESC off or on allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
G Warning! into surfaces for better grip
Safety and security

The ESC should not be switched off during Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
normal driving. spinning wheel
Disabling of the system will result in the Rthe ESC continues to operate when you are
following: braking hard
Rno restriction to engine torque Rthe PRE-SAFE® system is not available,
Rloss of system-supported traction control even when you are braking hard supported
by the ESC
“ESC OFF” is designed for driving on closed
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer Rthe PRE-SAFE® Brake is not available, even

and understeer characteristics are desired when you are braking hard supported by
and requires a highly skilled and experienced the ESC
driver able to handle these critical driving Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
situations. cannot be activated
You could lose control of your vehicle and Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
cause an accident.
switch off if activated
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESC. i When ESC is switched off and one or more
Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel drive wheels are spinning, the ESC warning
is mounted. lamp ä in the instrument cluster does
not flash. The ESC will not stabilize the
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off vehicle.
the ESC. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
example
Rwhen driving with snow chains
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel

G Warning!
Switch on the ESC immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore. Otherwise the ESC will not stabilize
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a X Switching off: With the engine running,
wheel is spinning. press ESC switch : until the ESC OFF
warning lamp å in the instrument
cluster comes on.
The message ESC-OFF appears in the
multifunction display.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 69
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving safety systems 69

G Warning! When the driver and front passenger have


When the ESC OFF warning lamp å is on, fastened their seat belts, the PRE-SAFE®
the ESC is switched off. Brake can also
When the ESC warning lamp ä and the Rbrake the vehicle within a speed range of
ESC OFF warning lamp å are on up to 124 mph (200 km/h) automatically

Safety and security


continuously, the ESC is not operational due Ractivatepreventative occupant safety
to a malfunction. measures (PRE-SAFE®) (Y page 53)
When the ESC is switched off or not
operational, vehicle stability in standard G Warning!
driving maneuvers is reduced. An intermittent warning sounds and the
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing distance warning lamp · in the instrument
road conditions and to the non-operating cluster is illuminated if the PRE-SAFE® Brake
status of the ESC. calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an indicate that the PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be
extended period with the ESC switched off. capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
This may cause serious damage to the maintain the preset following distance, which
drivetrain which is not covered by the creates a danger of a collision.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Immediately brake your vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
X Switching on: With the engine running, vehicle driving in front of you. The warning
press ESC switch : briefly. sound is intended as a final caution that you
The ESC OFF warning lamp å in the have not interceded with your own braking
instrument cluster goes out. The message inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous
ESC-ON appears in the multifunction situation. Do not wait for the operation of the
display. warning signal to intercede with your own
braking, as that will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will not
PRE-SAFE® Brake always result in an impact being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
The PRE-SAFE® Brake is available in vehicles
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. The PRE- G Warning!
SAFE® Brake can assist you in minimizing the
The PRE-SAFE® Brake is a convenience
risk of a rear-end collision with a vehicle in
system designed to assist the driver during
front of you. The PRE-SAFE® Brake may also
vehicle operation. The responsibility for the
reduce the severity of an accident. At speeds
vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) it will
ahead, including most importantly brake
issue a warning when your vehicle is
operation to assure safe stopping distance,
approaching the preceding vehicle very
always remains with the driver.
quickly. An intermittent acoustic warning
sounds and the distance warning lamp · Always pay attention to traffic conditions
in the instrument cluster comes on. even while the PRE-SAFE® Brake is switched
on. Otherwise, you may not be able to
Due to the system characteristics, warnings
recognize dangerous situations until it is too
could be issued without cause in complex
late and could cause an accident resulting in
driving situations.
personal or fatal injury to you or others.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 70
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

70 Driving safety systems

i USA only: your current speed is so close that the PRE-


This device has been approved by the FCC SAFE® Brake will not be capable of slowing
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar the vehicle sufficiently.
sensor is intended for use in an automotive When the danger of a collision still persists
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or and you do not brake or accelerate
altering of the device will void any
Safety and security

significantly, the PRE-SAFE® Brake may


warranties, and is not permitted by the initiate full application of the brakes
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in automatically.
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this G Warning!
device could void the user’s authority to The PRE-SAFE® Brake will only respond with
operate the equipment. brake assistance if it has clearly detected an
object. Detection can be impeded by
i Canada only: Rdirty or covered sensors
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Rsnowfall or heavy rain
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: Rdisturbance from other radar sources
1. This device may not cause interference, Rstrong radar reflection such as in parking
and garages
2. this device must accept any The PRE-SAFE® Brake uses radar signals that
interference received, including are not reflected well by narrow objects and
interference that may cause undesired absorptive materials. For this reason the PRE-
operation of the device. SAFE® Brake will not react to persons,
Removal, tampering, or altering of the animals, and approaching traffic or cross-
device will void any warranties, and is not traffic.
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use The PRE-SAFE® Brake may not detect narrow
in any non-approved way. vehicles driving in front of you, such as
Any unauthorized modification to this motorcycles and vehicles driving offset from
device could void the user’s authority to your vehicle center.
operate the equipment.
G Warning!
Using the radar sensors, the PRE-SAFE®
Depending on the vehicle speed, the
Brake detects obstacles that are in your
PRE-SAFE® Brake brakes your vehicle with a
driving path for a sufficient period of time for
the system to recognize it. If you approach a maximum of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2) before a
possible hard stop. This corresponds to about
vehicle and the PRE-SAFE® Brake has
40% of the maximum deceleration ability of
established that the distance to the vehicle
your vehicle. The driver must apply the brakes
ahead at your current speed is so close that
additionally in order to prevent a collision. The
the PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be capable of
self-acting hard stop will be initiated when the
slowing the vehicle sufficiently, the system
imminent danger of a collision exists, e.g.
will initially warn you visually and acoustically.
when an evasive driving maneuver cannot
If you do not apply the brakes yourself or avoid an accident.
maneuver around a sensed obstacle, the
vehicle will brake lightly automatically. The
PRE-SAFE® system (Y page 53) is activated
when the distance to the vehicle ahead at
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 71
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Anti-theft systems 71

To maintain the proper distance to the vehicle i The PRE-SAFE® Brake will remain passive
in front of you and thus prevent a rear-end while DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. (Y page 149).
X Brake the vehicle immediately to avoid a After a hard collision or damage to the front
collision. of the vehicle from an accident, have the

Safety and security


Under no circumstances should the driver settings and operation of the radar sensors
await the intermittent warning sound checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
before braking. Observe the following Center.
warning note. X Activating and deactivating: Activate or
The intermittent warning sound ceases and deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake using the
the distance warning lamp · goes out instrument cluster control system
when the necessary distance to the vehicle (Y page 137).
ahead is again established. After the function has been activated, the
The PRE-SAFE® Brake can react to stationary PRE-SAFE® Brake indicator Ä appears
obstacles such as standing or parked vehicles in the instrument cluster. When the HOLD
at road speeds of up to approximately 40 mph function is switched on, the PRE-SAFE®
(70 km/h). Brake indicator Ä will not appear.
G Warning! In vehicles with Parking Guidance, the
If you do not receive visual or acoustic automatic transmission must be in park
warning signals, the PRE-SAFE® Brake may position P for the PRE-SAFE® Brake
indicator Ä to be displayed.
Rnot have recognized the collision risk
The PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated when
Rhave been deactivated the radar system is switched off. When you
Rbe malfunctioning switch off the radar system, the following
functions are deactivated:
Apply the brakes yourself to avoid a collision.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
The PRE-SAFE® Brake does not always clearly
interpret complex traffic situations. If a visual
RBAS PLUS (Y page 63)
and/or acoustic warning is issued in an RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)
uncritical driving situation, or if the vehicle RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 175)
brakes lightly, you can interrupt the PRE-
SAFE® Brake maneuver by pressing down all
the way on the accelerator pedal, using Anti-theft systems
kickdown, or releasing the brake pedal.
The PRE-SAFE® Brake maneuver is Immobilizer
terminated immediately when The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
Ryou avoid the obstacle by evasive steering persons from starting your vehicle.
Ryou drive less than 9 mph (15 km/h) When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
Ran obstacle can no longer be identified engine can be started by anyone with a valid
ahead of you SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Rthe system no longer senses the risk of a
collision

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 72
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

72 Anti-theft systems

Activating i If the alarm stays on for more than


X
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
call to the Customer Assistance Center
from the starter switch.
automatically. The Tele Aid system will
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
initiate the call provided that
open the driver’s door.
Safety and security

Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid


service
Deactivating
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
X Switch on the ignition. properly
i Starting the engine will also deactivate Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
the immobilizer. supply and GPS coverage are available
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Anti-theft alarm system


Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
Ra door SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
Rthe trunk The turn signal lamps flash three times and
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
Rthe hood indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
The alarm will stay on even if the activating lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
element, a door, for example, is closed system is armed.
immediately.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
The alarm system will also be triggered when
times and the acoustic warning does not
Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical sound three times, a door or the trunk may
key not be properly closed.
Ra door is opened from the inside Close the respective element.
Rthe trunk is opened with the emergency X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
release button SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
To cancel the alarm after it has been The turn signal lamps flash once and an
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm” acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
(Y page 73). that the alarm system is disarmed.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 73
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Anti-theft systems 73

i Unless you open a door or the trunk within


approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

Safety and security


rearmed.

Canceling the alarm


To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 74
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

74
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 75
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

75

Vehicle equipment .............................. 76


Locking and unlocking ....................... 76
Starter switch positions ..................... 85
Seats .................................................... 87
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 93
Mirrors ................................................. 94
Memory function ................................. 96

Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 97
Wipers ................................................ 104
Power windows ................................. 105
Driving and parking .......................... 109
Automatic transmission ................... 114
Transfer case .................................... 124
Instrument cluster ............................ 125
Control system .................................. 126
Driving systems ................................ 146
Climate control system .................... 180
Rear window defroster ..................... 191
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 192
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 194
Loading and storing .......................... 197
Useful features ................................. 203
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 76
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

76 Locking and unlocking

Vehicle equipment X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle


(Y page 315).
i This Operator’s Manual describes all X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
features, standard or optional, potentially battery connections checked at an
available for your vehicle at the time of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
purchase. Please be aware that your If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
vehicle might not be equipped with all Roadside Assistance or an authorized
features described in this manual. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking SmartKey


Notes Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. removable mechanical key.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
Rthe doors
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust Rthe trunk lid
its signal volume, contact an authorized Rthe fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Center.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. An acoustic signal sounds
once, and the locking knobs in the doors
move up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. An acoustic signal sounds
three times, and the locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the trunk must be closed. : & Lock button
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with ; F Unlock button for trunk lid
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey = % Unlock button
are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is i USA only:
drained. This device complies with Part 15 of the
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
(Y page 79) and replace them if following two conditions:
necessary. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the interference, and
driver’s door and the trunk (Y page 314). 2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 77
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 77

Any unauthorized modification to this X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
device could void the user’s authority to flap: Press button % once.
operate the equipment. X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice.
i Canada only:
X Global locking: Press button &.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
KEYLESS-GO

Controls in detail
1. This device may not cause interference,
and Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
2. this device must accept any with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
interference received, including with remote control and a removable
interference that may cause undesired mechanical key.
operation of the device. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Any unauthorized modification to this checked every time you grasp an outside door
device could void the user’s authority to handle.
operate the equipment.
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
unlocks
Factory setting
Rthe doors
X Global unlocking: Press button %.
Rthe trunk lid
Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking Rthe fuel filler flap
the vehicle:
i USA only:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. This device complies with Part 15 of the
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
rearmed. following two conditions:
X Global locking: Press button &. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Selective setting 2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish interference that may cause undesired
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing operation.
button % will then only unlock the driver’s
Any unauthorized modification to this
door and the fuel filler flap.
device could void the user’s authority to
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons operate the equipment.
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 79) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 78
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

78 Locking and unlocking

i Canada only: cannot be locked or the engine started via


This device complies with RSS-210 of the KEYLESS-GO system.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
the following two conditions: (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
1. This device may not cause interference, the SmartKey)
and - when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/

2. this device must accept any stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the outside door handle the
Controls in detail

interference received, including


interference that may cause undesired message Key Not Detected appears in
operation of the device. the multifunction display
Any unauthorized modification to this - with the engine running, the red message
device could void the user’s authority to Key Not Detected appears in the
operate the equipment. multifunction display while driving off
Find the SmartKey or change its present
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO location immediately (e.g. place it on the
RYou
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
can also use the SmartKey with
pocket).
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 76). RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
turn it off again by
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button &). button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you. - inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
RNever store the SmartKey together with and the automatic transmission is in park
- electronic items such as a mobile phone position P
or another SmartKey
RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
- metallic objects such as coins or metal unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
foil of the vehicle and
Doing so could impair the function of the - an outside door handle is splashed with
KEYLESS-GO system. water
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey or
must be located outside the vehicle within - you attempt to clean an outside door
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
handle
trunk.
RRemember that the engine can be started
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle inside the vehicle.
and switch on the ignition once to activate Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
the KEYLESS-GO function. one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away If you leave the SmartKey behind when
from the vehicle, the system may no longer exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle appears in the multifunction display.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 79
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 79

Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle, X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
no SmartKey outside the vehicle): flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, handle.
the message Key Detected in Vehicle X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door
appears in the multifunction display. The handle other than the driver’s outside door
vehicle will not be locked. handle.
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door
Factory setting handle :.

Controls in detail
X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
Checking SmartKey batteries
Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.

X Press button & or % on the


SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
handle :. are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 317).
Selective setting
i You can obtain the required batteries at
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i If the batteries are checked within signal
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. range of the vehicle, pressing button
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
% and & simultaneously for accordingly.
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 79) flashes twice.
Loss of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 80
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

80 Locking and unlocking

X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an Opening the doors from the inside
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can open a door from the inside even
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
when it is locked unless it is secured with the
mechanical key to your car insurance
child safety lock (Y page 60).
company immediately.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
do so.
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
Controls in detail

glad to supply you with a replacement. For


information on replacing the SmartKey, see
“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 80).

Replacing the SmartKey


Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Benz Center will require proof of identity and Example illustration driver’s door
vehicle ownership with original documents, If the vehicle has previously been locked with
including the following: the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration theft alarm system.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 73).
license X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If you are an authorized person:
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration move up.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
license for the authorized individual respective rear door to unlock door.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is
being requested Automatic central locking
i Duplicated or photocopied The doors and the trunk lock automatically
documentation will not be accepted. when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked front door from the
Activating the key inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Once you, or an authorized person, has
provided the appropriate documents, the The doors are designed to unlock
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to automatically after an accident if the force of
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- The vehicle locks automatically when the
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 81
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 81

out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is


on a test stand.

Controls in detail
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
When all doors are closed, the vehicle
X Switching off: Press and hold central locks.
unlocking switch : until an acoustic signal X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
sounds. switch :.
X Switching on: Press and hold central You can open a locked front door from the
locking switch ; until an acoustic signal inside. Open door only when conditions are
sounds. safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
i If you press and hold either switch and no central locking switch
acoustic signal sounds, the respective
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
setting has already been selected.
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
i You can also switch on or off the front door is opened from the inside
automatic central locking using the control Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
system (Y page 144). settings, only the front door opened from
the inside is unlocked
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
Locking and unlocking from the inside
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. unlock using the central unlocking switch.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
inside using the central locking or unlocking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if you Opening the trunk
want to lock the vehicle before starting to G Warning!
drive.
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
The central locking or unlocking switch does is running and while driving. Among other
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.

! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid


swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 82
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

82 Locking and unlocking

You can open the trunk when the vehicle is Closing the trunk
stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft G Warning!
(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
is running and while driving. Among other
Opening the trunk from the outside dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Controls in detail

G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.

G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.


Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
X Press and hold button F (Y page 76) on You may lock yourself out.
the SmartKey until the trunk unlocks and If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
begins to open. with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunk
or lid will lock automatically when closed. All
X Pull on handle :. turn signal lamps flash three times and an
acoustic signal sounds three times to confirm
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
locking.
vehicle must be unlocked.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked Closing the trunk from the outside
separately (Y page 85). manually
Opening the trunk from the inside

X Lower trunk lid by pulling on handle : or


Example illustration: Vehicles with trunk opening/ handle ; firmly.
closing system X Close trunk with hands placed flat on trunk

X Pull remote trunk opening switch : until lid.


the trunk begins to open.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (Y page 85).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 83
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Locking and unlocking 83

Closing the trunk from the inside X Interrupting the closing procedure:
automatically Release remote trunk opening/closing
switch :.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
Closing the trunk from the outside
the vehicle while operating the trunk lid with
automatically
the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing
procedure carefully to make sure no one is in G Warning!

Controls in detail
danger of being injured. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
To interrupt the closing procedure, release make sure no one is in danger of being
the door mounted remote trunk opening/ injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
closing switch again. always keep hands and fingers away from the
Even with the SmartKey removed from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS- especially careful when small children are
GO removed from the vehicle, the remote around. To stop the closing procedure, do one
trunk opening/closing switch can be of the following:
operated. Therefore, do not leave children RPress button F on the SmartKey.
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
RPress the remote trunk opening/closing
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
switch (on the driver’s door).
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. RPress the trunk closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system you can close the trunk from the switch.
inside using the remote trunk opening/ RPull the trunk lid handle.
closing switch. Even with the SmartKey removed from the
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-
object while closing, the closing procedure is GO removed from the vehicle, the remote
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly. trunk opening/closing switch can be
This will happen only while the trunk is in its operated. Therefore, do not leave children
upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
been piled too high, for example. an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

In vehicles with trunk opening/closing


system you can close the trunk from the
outside using the trunk closing switch.

X Press and hold remote trunk opening/


closing switch : until the trunk is closed.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 84
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

84 Locking and unlocking

RThe locking knobs in the doors move


down.
RThe trunk lid starts to close
automatically.
RAll turn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking once the trunk has
closed completely.
Controls in detail

RAn acoustic signal sounds three times.


RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Example: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
X
object while closing, the closing procedure is
Press trunk closing switch : briefly.
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an This will happen only while the trunk is in its
object while closing, the closing procedure is upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly. been piled too high, for example.
This will happen only while the trunk is in its
upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has
been piled too high, for example. Trunk lid emergency release
Closing the trunk and locking vehicle The trunk lid can be opened from inside the
from outside trunk with the emergency release button.
This section applies to vehicles with trunk
opening/closing system and KEYLESS-GO
only. You can close the trunk and lock the
vehicle simultaneously from the outside using
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.

X Briefly press emergency release


button :.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing
X Make sure you have the SmartKey with still or in motion.
KEYLESS-GO with you. Illumination of the emergency release button:
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after
switch : briefly.
opening the trunk.
With all doors closed:
RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 85
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Starter switch positions 85

The emergency release button does not open Starter switch positions
the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged
or disconnected. SmartKey
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
Valet locking
You can lock the trunk separately with the
mechanical key. This denies unauthorized

Controls in detail
access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park
the vehicle.
X Leave only the SmartKey less its
mechanical key with the vehicle.

g For removing SmartKey (gear selector


lever must be in park position P)
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in
X Valet locking: Close the trunk. the instrument cluster come on. The low-
X Remove the mechanical key from the beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam
SmartKey (Y page 315). headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for
the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
lock.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
come on when the ignition is switched on,
position 2 and remove the mechanical have it checked and replaced if necessary. If
key in that position to lock the trunk. a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on
The trunk remains locked even when the after starting the engine or comes on while
vehicle is centrally unlocked. driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”
You can then only open the trunk with the (Y page 304).
mechanical key. If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in position 0 for an extended period of time, it
the trunk lid lock. can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
to neutral position 1 and remove the remove SmartKey from the starter switch and
reinsert.
mechanical key in that position to unlock
the trunk. The steering is locked when the SmartKey is
You can now open the trunk. removed from the starter switch.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 86
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

86 Starter switch positions

X Always remove the SmartKey from the the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
starter switch when the engine is not in electrical systems can be switched on or
operation. the engine can be started using the
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
Controls in detail

sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary (Y page 337).
or
X Get a jump start (Y page 338).

i If the SmartKey does not belong to the


vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the : KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
starter switch. However, the ignition does ; Starter switch
not switch on and the engine does not start.
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
into the starter switch (if not inserted
KEYLESS-GO already).

G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. i Allow for 2 seconds until the system has
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO detected the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with button.
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. park position P.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be X Do not depress the brake pedal.
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
without depressing the brake pedal
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 85).
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 109).
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
then insert the SmartKey into the starter KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
switch. = USA only
? Canada only
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 87
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 87

Position 0 Seats
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Safety notes
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
Position 1 control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

Controls in detail
once. Rseat adjustment
This supplies power for some electrical Rhead restraint adjustment
consumers, e.g. wipers.
Rsteering wheel adjustment
i When you now open the driver’s door, the Rrear view mirror adjustment
power supply is switched off.
Rfastening of seat belts
Ignition (or position 2)
G Warning!
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
twice. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
This supplies power for all electrical the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
consumers. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps backrest in an excessively reclined position as
in the instrument cluster come on. The low- this can be dangerous. You could slide under
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal it, the seat belt would apply force at the
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
the fog lamps will only come on if activated. or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to belts provide the best restraint when the
come on when the ignition is switched on, wearer is in a position that is as upright as
have it checked and replaced if necessary. possible and seat belts are properly
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains positioned on the body.
on after starting the engine or comes on
while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument G Warning!
cluster” (Y page 304). Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
i When you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once and the driver’s Observe the following points:
door is open, the power supply is switched RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
off. slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 88
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

88 Seats

RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
close to the head as possible. The center of restraints. Head restraints are intended to
the head restraint must support the back of help reduce injuries during an accident.
the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being Seat adjustment
adjusted. ! When moving the seats, make sure there
Controls in detail

Failure to do so could result in an accident are no items in the footwell or behind the
and/or serious personal injury. seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time. Power seats
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked i The memory function (Y page 96) lets
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a you store the settings for the seat position
vehicle could result in an accident and/or together with the settings for the steering
serious personal injury. wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.

G Warning! i Vehicles with split rear seat bench:


According to accident statistics, children are If you fold down one or both sections of the
safer when properly restrained in the rear rear seat backrest, the respective front
seating positions than in the front seating seat is moved forward slightly, if necessary,
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that to prevent contact with the rear seat
children be placed in the rear seats whenever backrest.
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
G Warning! switch forward or backward in direction of
For your protection, drive only with properly arrow ?.
positioned head restraints. X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch

Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close forward or backward in direction of arrow
to the head as possible and the center of the A.
head restraint supports the back of the head X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for in direction of arrow =.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 89
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 89

X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or Lumbar support


down in direction of arrow ; until your
You can adjust the contour of the front seat’s
upper legs are lightly supported.
lumbar support to help enhance support to
X Head restraint height: Press the switch
your spine.
up or down in direction of arrow :.

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Controls in detail
X Curvature position: Use button : to
move the curvature up and button = to
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head move it down.
restraint cushion to the desired position. X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to
lessen the curvature and button ? to
Comfort head restraint increase it.
G Warning!
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the Rear seat head restraints
mounting post. You could otherwise be
G Warning!
trapped.
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear
head restraints in the upright position when
the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear of
articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.

G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
You can adjust the side cushions of the head center of the head restraint supports the back
restraints individually. of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
X Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push side potential for injury to the head and neck in the
cushions : into desired position. event of an accident or similar situation.
X Adjusting forward or backward: Pull or
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
push head restraint in direction of the respective head restraint up from the
arrow ;.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 90
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

90 Seats

lowest non-use position and have the Rear seat head restraint height
occupant adjust the head restraint properly. adjustment
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.

G Warning!
Controls in detail

Make sure the rear seat head restraints


engage when placing them upright manually.
Otherwise their protective function cannot be
ensured.
The back of the head will not be supported in
the event of a collision. That could cause X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to the
serious or even fatal injuries. Rear seat desired position.
occupants can be seriously injured or killed. X Lowering: Press release button : and
push down on head restraint.
Lowering rear seat head restraints
The rear seat head restraints can be lowered Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
for increased visibility. adjustment

X Press button :. X Adjust the head restraint to the desired


The rear seat head restraints are lowered. position by pushing or pulling on the upper
edge of the head restraint cushion.

Rear seat head restraints, removing


and installing (vehicles with split
foldable rear seat backrest)
i The rear seat head restraints cannot be
removed on vehicles which do not have the
split foldable rear seat backrest.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 91
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Seats 91

= Seat backrest side bolsters


? Massage function
A Seat backrest contour support
B Seat backrest contour up or down

X Seat cushion length: Adjust the seat


cushion to the length of your upper leg
using switch :.

Controls in detail
X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
side bolsters so that they provide good
lateral support using switch =.
X Removing: Unlock the rear seat backrest
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
(Y page 199) and fold it slightly forward.
X Pull head restraint to its highest position.
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using switches A and B.
X Press release button : and pull out head
restraint.
Drive-dynamic function
X Installing: Position the head restraints so
that the notches on the rod are on the left The drive-dynamic multicontour seat
when looking in the direction of travel. electronically controls the air pressure in the
X Insert head restraint and push it down until air chambers of the seat backrest side
it engages. bolsters. This function improves driving
X Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
comfort and pleasure.
engages. You can choose between:
RLevel 1 (one indicator lamp comes on): Less
lateral support and slow air pressure build-
Drive-dynamic multicontour seat up in the air chambers of the seat backrest
side bolsters.
The drive-dynamic multicontour seat is only
available on the driver’s side. RLevel 2 (two indicator lamps come on):
The drive-dynamic multicontour seat allows Strong lateral support and fast air pressure
several individual support adjustments and build-up in the air chambers of the seat
can automatically adjust lateral support to backrest side bolsters.
your driving style. X Switching on: Press button ; repeatedly
until the desired level is set.
One or two indicator lamps in the button
come on.
X Switching off: Press button ; repeatedly
until all indicator lamps go out.

Massage function (PULSE)


You can reduce muscle tension during long
trips by periodically using the massage
function. you can choose between two levels.
: Seat cushion length
; Drive-dynamic function

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 92
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

92 Seats

X Switching on: Press button ? repeatedly Seat heating


until the desired level is set.
One or two indicator lamps in the button
come on. The air cushions in the lumbar
region inflate and deflate rhythmically for
approximately 20 minutes.
Controls in detail

Seat ventilation

Front seat heating switches

The blue indicator lamps in seat ventilation


switch : come on to show which ventilation
level you have selected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
Rear seat heating switch (Canada only)
can be activated using the summer opening
feature (Y page 107). The red indicator lamps in seat heating
switch : come on to show which heating
X Switch on the ignition. level you have selected.
X Switching on: Press seat ventilation The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
switch :. to level 2 after approximately 8 minutes.
Three blue indicator lamps in seat The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
ventilation switch : come on. 1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedly After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
until the desired ventilation level is set. seat heating switches off automatically.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation X Switch on the ignition.
switch : repeatedly until all indicator X Switching on: Press seat heating
lamps go out. switch :.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat X Switching off: Press seat heating
ventilating switches off automatically. switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 93
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Multifunction steering wheel 93

Multifunction steering wheel seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors.
Safety notes
G Warning!
Easy-entry/exit feature
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving This feature allows the driver an easier entry
could cause the driver to lose control of the into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
vehicle. and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is

Controls in detail
The electrical steering wheel adjustment in its uppermost position.
feature can be operated at any time. The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
Therefore, do not leave children unattended or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked of the control system (Y page 145).
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
G Warning!
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
You must make sure no one can become
serious personal injury.
trapped or injured by the moving steering
Make sure wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
activated.
arms slightly bent at the elbows To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one
Ryou can move your legs freely of the memory position buttons.
Rall displays (including malfunction and Do not leave children unattended in the
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
are clearly visible Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
Steering wheel adjustment and/or serious personal injury.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,


the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
(Y page 97).
Move stalk in direction of arrows :.
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
stalk in direction of arrows ;. the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
i The memory function (Y page 96) lets The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you store the settings for the steering you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
wheel together with the settings for the

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 94
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

94 Mirrors

in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the X Switch on the ignition.


KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1. X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the

i When the current position for the steering stalk in direction of arrow :.
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the Indicator lamp = comes on.
steering wheel will no longer be able to i The steering wheel heating may be
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
suspended temporarily. However, indicator
feature is activated.
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
The adjustment procedure is briefly
Controls in detail

heating is suspended when the


interrupted when the engine is started. temperature of the vehicle interior is above
G Warning! 86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
Let the system complete the adjustment temperature of the steering wheel is above
procedure before setting the vehicle in 95‡ (35†).
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
be completed before setting the vehicle in stalk in direction of arrow ;.
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel Indicator lamp = goes out.
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
Crash-responsive exit aid the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
When you open the driver’s door after an i The steering wheel heating switches off
accident has occurred, the steering column
automatically when you remove the
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
starter switch is insignificant. This function
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
occupants.
door.
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is For more information on the steering wheel,
activated via the control system. see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 126).

Heated steering wheel


Mirrors
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel. Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.

Interior rear view mirror


X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 95
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Mirrors 95

Exterior rear view mirrors ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
G Warning! into place.
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a rear view mirrors will be heated
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are automatically.
closer than they appear. Check your interior

Controls in detail
rear view mirror and glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes. Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R or the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto dimming function does not react if
i You can store the settings for the exterior incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
rear view mirror position with the memory in the interior rear view mirror.
function (Y page 96). The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
X Switch on the ignition. react, for example, if the rear window
X Press button : for the driver’s side sunshade is in raised position.
exterior rear view mirror or button ; for Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
the passenger-side exterior rear view (incident light) could blind you. As a result,
mirror. you may not be able to observe traffic
The indicator lamp in the respective button conditions and could cause an accident.
comes on.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within Exterior rear view mirror parking
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. position
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before To assist during parking maneuvers, you can
adjustments can be made. Adjustments set the passenger-side exterior rear view
can only be made with the indicator lamp mirror so that you can see the rear wheel and
for the respective exterior rear view mirror the road curb.
button illuminated.
Setting and storing the parking position
X Press adjustment button = up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 96
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

96 Memory function

Calling up the parking position


X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
Controls in detail

mirror moves to the stored parking


position.
The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
X Switch on the ignition. returns to its previously stored driving
X Press button ;, to select the passenger- position
side exterior rear view mirror. R10 seconds after you have put the gear
X Shift the automatic transmission into selector lever out of reverse gear R
reverse gear R. Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
The passenger-side exterior rear view speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
mirror moves to the preset parking
Rimmediately when you press button : to
position.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear select the driver’s side exterior rear view
view mirror with adjustment button = so mirror
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
The exterior rear view mirror parking Memory function
position is stored. Notes
You can also store the parking position using
the memory button M ?: With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
X Switch on the ignition. seat.
X Press button ;, to select the passenger- Each memory position button on the driver’s
side exterior rear view mirror. side can store all of the following settings:
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
RSeat position
view mirror with adjustment button = so
RDrive-dynamic multicontour seat: Drive-
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb. dynamic function level
X Press memory button M ? and within RSteering wheel position
3 seconds, press one of the arrows of RExterior rear view mirrors’ position
adjustment button =.
The parking position is stored if the exterior G Warning!
rear view mirror does not move. Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while
i If the exterior rear view mirror does move, driving could cause the driver to lose control
repeat the above steps. After the setting is of the vehicle.
stored, you can move the exterior rear view
mirror again. Each memory position button on the front
passenger side can store the setting of the
seat position.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 97
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 97

modified for symmetrical low beams.


Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon


headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional

Controls in detail
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory
X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the Exterior lamp switch
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.

Recalling positions from memory 1 W Standing lamps, left


X Press and hold desired memory position 2 X Standing lamps, right
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved 3 T Parking lamps5
to the stored position completely. On the Daytime running lamp mode
driver’s side, also wait for the steering
4 c Automatic headlamp mode
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
Daytime running lamp mode
move to the stored position.
5 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
i Releasing the memory position button headlamps
stops movement to the stored positions B R Vehicles with front fog lamps: Rear
immediately. fog lamp
C N Vehicles with front fog lamps: Front
fog lamps
Lighting
i The exterior lamps (except standing
Notes
lamps or parking lamps) go out
i If you drive in countries with left-hand automatically when you remove the
driving, you must have the headlamps SmartKey from the starter switch or open

5 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, the license plate lamps, the side marker lamps, and the
instrument cluster illumination are also on.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 98
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

98 Lighting

the driver’s door with the ignition switched To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
off. headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
When the parking lamps or the rear fog L when driving or when traffic and/or
lamp are switched on and you remove the ambient lighting conditions require you to do
SmartKey from the starter switch and open so.
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
sounds. from position c to L with the vehicle
In addition the message Switch Off at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
Controls in detail

Lights appears in the multifunction from c to L will briefly switch off the
display. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog ambient lighting conditions may result in an
lamp manually. accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
when leaving the vehicle may result in a operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
discharged battery.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
i Vehicles without front fog lamps: For switch to position c.
better detection of the vehicle, the LED
daytime running lamps are dimmed to When ambient light is low: When the
parking lamp level when the low-beam SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
headlamps are switched on. when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
been pressed once, the parking lamps5 come
Low-beam headlamps on automatically.
When the engine is running, the low-beam
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on headlamps come on additionally.
and off with the exterior lamp switch. When ambient light is bright: When the
X Switch on the ignition. SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
switch to position L. been pressed once, all lamps are off.
The following lamps come on: When the engine is running, the daytime
RLow-beam headlamps running lamps6 come on automatically.
When the low-beam headlamps are switched
RParking lamps5 on, the green indicator lamp L in the
RGreen indicator lamp L in the instrument cluster comes on.
instrument cluster Once the low-beam headlamps are on, the
high-beam headlamps are also available.
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
G Warning!
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
If the exterior lamp switch is set to c, the
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
headlamps will not automatically come on
under foggy conditions. In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default.

5 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, the license plate lamps, the side marker lamps, and the
instrument cluster illumination are also on.
6 USA only: The daytime running lamp mode must be activated via the control system.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 99
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 99

X Activate the daytime running lamp mode L, the manual headlamp mode has
using the control system, see “Switching priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA The corresponding exterior lamps come on
only)” (Y page 141). (Y page 97).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
c. Fog lamps
When the engine is running and the
ambient light is bright, the daytime running G Warning!

Controls in detail
lamps come on. In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
In low ambient lighting conditions, the only switch from position c to L with
following lamps will come on additionally: the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
RLow-beam headlamps Switching from c to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
RParking lamps5 driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
Rgreen indicator lamp L in the result in an accident.
instrument cluster
Front fog lamps will operate with the parking
You can only switch on the high-beam lamps and/or the low-beam headlamps on.
headlamps when the low-beam headlamps The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
are on. with the exterior lamp switch in position
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. L. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low-beam headlamps.
Canada only Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle
When the engine is running, and you Regulations regarding permissible lamp
Rshift from a driving position to park operation.
position P with the vehicle at a standstill, X Switch on the ignition.
the daytime running lamps or the low-beam X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
headlamps will go out with a delay of T, or L, or c (Y page 97).
3 minutes
Vehicles with front fog lamps
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
T, the daytime running lamps and the X Switching on front fog lamps: Press
parking lamps5 come on in bright ambient switch N (Y page 97).
lighting conditions. The green indicator lamp N in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
X Switching off front fog lamps: Press
L, the manual headlamp mode has
switch N (Y page 97).
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode The green indicator lamp N in the
instrument cluster goes out.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 97).

USA only
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position T or

5 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, the license plate lamps, the side marker lamps, and the
instrument cluster illumination are also on.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 100
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

100 Lighting

X Switching on rear fog lamp: Press switch Turn signals


N (Y page 97).
X Press the combination switch in direction
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
of arrow ; or ?.
green N and the yellow indicator lamp
The corresponding turn signal indicator
R in the instrument cluster come on.
lamp ! or # in the instrument
X Switching off rear fog lamp: Press switch
cluster flashes.
N (Y page 97).
The combination switch resets automatically
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
Controls in detail

after major steering wheel movements.


green N and the yellow indicator lamp
R in the instrument cluster goes out. To signal minor directional changes:
X Press the combination switch only to the
Vehicles without front fog lamps
point of resistance in direction of
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Press switch arrow ; or ? and release.
R (Y page 97). The corresponding turn signal lamps will
The rear fog lamp and the yellow indicator flash three times.
lamp R in the instrument cluster come
on. High beam
X Switching off rear fog lamp: Press switch
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
R (Y page 97).
The rear fog lamp and the yellow indicator L (Y page 97).
lamp R in the instrument cluster goes X Switching on: Push the combination
out. switch in direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
Locator lighting K in the instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
The locator lighting is described in the in direction of arrow = to its original
“Control system” section, see “Switching
position.
locator lighting on or off” (Y page 142).
i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic
Combination switch headlamp mode (Y page 98) or the daytime
running lamp mode (Y page 98).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only
available in vehicles with Bi-Xenon
headlamps.
Depending on the driving and traffic situation,
low-beam leveling and the high-beam
headlamps are controlled via an optical
sensor. The sensor is located on the front of
the overhead control panel. Glare for other
road users is reduced and the illumination of
road ahead is improved. The transitions
between low-beam and high-beam
headlamps take place without a sudden
change of light.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 101
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 101

G Warning! When driving faster than approximately


The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid 34 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users
intended to support you while driving. The are recognized, the high-beam headlamps
driver is and remains responsible for proper are switched on automatically. The high-
vehicle lighting in accordance with the beam headlamp indicator lamp K in the
prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions. instrument cluster comes on additionally.
When driving slower than approximately
The system may be impaired or unavailable
28 mph (45 km/h), other road users are
when

Controls in detail
recognized, or the road is illuminated
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, sufficiently, the high-beam headlamps are
or heavy spray switched off automatically. The indicator
Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is lamp K in the instrument cluster goes
dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for out. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist
example indicator _ in the multifunction display
remains on.
The system cannot recognize the following
Adaptive control of the headlamp leveling
road users:
takes place at a speed of approximately
RRoad users without a lighting system of 25 mph (40 km/h).
their own, e.g. pedestrians X Deactivating: Pull the combination switch
RRoad users with dim lighting of their own, back to its initial position.
e.g. cyclists The Adaptive Highbeam Assist
RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed, indicator _ in the multifunction display
e.g. road users behind a guardrail goes out.
RIn some seldom cases, even road users with
a lighting system of their own may be
High-beam flasher
recognized too late or not at all. X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
The automatic high-beam headlamps will then briefly in direction of arrow =.
not be deactivated or it will be activated in
spite of preceding or oncoming road users.
This could endanger you and/or others and Hazard warning flasher
cause an accident. Always pay close attention The hazard warning flasher can be switched
to the traffic situation and switch off the high on at all times, even with the SmartKey
beam manually if necessary. removed from the starter switch.
X
The hazard warning flasher comes on
Activating: Enable the Adaptive
automatically when an air bag deploys.
Highbeam Assist via the control system
(Y page 142).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
c.
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow :.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist
indicator _ in the multifunction display
comes on when switching on the low-beam
headlamps.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 102
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

102 Lighting

Corner-illuminating lamps
The corner-illuminating lamps improve
illumination of the area in the direction into
which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating lamps will only
operate in low ambient lighting conditions.
If you are driving faster than 25 mph
Controls in detail

(40 km/h) the corner-illuminating function is


not available.

X Switching on: Press hazard warning Switching on


flasher switch :. X Make sure the engine is running.
All turn signal lamps are flashing. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
i With the hazard warning flasher activated L or c (Y page 97).
and the combination switch set for either or
left or right turn, only the respective left or X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
right turn signals will operate when the (Y page 98).
ignition is switched on. X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
X Switching off: Press hazard warning depending on whether you are turning left
flasher switch : again. or right.
The respective corner-illuminating lamp
i If the hazard warning flasher has been comes on. If you have switched on the turn
activated automatically, press hazard signal for one side but turn the steering
warning flasher switch : to switch it off. wheel in the other direction, the corner-
illuminating lamp comes on on the side of
the turn signal.
Headlamp cleaning system or
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high- X Turn steering wheel in desired direction.
pressure water jet automatically when the Driving forward: The corner-illuminating
engine is running and you have lamp on the side of your steering direction
Rswitched on the headlamps comes on.
and Driving in reverse: The corner-illuminating
lamp opposite to your steering direction
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the comes on.
windshield with washer fluid for the first
time The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
automatically depending on the steering
The headlamps are cleaned every tenth time angle, even if you did not switch on either turn
the windshield is washed with washer fluid. signal. If the corner-illuminating lamps came
The counter resets when you switch off the on automatically, they will also go out
ignition. automatically depending on the steering
For information on filling up the washer angle and vehicle speed.
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
cleaning system” (Y page 227). come on on both sides of the vehicle if you
turn the steering wheel in one direction and
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 103
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Lighting 103

then again in the other direction shortly The interior lighting goes out after a short
thereafter. time.
The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
short time only. It then goes out go out automatically after approximately
automatically. 5 minutes.

Switching off X Deactivating: Press button ~.


Button ~ engages.

Controls in detail
X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
Manual control
X Steer straight ahead.
The corner-illuminating lamp goes out. ! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
i There may be a brief delay before the
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
corner-illuminating lamps go out.
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Interior lighting in the front
X Switching front interior lighting on/
off: Press switch c.
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective button p.

Ambient lighting
The brightness of the ambient lighting is
adjusted via the “Control system”
: v Rear interior lighting on/off
(Y page 143).
; ~ Automatic control on/off
= p Right front reading lamp on/off Emergency lighting
? c Front interior lighting on/off
When the interior lighting is set to automatic
A p Left front reading lamp on/off mode, the interior lighting comes on
automatically if the vehicle is involved in an
Automatic control accident.
X Activating: Press button ~. Switching off:
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with X Press hazard warning flasher switch
the other buttons. (Y page 101).
The interior lighting comes, when you or
Runlock the vehicle X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter
switch (Interior Lighting Delay:
must be enabled (Y page 143))
Ropen a door

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 104
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

104 Wipers

Interior lighting in the rear Switching on/off


! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Controls in detail

Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wipers off
2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping7
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping8
4 ° Slow continuous wiping
5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
: p Right rear reading lamp on/off B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
; p Left rear reading lamp on/off washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the desired
Wipers
position, depending on the intensity of the
Notes rain.
! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on Intermittent wiping
a windshield might scratch the glass and/ Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
or damage the wiper blades when wiping weather conditions or in the presence of
occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary precipitation.
to operate the wipers in dry weather
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
conditions, always operate the wipers with
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
washer fluid.
suitable wiping interval depending on the
wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
Windshield wipers ! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
X Observe notes on page (Y page 104).
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.

7 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.


8 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 105
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power windows 105

! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on For information on filling up the washer
the surface of the rain sensor or optical reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
effects may cause the windshield wipers to cleaning system” (Y page 227).
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could For information on cleaning the headlamps
then damage the windshield wiper blades with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
or scratch the windshield. You should system” (Y page 102).
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.

Controls in detail
Problems with wipers
X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å. ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
After the initial wipe, pauses between (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor immediately.
automatically. For safety reasons, do the following before
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the attempting to remove any blockage:
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is RStop the vehicle in a safe location.
opened. This protects persons getting into or
RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all switch.
doors are closed and or
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive RTurn off the engine by pressing the
position D or reverse gear R KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
or open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
Rthe
door open, starter switch is in position
wiper setting is changed using the
0, same as with SmartKey removed from
combination switch
starter switch).
REngage the parking brake.
Single wipe
RRemove blockage.
X Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow B to the resistance RTurn the windshield wipers on again.
point. If the windshield wipers fail to function at
The windshield wipers wipe one time all with the combination switch in position
without washer fluid. Ä or Å,
Rset the combination switch to the next
Wiping with washer fluid higher wiper speed
X Press the combination switch in direction Rhave the windshield wipers checked at
of arrow B past the resistance point. the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
The windshield wipers operate with washer Center
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with Power windows
washer fluid every now and then even when Opening and closing
it is raining.
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door windows
are located on the driver’s door control panel.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 106
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

106 Power windows

The switches for the respective door windows downward motion of the pane may pull that
are located on the front passenger door and part of your body down between the window
on the rear doors. pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
i Operating the rear door windows from there is a risk of entrapment, release the
the rear is not possible when you activate switch and pull it to close the window.
the override switch (Y page 60).
i You can also open or close the door
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. windows using the SmartKey, see
Controls in detail

G Warning! “Summer opening feature” (Y page 107)


and “Convenience closing feature”
When opening or closing the door windows,
(Y page 108).
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure. i After switching off the ignition or
The door windows are equipped with the removing the SmartKey from the starter
express operation and automatic reversal switch, you can operate the door windows
function. If in express operation mode a door until you open the driver’s or front
window encounters an obstruction that passenger door. If no door was opened you
blocks its path, the automatic reversal can operate the door windows for up to
function will stop the door window and open 5 minutes.
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
X Switch on the ignition.
you are closing the door windows by pressing
and holding button & on the SmartKey or X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
by touching and holding the sensor surface switch : to ? to the resistance point.
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside The corresponding door window moves
door handle, the automatic reversal function downward or upward until you release the
will not operate. switch.
Activate the override switch when children X Express operation: Press or pull
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The switch : to ? past the resistance point
children may otherwise injure themselves, and release.
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window The corresponding door window opens or
opening. closes completely.
X Stopping during express operation:
G Warning!
Press or pull the respective switch again.
Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 107
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power windows 107

Closing when a door window is blocked X Pull and hold the respective switch once
more immediately until the door window is
G Warning! closed completely.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Hold the respective switch for
and be seriously or even fatally injured when approximately 1 second.
closing a door window with greater force or The door window is synchronized.
without automatic reversal function.

Controls in detail
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
Summer opening feature
door window will stop and open slightly. When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
X Immediately after the door window has the vehicle before driving off by
stopped because it was blocked, pull and simultaneously
hold the respective switch upward until the Ropening the door windows
door window is fully closed. Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof
The door window closes with greater force.
Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
If the door window is blocked again and opens sliding panel and roller sunblinds
slightly:
Rswitching on the seat ventilation for the
X Immediately after the door window was driver’s seat
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully The summer opening feature can only be
closed. activated via the remote control of the
The door window closes without automatic SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
reversal function. proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
G Warning! the driver’s outside door handle.
Pulling and holding the switch to close the X Press button % on the SmartKey to
door window immediately after it had been unlock the vehicle.
blocked two times will cause the door window
Keep button % pressed until the door
to close without any reversal function for as
windows and the tilt/sliding panel of the
long as you hold the switch.
panorama roof or the tilt/sliding sunroof
have reached the desired position.
Vehicles with panorama roof with
Synchronizing door windows power tilt/sliding panel: When the roller
The door windows must be synchronized if sunblinds of the panorama roof with power
they cannot be fully closed (express tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller
operation). sunblinds will open first.
Each door window must be synchronized X Press button % once more until the tilt/
separately. sliding panel of the panorama roof has
X Close all doors. reached the desired position.
X Switch on the ignition. X Release button % on the SmartKey to

X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?


interrupt the opening procedure.
(Y page 106) until the respective door
window is closed.
The door window opens again slightly.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 108
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

108 Power windows

Convenience closing feature power tilt/sliding panel are closed


completely.
When locking the vehicle, you can
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
simultaneously close
interrupt the closing procedure.
Rthe door windows X Vehicles with panorama roof with
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof power tilt/sliding panel: Press and hold
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding button & on the SmartKey once more.
The roller sunblinds extend.
Controls in detail

panel
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
Afterward, you can extend the roller
sunblinds of the panorama roof with power interrupt the extending procedure.
tilt/sliding panel.
With KEYLESS-GO
G Warning!
When closing the door windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, make sure there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
RRelease button & to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold button
%. To continue the closing procedure
after making sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
procedure, press and hold button &. located outside the vehicle within
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Close all doors.
RRelease the sensor surface on the outside
door handle to stop the closing procedure. X Touch and hold sensor surface : on an
RImmediately pull on the same outside door outside door handle (Y page 79) until the
handle and hold firmly. The door windows door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
and the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
roof with power tilt/sliding panel will open panel are closed completely.
for as long as the door handle is held but i Make sure you are only touching sensor
the door not opened. surface :.
X Release sensor surface : on the outside
With SmartKey
door handle to interrupt the closing
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to procedure.
the driver’s outside door handle. X Vehicles with panorama roof with
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the power tilt/sliding panel: Touch and hold
driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button & on the
SmartKey until the door windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 109
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving and parking 109

sensor surface : on an outside door immediately. If you must drive under these
handle once more. conditions, drive only with at least one
The roller sunblinds extend. window fully open at all times.
X Release sensor surface : on the outside
door handle to interrupt the extending Automatic transmission
procedure.

Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance. : Button for selecting park position P

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers j Park position


the objects could get caught between or k Reverse gear
under the pedals. You could then no longer i Neutral position
brake or accelerate. This could lead to h Drive position
accidents and injury.

G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

Starting the engine


Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
G Warning! (E 63 AMG)
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your : Button for selecting park position P
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon j Park position
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause k Reverse gear
unconsciousness and possible death. i Neutral position
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such h Drive position
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are For more information, see “Automatic
entering the vehicle while driving, have the transmission” (Y page 114).
cause determined and corrected

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 110
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

110 Driving and parking

X Make sure the automatic transmission is in


park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 118).

With SmartKey
Controls in detail

X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.


X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 85) and
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
release it.
: USA only
The engine starts automatically.
; Canada only
X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 85). X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Preglow indicator lamp % in the button is inserted in the starter switch
instrument cluster comes on. (Y page 86).
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp %
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
switch to position 3 and release it. remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
The engine starts automatically. from the starter switch. Proceed as
i If the engine is at operating temperature, described in “With SmartKey”
preglow indicator lamp % may not stay (Y page 110).
on and you can start the engine without X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
preglowing. procedure.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
With KEYLESS-GO X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
G Warning! start/stop button once.
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the The engine starts automatically.
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
children unattended in the vehicle, as they start/stop button once.
could otherwise accidentally start the engine. The engine preglows and starts
When leaving the vehicle, always take the automatically.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A the time the engine needs to preglow is
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could reduced.
result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury. Starting difficulties

You can start your vehicle without the ! Remember that extended starting
SmartKey in the starter switch using the attempts can drain the battery.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 111
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving and parking 111

The engine does not start. You can hear Driving off
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine G Warning!
electronics or in the fuel supply system. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
Carry out the following steps:
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with the control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter this type of loss of control.

Controls in detail
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure. ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS- speeds. Running a cold engine at high
GO: Close any doors that may be open to engine speeds may shorten the service life
allow for better detection of the SmartKey. of the engine. This is not covered by the
or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop E 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
button from the starter switch. 68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio is restricted in order to protect it from
signals from another source may be damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function. speed when the engine is cold to prevent
X Repeat the starting procedure.
premature engine wear and/or diminished
comfort.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts: ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz message Release Parking Brake
Center or call Roadside Assistance. appears in the multifunction display when
driving off, you have forgotten to release
The engine does not start. You cannot the parking brake.
hear the starter. Release the parking brake.
The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
X Get a jump start (Y page 338).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
If the engine will not start despite a jump which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
start: Limited Warranty.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ! Simultaneously depressing the
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
The starter has been exposed to excessive reduces engine performance and causes
temperatures. premature brake and drivetrain wear which
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes. is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
X Repeat the starting procedure. Limited Warranty.
If the engine does not start after several i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
starting attempts: automatic central locking function engages
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz and the locking knobs in the doors move
Center or call Roadside Assistance. down.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 112
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

112 Driving and parking

The automatic central locking function can For more information on driving, see “Driving
be switched off (Y page 144). instructions” (Y page 254).

Automatic transmission
Problems while driving
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic The engine runs erratically and misfires
transmission out of park position P or neutral RGasoline engine: An ignition cable may be
Controls in detail

position N if the engine speed is higher than damaged.


idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
RThe engine electronics may not be
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
operating properly.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
something. Only shift into gear when the have entered the catalytic converter and
engine is idling normally and when your right damaged it.
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. X Give very little gas.
X Have the problem checked at an authorized
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged. The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
X Depress the brake pedal.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
The gear selector lever can now be used.
the engine.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
position D or reverse gear R. as possible.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of X Turn off the engine immediately.
park position P is only possible with the X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
brake pedal depressed. X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
Without the brake pedal depressed, the necessary (Y page 226).
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down. However, the parking pawl remains In case of accident
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
X Wait for the gear selection process to
X Do not start the engine under any
complete before setting the vehicle in
circumstances.
motion.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
roadway.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission If the extent of the damage cannot be
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows determined:
the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach Center or call Roadside Assistance.
its operating temperature earlier.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 113
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving and parking 113

If no damage on major assemblies, fuel G Warning!


system, and engine mount can be When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
determined: SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
X Start the engine in the usual manner. you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
Parking release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of park position

Controls in detail
G Warning! P, either of which could result in an accident
Do not park this vehicle in areas where and/or serious personal injury.
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Vehicle movement may result in serious
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage the parking brake.
RShift the automatic transmission into park X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
position P. When the ignition is switched on or the
RSlowly release the brake pedal. engine is running, the brake warning lamp
$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
the instrument cluster goes out.
front wheels towards the road curb.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to pedal ; firmly.
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from When the engine is running, the brake
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS- warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
GO start/stop button. (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the comes on.
vehicle when leaving.

Parking brake Turning off the engine

G Warning! G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock has come to a complete stop. With the engine
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and not running, there is no power assistance for
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s the brake and steering systems. In this case,
brake lights do not light up when the parking it is important to keep in mind that a
brake is engaged. considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 114
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

114 Automatic transmission

X Shift the automatic transmission into park G Warning!


position P (Y page 116). Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
X Engage the parking brake. only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
i Always engage the parking brake in Always shift the automatic transmission into
addition to shifting the automatic park position P before turning off the engine.
transmission into park position P.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Controls in detail

i Observe instructions if you want the could result in an accident and/or serious
automatic transmission to remain in personal injury.
neutral position N, see “Remaining in
neutral position N” (Y page 115). i In an emergency you can turn off the
engine while driving by pressing and
With SmartKey holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
for approximately 3 seconds.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0. If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter turn it off as described above:
switch.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
When you turn off the engine using the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from button from the starter switch.
the starter switch or open a front door, the X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.

automatic transmission will shift into park The engine turns off. The starter switch is
position P automatically. in position 0 (Y page 85).

G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone Automatic transmission
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically. Introduction
Always shift the automatic transmission into For information on driving with an automatic
park position P before turning off the engine. transmission, see “Driving and parking”
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which (Y page 109).
could result in an accident and/or serious
G Warning!
personal injury.
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
With KEYLESS-GO Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. obstacles. If there are any floormats or
With the driver’s door closed, the starter carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s still have sufficient clearance.
door opened, the starter switch is set to During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed the objects could get caught between or
from the starter switch (Y page 85). under the pedals. You could then no longer
When you turn off the engine using the brake or accelerate. This could lead to
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a accidents and injury.
front door, the automatic transmission will
shift into park position P automatically.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 115
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 115

! Allow the engine to warm up under low


load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature has
been reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces.
This may cause serious damage to the

Controls in detail
engine and the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
(E 63 AMG)
i During the brief warm-up, transmission : Button for selecting park position P
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
j Park position
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up k Reverse gear
more quickly to operating temperature. i Neutral position
h Drive position

Gear selector lever G Warning!


It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission ! The vehicle must be stopped when you
: Button for selecting park position P shift the automatic transmission
j Park position Rdirectly between drive position D and
k Reverse gear reverse gear R
i Neutral position Rdirectly between reverse gear R and
h Drive position drive position D
Rdirectly into park position P
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
(Y page 120).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 116
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

116 Automatic transmission

i Shifting the automatic transmission out KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
of park position P is only possible with the using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
brake pedal depressed. open a front door, the automatic transmission
Without the brake pedal depressed, the will shift into park position P automatically.
gear selector lever can be moved up or G Warning!
down, but the parking pawl remains
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
only will shift the automatic transmission into
Controls in detail

i The gear selector lever always returns to neutral position N automatically.


its original position. Always shift the automatic transmission into
The current transmission position P, R, N, park position P before turning off the engine.
or D appears in the multifunction display Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
(Y page 118). could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
E 63 AMG only: There are additional
indicators on the cover of the shifting gate
i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
showing the current gear selector lever
position. shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P.
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS:
when you remove the SmartKey from the The automatic transmission will shift into
starter switch. park position P automatically when HOLD
function or DISTRONIC PLUS brings your
vehicle to standstill. In addition, at least one
G Warning!
of the following conditions must be met:
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
RThe engine is turned off.
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically. RThe driver’s door is opened and the seat
Always shift the automatic transmission into belt is not inserted in the seat belt buckle.
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which E 63 AMG: Shifting into park position P
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

i Moving the gear selector lever up or down


shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P.

All models except E 63 AMG: Shifting


into park position P
X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button : on the gear selector lever.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey button : on the gearshift pattern.
from the starter switch or open a front door,
the automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 117
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 117

G Warning! With SmartKey:


Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
only will shift the automatic transmission into X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
neutral position N automatically. brake pedal and keep it pressed.
Always shift the automatic transmission into X Shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine. neutral position N.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which X Release the brake pedal.

Controls in detail
could result in an accident and/or serious X If engaged, release the parking brake.
personal injury.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Shifting into neutral position N
With KEYLESS-GO:
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
brake pedal.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
the resistance point to select neutral
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position N.
position P.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic
X Release the brake pedal.
transmission will shift into neutral position
N automatically. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the button from the starter switch.
starter switch or opening a front door after X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
turning off the engine will shift the automatic X Switch on the ignition.
transmission into park position P X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
automatically. pressed.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after X Shift the automatic transmission into
turning off the engine will shift the automatic neutral position N.
transmission into park position P X Release the brake pedal.
automatically.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
Remaining in neutral position N X Switch off the ignition and leave the
If you want the automatic transmission to SmartKey in the starter switch.
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor- Shifting into reverse gear R
type car wash, observe the following
instructions. X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal.
G Warning! X Move the gear selector lever up past the
When leaving the SmartKey in the starter resistance point.
switch, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch
Shifting into drive position D
on the ignition which could result in
unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could brake pedal.
result in an accident and/or serious personal X Move the gear selector lever down past the
injury. resistance point.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 118
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

118 Automatic transmission

Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 120)

Rthe selected program mode:


C/S (Y page 120)
E 63 AMG
or
Controls in detail

: Transmission position indicator


M (E 63 AMG only) (Y page 122)
If the current transmission position does not
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
appear in the multifunction display due to a
Rthe vehicle speed malfunction, for example, make sure that the
With drive position D selected, you can automatic transmission is in the desired
influence transmission shifting by position.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Rlimiting the gear range
position D.
Rextending the gear range X Select automatic program mode C.
Rchanging the gears manually (E 63 AMG X Do not limit the gear range.
only) X Drive off carefully.
E 63 AMG: Double-clutching is active when
downshifting in all program modes. Double-
clutching reduces load-alteration effects and
supports sporty driving. The degree to which
you perceive double-clutching acoustically
varies depending on the selected program
mode.

Transmission positions
The current transmission position appears in
the multifunction display.

All models except E 63 AMG


: Transmission position indicator
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 119
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 119

Effect Effect
B Park position A Neutral position
Shift the automatic transmission No power is transmitted from the
into park position P only when the engine to the drive axle. When the
vehicle is stopped. The park brakes are released, the vehicle can
position is not intended to serve as be moved freely (pushed or towed).
a brake when the vehicle is parked. To avoid damage to the

Controls in detail
Rather, the driver should always transmission, never shift the
engage the parking brake in automatic transmission into neutral
addition to shifting the automatic position N while driving.
transmission into park position P to Exception: If the ESC is switched off
secure the vehicle. or malfunctioning, shift the
The SmartKey can only be removed automatic transmission into neutral
from the starter switch with the position N if the vehicle is in danger
gear selector lever in park position of skidding.
P. With the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch, the gear selector ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
lever is locked in park position P. for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
neutral position N can result in
malfunctioning, the automatic
transmission damage that is not
transmission could remain locked
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
in park position P.
Limited Warranty.
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked at an authorized 7 Drive position
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon The automatic transmission shifts
as possible. automatically. All forward gears are
available.
C Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the Driving tips
vehicle is stopped.
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 120
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

120 Automatic transmission

Rocking the vehicle The current gear range appears in the


multifunction display.
Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic
transmission directly between drive position
D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
system of this vehicle electronically limits
directly shifting the automatic transmission
between drive position D and reverse gear R
Controls in detail

to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph


(9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission E 63 AMG
directly between drive position D and reverse : Gear range indicator
gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
Effect
down past the resistance point.
= With this selection you can use the
Working on the vehicle braking effect of the engine.
G Warning! 5 Allows the use of the engine’s
When working on the vehicle, engage the braking effect when driving
parking brake and shift the automatic Ron steep downgrades
transmission into park position P. Otherwise Rin mountainous regions
the vehicle could roll away which could result
Runder extreme operating
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
conditions
4 For maximum use of the engine’s
Gear ranges braking effect on very steep or
With the automatic transmission in drive lengthy downgrades.
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 121). Automatic shift program
The current gear range appears in the
multifunction display.

All models except E 63 AMG


: Gear range indicator
Program mode selector switch on all models
except E 63 AMG

C Comfort For comfort driving


S Sport For sporty driving
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 121
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 121

Automatic program mode S will not be stored.


When the engine is turned off with the
automatic program mode S selected, the
automatic transmission will go to the
automatic program mode C when the engine
is restarted.
E 63 AMG: Automatic program mode S+ will
not be stored. When the engine is turned off

Controls in detail
with automatic program mode S+ selected,
the automatic transmission will go to
automatic program mode C when the engine
Program mode selector dial on E 63 AMG
is restarted.
C Comfort For standard driving X All models except E 63 AMG: Press the
program mode selector switch repeatedly
S Sport For sporty driving
until the letter of the desired program mode
S+ Sport Plus For sporty driving with appears in the right multifunction display.
shorter shift times X E 63 AMG: Turn the program mode
selector dial until the letter of the desired
M Manual For manual gearshifting
program mode appears in the right
(Y page 122)
multifunction display.
RS RACE START For optimum Selecting program mode C means:
acceleration from a RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
standing start
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
i Program mode RS cannot be selected RTraction and driving stability are improved
while driving. For more information, see on icy roads.
“RACE START (E 63 AMG)” (Y page 159). RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
The current program mode appears in the more gas. The engine then operates at
multifunction display. lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.

One-touch gearshifting
E 63 AMG With the automatic transmission in drive
: Program mode indicator position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the steering wheel gearshift
i E 63 AMG: In addition, the currently control.
selected program mode is indicated in red E 63 AMG: You only can limit or extend the
on the program mode selector dial. gear range when driving in automatic
program mode C, S,or S+. For information on
You should only change the program mode
using the steering wheel gearshift control in
when the automatic transmission is in park
position P.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 122
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

122 Automatic transmission

manual program mode M, see “Manual shift Extending gear range


program” (Y page 122).
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
E 63 AMG: For information on using the The automatic transmission will shift into
steering wheel gearshift control in manual the next higher gear as permitted by the
program mode M, see “Manual shift program” shift program. This action simultaneously
(Y page 122). extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
Controls in detail

i If you press on the accelerator pedal


when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.

Canceling gear range limit


X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
Steering wheel gearshift control (example the gear range indicator disappears from
illustration) the multifunction display.
The automatic transmission will shift from
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel the current gear range directly into drive
gearshift control when the automatic position D.
transmission is in park position P, neutral
position N, or reverse gear R. Shifting into optimal gear range
X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
Limiting gear range
The automatic transmission will select the
G Warning! gear range suited for optimal acceleration
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in and deceleration automatically. This will
order to obtain braking action. This could involve shifting down one or more gears.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control. Manual shift program
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. The manual shift program is available on
E 63 AMG only.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next lower gear as permitted by the Manual program mode M differs with regard
shift program. This action simultaneously to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
limits the gear range of the automatic smoothness from automatic program modes
transmission. S or S+.
In manual program mode M, system-
i To avoid overrevving the engine when controlled automatic gearshifting is switched
downshifting, the automatic transmission off. You need to change the gears by manually
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s upshifting or downshifting using the steering
maximum speed would be exceeded. wheel gearshift control.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 123
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Automatic transmission 123

i Manual program mode M will not be


stored. When the engine is turned off with
manual program mode M selected, the
automatic transmission will go to
automatic program mode C when the
engine is restarted.

Upshifting

Controls in detail
! In manual program mode M, the
automatic transmission will not upshift,
Program mode selector dial on E 63 AMG even if the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Shift up into the next
C Comfort For standard driving gear before the engine has reached its
S Sport For sporty driving overrevving range. Make absolutely certain
that the engine speed does not reach the
S+ Sport Plus For sporty driving with red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise
shorter shift times the engine could be damaged which is not
M Manual For manual gearshifting covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
RS RACE START For optimum
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;
acceleration from a
standing start (Y page 122).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next higher gear.
i Program mode RS cannot be selected
while driving. For more information, see Upshift indicator
“RACE START (E 63 AMG)” (Y page 159).
The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 121).
For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”
(Y page 120) and “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 121).
In manual program mode M, upshift
indicator ; in the multifunction display
Activating manual shift program
advises you to upshift before the engine
X Turn the program mode selector dial until reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can
M appears in the multifunction display. drive at the maximum engine speed for each
The automatic transmission switches to gear without overrevving the engine.
manual program mode M. Automatic X Shift the automatic transmission from
shifting is switched off. The gear range is current gear : into the next higher gear.
not limited. The fuel supply will otherwise be
You can change the gears manually with drive interrupted to prevent the engine from
position D selected. You can upshift or overrevving.
downshift through the gears in succession.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 124
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

124 Transfer case

Downshifting X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.


X Restart the engine.
G Warning!
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
order to obtain braking action. This could
R.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X Have the automatic transmission checked
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail

X Briefly pull left gearshift control :


(Y page 122).
The automatic transmission shifts into the Transfer case
next lower gear.
This section applies to vehicles equipped with
i When you brake or stop, the automatic all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
transmission shifts down into a gear from and rear axles are powered at all times when
which you can easily accelerate or take off. the vehicle is being operated.

Kickdown ! Only conduct operational or performance


tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
Using the kickdown while driving in manual tests are necessary, contact an authorized
program mode M is not possible. Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
Deactivating manual shift program system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
X Turn the program mode selector dial until
Warranty.
C or S appears in the multifunction display.
or ! Because the ESC operates automatically,
XRestart the engine. the engine and ignition must be shut off
The automatic transmission will go to (SmartKey in starter switch position 0, or
automatic program mode C. 1, or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
Manual program mode M is not stored. position 0, or 1) when
Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
brake test dynamometer
Emergency operation (limp-home Rtowing the vehicle with the front or rear
mode)
axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
If vehicle acceleration becomes less with 4MATIC)
responsive or sluggish or the automatic Active braking action through the ESC may
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic otherwise seriously damage the brake
transmission is most likely operating in limp- system which is not covered by the
home (emergency operation) mode. In this Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Turn off the engine.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 125
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Instrument cluster 125

Instrument cluster Adjusting the instrument cluster


illumination
Introduction
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(Y page 28).
G Warning!

Controls in detail
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
X To brighten illumination: Turn
Rspeed
dimmer : clockwise.
Routside temperature X To dim illumination: Turn dimmer :
Rwarning/indicator lamps counterclockwise.
Rmalfunction/warning messages i The instrument cluster illumination is
Rfailure of any systems dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
Driving characteristics may be impaired. ambient light conditions.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Coolant temperature gauge
Benz Center as soon as possible.
The coolant temperature gauge is located on
The language setting for the multifunction the right side in the instrument cluster
display can be changed via COMAND, see (Y page 28).
separate operating instructions.
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can
Activating the instrument cluster cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
The instrument cluster is activated when you
could be seriously burned.
Ropen the driver’s door Steam from an overheated engine can cause
Rswitch on the ignition serious burns which can occur just by opening
Rswitch on the exterior lamps the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-


and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†), i.e close to the
red zone of the temperature gauge.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 126
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

126 Control system

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Control system


warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a Introduction
coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†), The control system is activated as soon as the
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant starter switch is in position 2.
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause The control system enables you to call up
serious engine damage which is not information about your vehicle and to change
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited vehicle settings.
Controls in detail

Warranty. For example, you can use the control system


to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to call up statistical
Tachometer data on your vehicle, and much more.
The red marking on the tachometer
(Y page 28) denotes excessive engine speed.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, conditions must always be his/her primary
as it may result in serious engine damage focus when driving.
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz For your safety and the safety of others,
Limited Warranty. selecting features through the multifunction
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is steering wheel should only be done by the
interrupted if the engine is operated within driver when traffic and road conditions permit
the red marking. it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Outside temperature indicator covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
The outside temperature indicator is 14 m) every second.
displayed in the multifunction display The control system relays information to the
(Y page 128). multifunction display.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device Multifunction steering wheel
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. The displays in the multifunction display and
Indicated temperatures just above the the settings in the control system are
freezing point do not guarantee that the road controlled by using the buttons on the
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, multifunction steering wheel.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of the
instrument cluster (Y page 28). Once the fuel
level has fallen below the reserve mark, the
yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp 8
for the fuel reserve comes on.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 127
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 127

Press and hold button


% to select the standard display

A Press button
; to call up line for menus and to
= select menus

Press button briefly

Controls in detail
9 to select submenu or scroll
: through lists
within Audio menu to select
previous or next track, scene or
stored station
within Tel menu to switch to
the phone book and select a
: Multifunction display name or number
; Press button Press and hold button
~ to end a call 9 within Audio menu to select a
to reject an incoming call : track or scene with quick
6 to answer a call search or to select previous or
next station in station list or
to dial9
wave band
to redial9
within Tel menu to start the
8 to mute quick search in the phone book
Press button Press button
W to set the volume a to confirm selection or
X to operate the RACETIMER10 messages
= Press button
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
? to activate the Voice Control the buttons on the multifunction steering
System11 wheel will alter what appears in the
multifunction display.
? Press button briefly
The information available in the multifunction
% to cancel the Voice Control display is arranged in menus and
System11 accompanying functions and submenus.
to go back The individual functions are then found within
to confirm messages the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio, for example). These functions

9 Function only available in telephone menu.


10 AMG vehicles only.
11 Function only available in vehicles with Voice Control System.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 128
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

128 Control system

serve to call up relevant information or to For information about warning and


customize the settings for your vehicle. malfunction messages appearing in the
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the multifunction display (Y page 272).
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
In the Sett. menu, instead of functions, you Multifunction display
will find a number of submenus for calling up
and changing settings. For instructions on
Controls in detail

using these submenus, see “Settings menu”


(Y page 139).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.

Using the control system


X To select a menu: Press button =
or ;. : Text field
X To select a submenu: Press button : ; Line for main menus
or 9. = Automatic transmission program mode
X To go to the next higher menu level: indicator
Press button %. ? Transmission position/gear range
X To select the standard display: Press indicator
button % repeatedly until the standard A Outside temperature indicator/additional
display featuring the odometer and speedometer
speedometer appears. Settings, functions, submenus as well as any
or malfunctions appear in the text field.
X Press and hold button % until the For more information on menus displayed in
standard display featuring the trip the multifunction display, see “Menus and
odometer and the main odometer appears. submenus” (Y page 129).
X To confirm selection: Press button a. i E 63 AMG: The lower part of the
X To confirm display message: Press multifunction display will vary from the the
button a or %. multifunction display shown. For more
The control system saves certain display information, see (Y page 118).
messages. Calling up display messages
(Y page 139).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 129
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 129

Menus and submenus

Controls in detail
Function The following information is available:
RStandard display (Y page 129)
: Trip menu (Y page 129)
RFuel consumption statistics since start
; AMG12 menu (Y page 131) (Y page 130)
= Navi menu (Y page 134) RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 130)
? Audio menu (Y page 134)
RResetting values (Y page 130)
A Tel menu (Y page 135) RRemaining driving range and current fuel
B Assistance menu (Y page 137) consumption (Y page 131)
RDigital Speedometer (Y page 131)
C Service menu (Y page 138)
D Settings menu (Y page 139) Standard display

Trip menu
In the Trip menu, you can show an additional
display for the speedometer and call up or
reset your vehicle’s statistical data.

In the standard display, the trip


odometer : and the main odometer ;
appear in the multifunction display.

12 AMG vehicles only.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 130
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

130 Control system

If another display appears instead of the Fuel consumption statistics since last
standard display: reset
X Press button = or ; to select the X Press button = or ; to select the
Trip menu. Trip menu.
or X Press button : or 9 to select From
X Press button % repeatedly until the Reset.
standard display appears.
Controls in detail

or
X Press and hold button % until the
standard display appears.

Fuel consumption statistics since start


X Press button = or ; to select the : Distance driven since last reset
Trip menu. ; Time elapsed since last reset
X Press button : or 9 to select From
= Average speed since last reset
Start.
? Average fuel consumption since last reset
The fuel consumption statistics since last
reset reset automatically to 0 after
99 999 miles or 9 999 hours, whichever
occurs first.

Resetting values
: Distance driven since start You can reset the values for the following
; Time elapsed since start functions:
= Average speed since start RTrip odometer
? Average fuel consumption since start RFuel consumption statistics since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
X Press button = or ; to select the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch. Trip menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this function you wish to reset.
time period. X Press button a.

The fuel consumption statistics since start


reset automatically to 0 after 9 999 miles or
999 hours, whichever occurs first.

Example illustration: Reset fuel consumption


statistics since start
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 131
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 131

X Press button : to select Yes. AMG menu


X Press button a to confirm. This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
Remaining driving range and current X Press button = or ; to select the
fuel consumption AMG menu.
X Press button = or ; to select the
Trip menu.

Controls in detail
X Press button : or 9 to select the
estimated remaining driving range and
current fuel consumption display.
Note that the values are calculated based
on the current fuel tank level and the
current driving style. Make sure to refuel in
time.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
: Digital speedometer
instead of the estimated remaining driving
range. ; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator
? Engine oil temperature indicator
A Coolant temperature indicator
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
engine oil temperature has not yet reached
176‡ (80†). During this time, avoid driving
at full engine speed.
: Current fuel consumption13
The upshift indicator = indicates that the
; Estimated remaining driving range
engine has reached the overrevving range.
The upshift indicator = blocks other
Digital speedometer messages in the multifunction display until
X Press button = or ; to select the you have shifted up.
Trip menu. Use buttons : or 9 to select the
X Press button : or 9 to select the following functions in the AMG menu:
digital speedometer. RSETUP (Y page 132)

RRACETIMER (Y page 132)


ROverall analysis (Y page 133)
RLap analysis (Y page 133)

13 Not available on AMG vehicles.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 132
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

132 Control system

SETUP
X Press button = or ; to select the
AMG menu.
X Press button 9 to select SETUP.

or
X Tap the AMG button on the center console
(Y page 165).
Controls in detail

i You can store and call up automatic


transmission program mode and
suspension style settings with the AMG : RACETIMER
button on the center console. For more ; Lap number
information, see (Y page 165).
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 85).
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
W or X.
X Starting: Press button W.
X Displaying intermediate time: Press
button X while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
: Automatic transmission program mode X Stopping: Press button W.
indicator When you stop the vehicle and turn the
; ESC mode indicator SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 85) or, in
= Suspension style indicator vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
RACETIMER RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
when you press button W after switching
G Warning! the ignition back on or restarting the engine.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed Saving lap time and starting a new lap
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is You can save up to 16 laps.
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver X Press button X while the timer is
is and must always remain responsible for running.
following posted speed limits. The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
driving stretches.
The intermediate time shown will be saved
X Press button = or ; to select the
as a lap time.
AMG menu.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction the intermediate time is called up.
display.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 133
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 133

Overall analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press button = or ; to select the
AMG menu.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the

Controls in detail
overall analysis appears in the
multifunction display.
: RACETIMER
; Best lap time
= Lap number

Resetting current lap


X Press button W while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER
Deleting all laps ; Overall driving time
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. = Average speed
X Press button W while the timer is
? Overall distance driven
running. A Maximum speed
The timer stops.
X Press button a.
Lap analysis
The reset menu appears in the
multifunction display. This function is only available if you have
saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press button = or ; to select the
AMG menu.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction
display.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.

X Press button : to select Yes and


confirm with button a.
The saved laps are deleted.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 134
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

134 Control system

Audio menu
The functions in the Audio menu operate the
audio equipment which you have currently
switched on.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting radio station (Y page 134)
ROperating audio devices/audio media
Controls in detail

(Y page 135)
ROperating video DVD (Y page 135)
: Lap number
If the COMAND system is currently switched
; Lap time
off, the message Audio Off appears in the
= Average speed during lap multifunction display.
? Lap length X To adjust the volume: Press button
A Maximum speed during lap W or X on the multifunction steering
wheel.
X Press button : or 9 to see other lap
analyses.
Selecting radio station
i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated
Navi menu as a radio application.
The Navi menu contains the functions For more information on SIRIUS XM
needed to operate your navigation system. Satellite Radio, refer to separate COMAND
X Press button = or ; to select the
system operating instructions.
Navi menu. Additional optional satellite radio
The message shown in the multifunction equipment and a subscription to a satellite
display depends on the status of the radio service provider are required for
navigation system: satellite radio operation. Contact an
RWith the COMAND system switched on
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle.
or off and route guidance not activated,
the direction of travel and, if applicable, X Switch on the COMAND system and select
the name of the street currently traveled radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
on appear in the multifunction display. operating instructions.
RWith the COMAND system switched on X Press button = or ; to select the
and route guidance activated, maneuver Audio menu.
instructions appear in the multifunction The currently tuned station appears in the
display. multifunction display.
Please refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 135
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 135

X Selecting next or previous track: Press


button : or 9 briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold
button : or 9.
The current track does not appear during
Example illustration for FM radio Audio AUX mode operation.

Controls in detail
: Stored memory position
Operating video DVD
; Station frequency
= Wave band setting X Switch on the COMAND system and select
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
X Selecting next or previous stored system operating instructions.
station: Press button : or 9 briefly X Press button = or ; to select the
to select a stored station. Audio menu.
X Selecting next or previous station in
wave band: Press and hold button : or
9 to select a station.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual : Disc number
manner. ; Current scene

Operating audio devices/audio media X Selecting next or previous scene: Press


button : or 9 briefly.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
X Selecting a scene from the scene list
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
(quick search): Press and hold
separate COMAND system operating
instructions. button : or 9.
X Press button = or ; to select the
Audio menu. The settings for the currently
Tel menu
being played audio device/audio media
appear in the multifunction display. G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the hands-
Example illustration free device and only use the telephone when
: Disc number weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
; Current track

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 136
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

136 Control system

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from X Press button 6.


using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. You have answered the call.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph The caller’s number appears only if it is
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is transmitted.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately The caller’s name appears only if the number
14 m) every second. and the name are stored in the phone book.
You can connect your telephone to the
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
Controls in detail

COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see


call
separate COMAND system operating
instructions. X Press button ~.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Refer to separate COMAND system Dialing a number from the phone book
operating instructions. When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Press button = or ; to select the you may select and dial a number from the
Tel menu. phone book at any time.
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
i To use the phone book of the COMAND
system you can import business cards
RNo Service: No network is available.
(vCards) from external Bluetooth® phones
RReady for Bluetooth Telephony...: into your COMAND system’s phone book,
The telephone has not been connected see separate COMAND operating
to the COMAND system via Bluetooth® instructions.
yet.
X Press button = or ; to select the
X Connect the telephone to the
Tel menu.
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
X Press button : or 9 or a to
RPhone READY or name of the network switch to the phone book.
provider (if available): The telephone has The stored names are displayed in
found a network and is ready for use. You ascending alphabetical order.
can operate it using the control system. X Press button : or 9 to select the
desired entry.
Answering a call If you press and hold button : or
When your telephone is ready to receive calls, 9 the system scrolls rapidly through the
you can answer a call at any time. In the list of names (quick search). After holding
multifunction display you will then see the button : or 9 for a short while the
following message: scrolling speed increases. Release the
button to stop the quick search. The search
stops automatically at the end of the list.

Example illustration
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 137
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 137

X Press button : or 9 to select the


desired number or name.
X Press button 6 or a.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

Example illustration
Assistance menu

Controls in detail
: Selected name from the phone book
In the DriveAssist menu, you can change
X If the Symbol G appears on the right-hand the settings of your driving systems.
side of the name several entries are
The following functions are available:
present for the same name: Press button
RDisplaying distance graphic, DISTRONIC
6 or a and select the desired entry.
PLUS (Y page 152)
X Press button 6 or a.
The control system dials the selected
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
phone number. (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS only)
(Y page 137)
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network RSwitching ATTENTION ASSIST on or off
provider, the name of the party (if stored in (Y page 138)
your phone book) you are calling will RSwitching Blind Spot Assist on or off
appear in the multifunction display. (Y page 138)
The control system stores the dialed RSwitching Lane Keeping Assist on or off
number in the redial memory. (Y page 138)
or
X Press button ~ or % if you do not Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
want to make the call. Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS
only)
X Press button = or ; to select the
DriveAssist menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
PRE-SAFE Brake function.
X Press button a.

Redialing
The control system stores the most recently
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone
book.
X Press button = or ; to select the
Tel menu.
X Press button 6.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 138
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

138 Control system

X Press button a again if you would like


to change the current status.
After the function has been activated, the
PRE-SAFE® Brake indicator Ä appears
in the lower part of the multifunction
display. When the HOLD function is
switched on, the PRE-SAFE® Brake
indicator Ä will not appear. X Press button a again if you would like
Controls in detail

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, to change the current status.


see (Y page 69). Depending on the previous status, Blind
Spot Assist: will be Enabled or
Switching ATTENTION ASSIST on or off Disabled.
For more information on Blind Spot Assist,
X Press button = or ; to select the
see (Y page 175).
DriveAssist menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Switching Lane Keeping Assist on or off
Attention Asst. function
X Press button = or ; to select the
X Press button a.
DriveAssist menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Lane Keep. Asst. function
X Press button a.

X Press button a again if you would like


to change the current status.
After the function has been activated, the
ATTENTION ASSIST indicator À appears
on the left-hand side of the multifunction X Press button a again if you would like
display. to change the current status.
For more information on ATTENTION ASSIST, After the function has been activated, the
see (Y page 178). Lane Keeping Assist indicator Ã
appears in the lower part of the
Switching Blind Spot Assist on or off multifunction display.
For more information on Lane Keeping
X Press button = or ; to select the
Assistance, see (Y page 177).
DriveAssist menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Blind Spot Asst. function Service menu
X Press button a.
In the Serv. menu the following functions are
available:
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 139
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 139

RVehicle status message memory


(Y page 139)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only) (Y page 233)
RChecking tire inflation pressure
electronically with the Advanced TPMS
(Y page 233)
X Press button : or 9 to select the

Controls in detail
RCalling up the maintenance service messages function.
indicator display (Y page 259)
X Press button a to confirm.
The stored messages will now be displayed
Vehicle status message memory in the order in which they have occurred.
Use the vehicle status message memory For malfunction and warning messages,
function to scan malfunction and warning see “Vehicle status messages in the
messages that may be stored in the system. multifunction display” (Y page 272).
Such messages appear in the multifunction X Use button : or 9 to scroll through
display and are based on conditions or the messages.
system status the vehicle’s system has If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
recorded. to position 0 and then back to position 2, all
G Warning! messages will be deleted from the message
Malfunction and warning messages are only memory.
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are Settings menu
simply a reminder with respect to the Introduction
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s In the Sett. menu there are two functions:
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s The function Factory Setting
operating safety. Have all required (Y page 139), with which you can reset the
maintenance and safety checks performed on settings to the original factory settings and a
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized collection of submenus (Y page 140) with
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the which you can make individual settings for
malfunction and warning messages. your vehicle.

X Press button = or ; to select the Resetting to factory settings


Serv. menu.
You can reset most of the settings of the
If conditions have occurred causing status
submenus to the factory settings.
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction For safety reasons, the function Daytime
display: Running Lamps in the Lights submenu
cannot be reset while driving.
X Press button = or ; to select the
Sett. menu.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 140
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

140 Control system

X Press button : or 9 to select the instructions on making individual settings can


Factory Setting function. be found on the following pages.
X Press button a.
Instrument cluster submenu
The function Reset All Settings? RSelecting speedometer display mode
appears in the multifunction display.
(Y page 141)
RPermanent display (speed display or
outside temperature) (Y page 141)
Controls in detail

Lights submenu
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 141)
RSwitching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on or
X Press button : or 9 to select Yes or off (Y page 142)
No. Select Yes if you want to reset to
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
factory settings.
(Y page 142)
X Press button a to confirm.
The confirmation message appears in the
RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 143)
multifunction display. RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 143)
Submenus in the Settings menu
Vehicle submenu
X Press button = or ; to select the RSwitching automatic central locking on or
Sett. menu. off (Y page 144)
RSwitching the radar sensors on or off
(Y page 144)

Convenience submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 145)
RActivating/deactivating seat belt
X Press button : or 9 to select a adjustment function (Y page 145)
submenu.
Scroll down with button :, scroll up with Instrument cluster submenu
button 9.
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
With the selection marker on the desired the Sett. menu. Use the Instr. Cluster
submenu, use the button a to access the submenu to change the instrument cluster
individual functions within that submenu. display settings.
Once within the submenu, you can use button The following functions are available:
9 to move to the next function or
RSelecting speedometer display mode
button : to move to the previous function
within that submenu. (Y page 141)
RPermanent display (speed display or
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed outside temperature) (Y page 141)
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 141
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 141

Selecting speedometer display mode


X Press = or ; to select the Sett.
menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the X Press button a to change the current

Controls in detail
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: status.
function. Depending on the previous status, the
The current setting is shown. Permanent Display: will be switched
between Outside temperature or
Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/
Speedometer (miles) (Canada).

Lights submenu
Access the Lights submenu via the Sett.
menu. Use the submenu to change the lamp
X Press button a to change the setting. and lighting settings on your vehicle.
Depending on the previous setting the The following functions are available:
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: will be
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
set to miles or km.
or off (USA only) (Y page 141)
The selected display unit is valid for:
RSwitching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on or
ROdometer and trip odometer
off (Y page 142)
RTrip computer RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 143)
RDigital speedometer in the trip menu RSwitching locator lighting function on or off
RCruise control (Y page 142)
RNavigation displays RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 143)
Permanent display
You can use the Permanent Display: Switching daytime running lamp mode on
function to choose to display either the or off (USA only)
outside temperature or the speed in X Press button = or ; to select the
kilometers (USA) or miles (Canada) Sett. menu.
permanently.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
X Press button = or ; to select the
Lights submenu.
Sett. menu. X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
Daytime Running Lamps: function.
X Press button a.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
X Press button : or 9 to select the is shown.
Permanent Display: function.
The current setting is shown.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 142
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

142 Control system

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on


or off
X Press button = or ; to select the
Sett. menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press button a.
X Press button a to change the current
Controls in detail

X Press button : or 9 to select the


status.
Depending on the previous status, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist: function.
Daytime Running Lamps: mode will be The current setting Enabled or Disabled
Enabled or Disabled. is shown.
With Daytime Running Lamps mode
enabled and the exterior lamp switch at
position $ or c, the daytime running
lamps are switched on when the engine is
running.
In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally:
RLow-beam headlamps X Press button a to change the current
RParking
status.
lamps
Depending on the previous status, the
RTail lamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist: function
RLicense plate lamps will be Enabled or Disabled.
RSide marker lamps For more information on the Adaptive
Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 100).
For more information on the daytime running
lamp mode, see (Y page 98). Switching locator lighting on or off
i Make sure the exterior lamp switch is set With the Locator Lighting: function
to M or c when you switch off the activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position c
daytime running lamps while driving at
Rthe exterior lamps will come on during
night.
darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions the SmartKey.
of all submenus to the factory settings while
driving (Y page 139) will not deactivate the The lamps will go out when the driver’s door
daytime running lamp mode. is opened.
The following message appears in the If you do not open the driver’s door after
multifunction display: unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey,
the lamps will go out automatically after
Cannot Be Completely Reset to
approximately 40 seconds.
Factory Settings while Driving..
Rthe exterior lamps will remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 143
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 143

If, after turning off the engine, you do not Setting ambient lighting
open or close a door, the lamps will Use this function to adjust the brightness of
automatically go out after 60 seconds. the ambient lighting.
The following lamps will come on X Press button = or ; to select the
RParking lamps Sett. menu.
RTail lamps X Press button : or 9 to select the

RLicense
Lights submenu.
plate lamps

Controls in detail
X Press button a.
RSide marker lamps
X Press button : or 9 to select the
RFront fog lamps Ambient Light Brightness: function.
X Press button = or ; to select the
Sett. menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Locator Lighting: function.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled X Press button a.
is shown. X Press button : or 9 to set the
Ambient Light Brightness: .
The setting Level 1 represents the darkest
level and setting Level 5 the brightest
level. The ambient light is switched off at
setting Disabled.

Switching interior lighting delayed shut-


off on or off
X Press button a to change the current Use this function to set whether you would
status. like the interior lighting to remain on for
Depending on the previous status, the 10 seconds during darkness after you have
Locator Lighting: function will be removed the SmartKey from the starter
Enabled or Disabled. switch.
You can temporarily deactivate the X Press button = or ; to select the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: Sett. menu.
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the X Press button : or 9 to select the
SmartKey in the starter switch to Lights submenu.
position 0. X Press button a.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to X Press button : or 9 to select the
position 0. Interior Lighting Delay: function.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is The current setting Enabled or Disabled
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as is shown.
you start the engine.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 144
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

144 Control system

X Press button a to change the current


status.
Depending on the previous status, the
Automatic Door Lock: feature will be
Enabled or Disabled.

Switching the radar sensors on or off


X Press button a to change the current If your vehicle is equipped with DISTRONIC
Controls in detail

status. PLUS it is equipped with a radar sensor


Depending on the previous status, the system which you can switch on or off.
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
will be Enabled or Disabled. registered in Canada, you must switch off the
radar sensor system. Canadian law does not
permit the use of the radar sensor system for
Vehicle submenu
vehicles from outside of Canada. When you
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Sett. switch off the radar sensor system, the
menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to switch following functions are deactivated:
the automatic central locking or the radar RBAS PLUS (Y page 63)
sensors on or off.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
Switching automatic central locking on or RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)
off
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 175)
Use this function to switch the automatic
central locking on or off. With the automatic i USA only:
central locking activated, the vehicle is This device has been approved by the FCC
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). sensor is intended for use in an automotive
X Press button = or ; to select the radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
Sett. menu. altering of the device will void any
X Press button : or 9 to select the warranties, and is not permitted by the
Vehicle submenu. FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
X Press button a.
Any unauthorized modification to this
X Press button : or 9 to select the
device could void the user’s authority to
Automatic Door Lock: function. operate the equipment.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
is shown. i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 145
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Control system 145

Removal, tampering, or altering of the G Warning!


device will void any warranties, and is not You must make sure no one can become
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use trapped or injured by the moving steering
in any non-approved way. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
Any unauthorized modification to this activated.
device could void the user’s authority to To stop steering wheel movement, move
operate the equipment. steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one
of the memory position buttons.

Controls in detail
X Press button = or ; to select the
Sett. menu. Do not leave children unattended in the
X Press button : or 9 to select the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
Vehicle submenu.
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
X Press button a.
feature, which could result in an accident
X Press button : or 9 to select the and/or serious personal injury.
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):
function. X Press button = or ; to select the
The current setting Enabled or Disabled Sett. menu.
is shown. X Press button : or 9 to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
is shown.

X Press button a again if you would like


to change the current status.
Depending on the previous status, the
radar sensors will be switched on
(Enabled) or off (Disabled).
i The selected status of the radar sensors
remains stored in memory even if the X Press button a to change the current
engine is turned off and restarted. status.
Depending on the previous status, the
Convenience submenu Easy Entry/Exit: feature will be
Enabled or Disabled.
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Sett. menu. Use the Convenience submenu Activating/deactivating seat belt
to activate the easy-entry/exit feature adjustment function
(Y page 145) or to activate the seat belt
Use this function to set the seat belts to be
adjustment feature (Y page 145).
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or
Activating easy-entry/exit feature front passenger seat belt fastened and the
Use this function to activate and deactivate starter switch in position 2.
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 93). For more information on the seat belt
adjustment function, see (Y page 51).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 146
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

146 Driving systems

X Press button = or ; to select the RRACE START (E 63 AMG)


Sett. menu. RAMG adaptive sport suspension system
X Press button : or 9 to select the (E 63 AMG)
Convenience submenu. The driving safety systems ABS, Adaptive
X Press a. Brake, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBP, ESC and PRE-
X Press button : or 9 to select the SAFE® Brake are described in the “Safety and
Belt Adjustment: function. security” section (Y page 61).
Controls in detail

The current setting Enabled or Disabled


is shown.
Cruise control
The cruise control maintains the speed you
set for your vehicle automatically.
The use of the cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
The currently set speed or last set speed
X Press button a to change the current (“Resume” function) appears in the
status. multifunction display for approximately
Depending on the previous status, the 5 seconds. The corresponding cruise control
Belt Adjustment: function will be speed segments from the selected speed to
Enabled or Disabled. the vehicle maximum speed in the
multifunction display are illuminated.
G Warning!
Driving systems The cruise control is a convenience system
Introduction designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
RCruise control remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
RDISTRONIC PLUS and for safe brake operation.
RHill-start assist system Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
and weather conditions make it advisable to
RHOLD function travel at a constant speed.
RAIRMATIC (E 550 and E 550 4MATIC) RThe use of the cruise control can be
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe
RParktronic system with Parking Guidance driving at a constant speed.
RRear view camera RThe use of the cruise control can be
RNight View Assist Plus dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
RATTENTION ASSIST changes in tire traction can result in wheel
spin and loss of control.
RBlind Spot Assist
RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
RLane Keeping Assist in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 147
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 147

previously set speed and wishes to resume Setting current speed


this particular preset speed. X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
G Warning!
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
The cruise control brakes automatically so
direction of arrow : or press in direction
that the set speed is not exceeded.
of arrow ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator

Controls in detail
pedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
: Setting current or higher speed transmission will downshift automatically.
; Setting current or lower speed
= Canceling the cruise control Canceling cruise control
? Activating the cruise control or resuming X Depress the brake pedal.
to last set speed or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
Activating cruise control direction of arrow =.
You can activate the cruise control at a The last set speed is stored for later use.
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). The last stored speed is deleted from memory
You cannot activate the cruise control when the engine is turned off.
Rwhen you brake The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake engage the parking brake. In this case, the
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park cruise control speed segments in the
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral multifunction display will go out.
position N The cruise control also switches off
Rthe ESC is switched off or has switched off automatically when
due to a malfunction Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
The vehicle speed displayed in the (30 km/h)
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed Rthe ESC is in operation
setting for the cruise control system. Rthe ESC is switched off with the ESC switch

Rthe ESC has switched off due to a


malfunction
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 148
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

148 Driving systems

The cruise control speed segments in the X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
multifunction display goes out and an lever up to the resistance point in direction
acoustic warning will sound. Observe of arrow :.
additional messages in the multifunction X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
display that may appear. control lever down to the resistance point
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not in direction of arrow ;.
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief X Release the cruise control lever.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail

control will resume the last set speed. accelerate or decelerate.

Changing the set speed Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:


10 km/h) increments
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment i The set speed value is increased or
until the vehicle has made the necessary decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
adjustments. increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
resistance point.
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration lever up past the resistance point in
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ direction of arrow :.
or serious injury to you and others. X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise

You can increase or decrease the set speed control lever down past the resistance
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in point in direction of arrow ;.
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. X Release the cruise control lever.
When you use the cruise control lever to The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate, the brake system will brake the accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. has reached the set speed.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:


Setting stored speed (Resume
1 km/h) increments
function)
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) G Warning!
increments each time you lift or press the The set speed stored in memory should only
cruise control lever up or down to the be set again if prevailing road conditions and
resistance point. legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 149
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 149

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in stopping distance, always remains with the
direction of arrow ?. driver.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and
set and stored. traffic conditions into account.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Complex driving situations are not always
pedal. fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This
The last stored speed is deleted from memory could result in wrong or missing distance
when the engine is turned off. warnings.

Controls in detail
G Warning!
DISTRONIC PLUS The DISTRONIC PLUS adaptive cruise control
is not a substitute for active driving
Safety notes
involvement. It does not react to pedestrians
When activated, the DISTRONIC PLUS or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize
adaptive cruise control system increases the or predict the curvature and lane layout or the
driving convenience afforded by the cruise movement of preceding vehicles. The
control while traveling on expressways and DISTRONIC PLUS can only apply a maximum
other major roadways. of 40% of the vehicle’s braking power.
RIf the DISTRONIC PLUS distance sensor The DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
detects a slower moving vehicle directly vehicles possibly driving in front of you, such
ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an
so that you follow that vehicle at your offset formation.
preset following distance. It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
the DISTRONIC PLUS will function in the conditions. Additionally, the driver must
same way as standard cruise control provide the steering, braking and other driving
(Y page 146). inputs necessary to remain in control of the
vehicle.
G Warning! High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
its operational characteristics. We strongly DISTRONIC PLUS system to temporarily
recommend that you review the following cease functioning.
information carefully before operating the
system. G Warning!
The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and
G Warning! traffic conditions into account. Only use the
The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and
system. Its speed adjustment reduction traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
capability is intended to make cruise control at a constant speed.
more effective and usable when traffic speeds
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does G Warning!
it, replace the need for extreme care. Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed, dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most in tire traction can result in wheel spin and
importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe loss of control.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 150
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

150 Driving systems

The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in Switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS:
adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not Rwhen changing from the left to the right
use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet. the left lane
G Warning! Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather ramp
conditions into account. Switch off the Rin complex driving situations, such as in
Controls in detail

DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if: highway construction zones


Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or In these situations, the DISTRONIC PLUS will
ice. The wheels could lose traction while continue to maintain the set speed unless
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle deactivated.
could skid. The DISTRONIC PLUS is designed and
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers intended only to maintain a set speed and
are dirty or visibility is diminished due to keep a set distance from moving objects in
snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance front of it.
control system functionality could be
The DISTRONIC PLUS functions in a speed
impaired.
range of 0 to 120 mph
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic (Canada: 0 to 200 km/h) if a preceding
conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is vehicle is detected. If no preceding vehicle is
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able detected the DISTRONIC PLUS functions in a
to recognize dangerous situations until it is speed range of 20 to 120 mph
too late. This could cause an accident in which (Canada: 30 to 200 km/h).
you and/or others could be injured. Always obey applicable speed limits.
G Warning! Do not use the DISTRONIC PLUS if you are
driving on a road with steep uphill or downhill
The “Resume” function should only be
slopes.
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
this particular preset speed. registered in Canada, you must switch off the
radar sensor system (Y page 144). Canadian
G Warning! law does not permit the use of the radar
Close attention to road and traffic conditions sensor system for vehicles from outside of
is imperative at all times, regardless of Canada. When you switch off the radar sensor
whether or not the DISTRONIC PLUS is system, the following functions are
activated. deactivated:
RDISTRONIC PLUS
Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic RBAS PLUS (Y page 63)
because conditions do not allow safe driving RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
at a constant speed.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 175)
The DISTRONIC PLUS will not react to
stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a i Due to its radar-emitting nature
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled DISTRONIC PLUS may have an appearance
vehicle). The DISTRONIC PLUS will also not similar to a radar detector to law
respond to oncoming vehicles. enforcement officials. You may want to
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 151
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 151

refer to this section of your Operator’s DISTRONIC PLUS displays in


Manual when asked. multifunction display
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or

Controls in detail
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to Example illustration
operate the equipment. If the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; around set speed = are
i Canada only:
illuminated.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to The vehicle speed displayed on the
the following two conditions: speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting on the DISTRONIC PLUS system.
1. This device may not cause interference,
If the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle
and
directly ahead, segments ; in the
2. this device must accept any multifunction display comes on between the
interference received, including speed of the vehicle ahead : and the set
interference that may cause undesired speed =.
operation of the device.
If the DISTRONIC PLUS calculates that there
Removal, tampering, or altering of the is a danger of collision, the distance warning
device will void any warranties, and is not lamp · in the instrument cluster comes
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use on and an intermittent warning sounds.
in any non-approved way.
X Immediately apply the brake to avoid a
Any unauthorized modification to this collision.
device could void the user’s authority to Under no circumstances should the driver
operate the equipment. await the intermittent warning sound
before braking. See the following warning
note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp · goes out
when the necessary distance to the vehicle
ahead is again established.

G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS
system calculates that the distance to the

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 152
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

152 Driving systems

vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current the multifunction display depends on whether
speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will DISTRONIC PLUS is activated or deactivated.
not be capable of slowing the vehicle For activating or deactivating the DISTRONIC
sufficiently to maintain the preset following PLUS system, see “Activating DISTRONIC
distance, which creates a danger of a PLUS” (Y page 153) or “Deactivating
collision. DISTRONIC PLUS” (Y page 156).
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase The menu overview can be found on
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The (Y page 129).
Controls in detail

warning sound is intended as a final caution X Press = or ; to select the


in which you should intercede with your own DriveAssist menu.
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
X Press : or 9 to select the
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede Distance Display function.
with your own braking. This will result in X Press a.
potentially dangerous emergency braking The DISTRONIC PLUS distance graphic
which will not always result in an impact being appears and you will see one of the
avoided. following displays in the multifunction
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. display.

G Warning! DISTRONIC PLUS activated


The DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle
If you switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS, you will
with a maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2
see the set speed in the multifunction display
(4 m/s2). This corresponds to approximately for approximately 5 seconds. When the
40% of the maximum deceleration of your DISTRONIC PLUS is activated the following
vehicle. display appears in the multifunction display.
You must also apply the brakes yourself to
avoid a collision. The DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset
distance or to maintain the set speed.

G Warning!
If you do not receive visual or acoustic
warning signals during a critical traffic
situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not
recognized the collision risk, has been
deactivated or is malfunctioning.
Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS Example illustration
is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers : DISTRONIC PLUS activated
responsibility to apply the brakes in order to ; Your vehicle
control the vehicle and avoid a collision.
= Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle
Displaying the distance graphic ? Preceding vehicle, if detected
In the DriveAssist menu under Distance
Display you see the current settings for
DISTRONIC PLUS. The Information shown in
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 153
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 153

DISTRONIC PLUS deactivated Activating DISTRONIC PLUS


When the DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, G Warning!
you will see the following display in the When the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on,
multifunction display. the vehicle can be braked. You should
therefore switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS if
the vehicle must be towed.

You can activate the DISTRONIC PLUS when

Controls in detail
the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
It is also possible to activate the DISTRONIC
PLUS when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h) and the DISTRONIC PLUS
has detected a preceding vehicle.
If the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
Example illustration two segments ; (Y page 151) around set
: Preceding vehicle, if detected speed = (Y page 151) in the multifunction
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle display are illuminated.
= Preset distance threshold to the The maximum vehicle speed you can set is
preceding vehicle 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h).
? Your vehicle If the DISTRONIC PLUS is not activated after
A PRE-SAFE® Brake activated the DISTRONIC PLUS lever is pulled in
direction of arrow ? (Y page 153), you will
DISTRONIC PLUS lever see the message: DISTRONIC PLUS ---
mph in the multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate the
DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rwithin 2 minutes after driving off, following
an engine start
Rif the vehicle is secured with the parking
brake
Rif the ESC is switched off or has switched
off due to a malfunction
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
: Setting current or higher speed
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
; Setting current or lower speed position N
= Deactivating the DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the hood is open
? Activating the DISTRONIC PLUS or
Rif the driver’s door is open and the driver
resuming to the last set speed
has not fastened his or her seat belt
A Setting following distance
Rifthe front passenger or a rear passenger
door is open
Rif the radar sensors are switched off
(Y page 144)

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 154
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

154 Driving systems

Switching on while driving If the preceding vehicle is stationary, you can


only switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS if your
You can switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS when
vehicle is also at a standstill.
the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h). X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in

Below 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only switch direction of arrow ?.
on the DISTRONIC PLUS if the preceding The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on.
vehicle has been detected and is shown in the X Tap the DISTRONIC PLUS lever up : or
multifunction display. If you no longer see the down ; until desired speed is set.
Controls in detail

preceding vehicle in the multifunction display You can adjust the set speed using the
and if it is no longer detected because it has DISTRONIC PLUS lever and the target
changed lanes, for example, the DISTRONIC distance using the distance setting switch on
PLUS switches off and a signal sounds. the DISTRONIC PLUS lever (Y page 157).
X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in
i If the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched off,
direction of arrow ? to call up the last set
the PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) will warn
speed, or if no speed is stored, to set and of an impending collision if this function has
store the current speed. been activated with the instrument cluster
The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. control system (Y page 137).
or
X Tap the DISTRONIC PLUS lever up : or
Starting off
down ; until desired speed is set. When the preceding vehicle starts off:
The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in
pedal. direction of arrow ?.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to the or
preceding vehicle, observing the set speed
X Briefly step on the accelerator pedal.
as a maximum value.
If you do not completely remove your foot Your vehicle starts off and adapts its speed
from the accelerator pedal, the message to the preceding vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS Override appears in the
multifunction display. The distance to a Driving
slower-driving vehicle will not be set. You will If there is no preceding vehicle, the
drive at the speed you dictate by pressing the DISTRONIC PLUS functions like the cruise
accelerator pedal. control (Y page 146).
When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the
Switching on when approaching a preceding vehicle is driving more slowly, it
stationary vehicle brakes the vehicle in order to keep the
It is helpful to switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS distance specified by you.
display in the multifunction display to see that When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the
a preceding vehicle is detected preceding vehicle is driving faster, it
(Y page 152). You can only switch on the accelerates the vehicle up to the set speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS below a speed of 20 mph
G Warning!
(30 km/h) when a preceding vehicle is
detected. When you step on the brake pedal, you switch
off the DISTRONIC PLUS except when the
vehicle is at a standstill. The DISTRONIC PLUS
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 155
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 155

will no longer brake your vehicle. You are When the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and
always responsible for maintaining a distance the vehicle is at a standstill, the automatic
from other vehicles, observing road speeds transmission shifts into park position P
and braking well in advance. automatically when
Ropening the driver’s door and releasing the

Stopping seat belt


Rturning off the engine
G Warning!

Controls in detail
Ropening the hood
The braking effect of the DISTRONIC PLUS is
canceled and the vehicle can start to roll if Ra system malfunction occurs
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS is switched off using Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient
the DISTRONIC PLUS lever The DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Ryou accelerate
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system or the power Setting the current speed
supply is malfunctioning, e.g. due to battery X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
failure speed.
Rthe electrical components in the engine X Briefly lift the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
compartment or the fuses have been direction of arrow : or depress in
manipulated direction of arrow ; (Y page 153).
Rthe battery is disconnected The current speed is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
G Warning! pedal.
Never get out of the vehicle while the
i If you do not take your foot off of the
DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on!
accelerator pedal and continue to
The DISTRONIC PLUS must never be operated accelerate past the set speed, the following
or switched off by passengers or from outside message will appear in the multifunction
the vehicle. display:
The DISTRONIC PLUS is not a substitute for DISTRONIC PLUS Override
the parking brake. It must not be used to
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
secure the vehicle when parking.
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
When you get out of the vehicle or switch off speed will then be determined only by the
the engine, deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS accelerator pedal position.
and secure the vehicle from rolling away by
engaging the parking brake. Changing the set speed
When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the
G Warning!
preceding vehicle is stopping, the vehicle
brakes until it also stops. Once the vehicle is Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
at a standstill, it remains stationary, without until the vehicle has made the necessary
depressing the brake pedal. adjustments.
Depending on the following distance set Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
using the distance setting switch on the a value that the prevailing road conditions and
DISTRONIC PLUS lever (Y page 157), the legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
vehicle will stop adequate away from the and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
preceding vehicle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 156
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

156 Driving systems

of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
or serious injury to you and others. has reached the set speed.

You can increase or decrease the set speed


Setting stored speed (Resume function)
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. G Warning!
When you use the DISTRONIC PLUS lever to The set speed stored in memory should only
decelerate, the brake system will brake the be set again if prevailing road conditions and
Controls in detail

vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking legal speed limits permit. Possible
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
1 km/h) increments
to you and others.
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) X Briefly pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
increments each time you lift or press the direction of arrow ? (Y page 153).
DISTRONIC PLUS lever up or down to the The DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and
resistance point. resumes to the last set speed or, if no
speed is stored, it will set and store the
X Increasing: Briefly lift the DISTRONIC current speed.
PLUS lever up to the resistance point in
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
direction of arrow :.
pedal.
X Decreasing: Briefly press the DISTRONIC
PLUS lever down to the resistance point in
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
direction of arrow ;.
X Release the DISTRONIC PLUS lever. X Depress the brake pedal (only possible if
The new speed is set and the vehicle will the vehicle is in motion).
accelerate or decelerate. or
X Briefly push the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: direction of arrow = (Y page 153).
10 km/h) increments
The last set speed is stored for later use.
i The set speed value is increased or The last stored speed is deleted from memory
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) when the engine is turned off.
increments each time you lift or press the The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off
DISTRONIC PLUS lever up or down past the automatically when
resistance point.
Rthe vehicle is secured with the parking
X Increasing: Briefly lift the DISTRONIC brake
PLUS lever up past the resistance point in Rthe vehicle speed falls below 15 mph
direction of arrow :. (25 km/h) and no preceding vehicle is
X Decreasing: Briefly press the DISTRONIC detected
PLUS lever down past the resistance point Rthe ESC is in operation, or switched off with
in direction of arrow ;.
the ESC switch (Y page 66), or the ESC has
X Release the DISTRONIC PLUS lever. switched off due to a malfunction
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 157
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 157

Ryou shift the automatic transmission into style and applicable laws and driving
park position P, reverse gear R, or neutral recommendations for safe following distance.
position N while driving
Rthe radar sensors are switched off
Ryou pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
direction of arrow ? (Y page 153) for
driving off and the passenger door is open

Controls in detail
The segments indicating the set speed in the
multifunction display go out, an acoustic
signal sounds, and the message DISTRONIC
PLUS Off appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 5 seconds.
G Warning!
X Increasing distance: Turn distance
The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;.
releases the brakes when the vehicle
Increasing the distance setting tells the
decelerates below the minimum speed of
DISTRONIC PLUS to maintain a greater
20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the system
following distance to the preceding vehicle.
unless the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle
directly ahead of you. At that time the driver X Decreasing distance: Turn distance
must apply the brakes in order to reduce setting switch : in direction of arrow =.
vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Decreasing the distance setting tells the
DISTRONIC PLUS to maintain a shorter
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
following distance to the preceding vehicle.
deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
DISTRONIC PLUS will resume the last set Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
speed. This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
Setting the following distance in required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
DISTRONIC PLUS to brake in such situations. Braking will
You can set the specified following distance deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS system.
for the DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time G Warning!
setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the
this time setting and the current speed of speed selected by the driver unless a moving
your vehicle, the DISTRONIC PLUS calculates obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
and sets the required following distance to same travel direction is detected (e.g.
the preceding vehicle. following another vehicle ahead of you at your
The set distance will be shown in the set distance).
multifunction display. This means that:
G Warning! RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to you have changed lanes.
select the appropriate setting given road RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 158
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

158 Driving systems

PLUS could lose sight of the preceding Turns and bends


vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the
distance between your vehicle and those
directly ahead of it. It may not register
stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
Controls in detail

Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam


Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all In turns or bends, the DISTRONIC PLUS may
traffic and intercede as required by means of not detect a preceding vehicle, or it may
steering or braking the vehicle. detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
G Warning!
The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in Offset driving
snowy or icy road conditions.

The most likely cause for a malfunctioning


system is a dirty sensor (located in the hood
grille and in the bumper), especially at times
of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, the DISTRONIC PLUS will
switch off, and the message DISTRONIC
PLUS Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual appears in the
multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the sensors, see A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from
(Y page 263). your direct line of travel may not be detected
i If the message DISTRONIC PLUS by the DISTRONIC PLUS. There will be
Currently Unavailable See insufficient distance to the preceding vehicle.
Operator's Manual disappears during Lane changing
driving and the last speed stored flashes for
approximately 5 seconds, the dirt (e.g.
slush) has dissolved; the DISTRONIC PLUS
is available again.
Another cause might be that the radar
sensors have been manually switched off in
the instrument cluster control system. Please
verify that the radar sensors are switched on
(Y page 144).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 159
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 159

The DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected Cross-traffic


the vehicle changing lanes. There will be
insufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle.
Narrow vehicles

Controls in detail
The DISTRONIC PLUS may inadvertently
detect crossing vehicles. If you switch on the
DISTRONIC PLUS, for example, at a traffic
light with cross traffic, the vehicle may
suddenly start to drive off.
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by the DISTRONIC RACE START (E 63 AMG)
PLUS. There will be insufficient distance to
the preceding vehicles. RACE START enables optimum acceleration
from a standing start with suitable high-grip
Obstacles and stationary vehicles road surface conditions.
G Warning!
RACE START is only available when the ESC
SPORT mode is switched on. ESC SPORT
stabilizes the vehicle only to a limited extent
if the vehicle starts to skid or when a wheel is
spinning.
RACE START should be used only on closed
tracks. Always adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

The DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for Conditions for activation
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for RACE START can be activated when
example, the vehicle detected in front of you
Rthe doors are closed
changes lanes to bypass an obstacle or
stationary vehicle in front of it, the Rthe engine is running and has reached its
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for the operating temperature of approximately
obstacle or stationary vehicle. 80†. This is the case when the engine oil
temperature indicator in the multifunction
display stops flashing.
RESC SPORT is switched on (Y page 67)
Rthe multifunction steering wheel is in the
straight-ahead position

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 160
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

160 Driving systems

Rthe vehicle is standing still and the brake The message RACE START Canceled
pedal is depressed (left foot) appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive X Take your foot off the brake pedal while
position D keeping the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum
Activating RACE START acceleration.
The message RACE START Active appears
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail

and keep it depressed.


RACE START deactivates at a vehicle speed
X Turn the program mode selector dial
of approximately 30 mph
clockwise (Y page 121) until the RS lamp (Canada: 50 km/h). The automatic
on the dial comes on. transmission switches to program mode S+.
The message RACE START Confirm: ESC SPORT remains switched on.
Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN
appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is canceled immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal while RACE
i When the activation conditions are not START is active or when the activation
fulfilled anymore, RACE START is canceled. conditions are not fulfilled anymore. The
The message RACE START Canceled message RACE START Not Possible See
appears in the multifunction display. Operator’s Manual appears in the
X
multifunction display.
To cancel: Pull left steering wheel gearshift
control (Y page 122). i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a
or short period of time, it is only available
X To confirm: Pull right steering wheel again after having driven the vehicle a
gearshift control (Y page 122). certain distance.
The message RACE START Available
Depress gas pedal. appears in the
multifunction display. Hill-start assist system
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
i If you do not depress the accelerator
maintains the pressure in the brake system
pedal within 2 seconds, RACE START is for approximately 1 second after you have
canceled. The message RACE START Not released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
Possible See Operator’s Manual start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
appears in the multifunction display. immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
X Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed rises to approximately G Warning!
4000 rpm. The hill-start assist system is not designed to
function as a parking brake. It does not
The message RACE START Release
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked
brake to start appears in the
on an incline.
multifunction display.
Always engage the parking brake in addition
i If you do not release the brake pedal to shifting the automatic transmission into
within 7 seconds, RACE START is canceled. park position P.

X Depress the brake pedal.


X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 161
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 161

X Release the brake pedal. tests are necessary, contact an authorized


X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
The hill-start assist system is inactive otherwise seriously damage the brake
system and/or the transfer case which is
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
grades Warranty.
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
position N i In winter operation, the maximum

Controls in detail
effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
Rwith the parking brake engaged achieved with winter tires (Y page 252) or
Rif the ESC has switched off due to a snow chains as required.
malfunction

HOLD function
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) The HOLD function can assist you
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC), Rwhen driving off, especially on steep slopes
both axles are powered at all times when the
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC
improves traction in conjunction with the ESC Rwhen waiting in traffic
(Y page 65) and the Electronic Traction The vehicle is kept stationary without the
System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 65). driver having to depress the brake pedal.
G Warning! Upon depressing the accelerator pedal, the
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
traction: function is deactivated.
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
Activation conditions
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator You can activate the HOLD function when
pedal. Rthe vehicle is stationary
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the Rthe engine is running
prevailing road conditions. Ryour seat belt is fastened or the driver’s
Failure to observe these guidelines could door is closed
cause the vehicle to skid. Rthe parking brake is released
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
Rthe hood is closed
resulting from excessive speed.
Rthe automatic transmission is in neutral
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so position N, drive position D, or reverse gear
could damage the transfer case, which is R
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the (Y page 156)
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

! Only conduct operational or performance


tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 162
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

162 Driving systems

Activating HOLD G Warning!


X Make sure the activation conditions are The braking effect of the HOLD function is
met. canceled and the vehicle can start to roll if
X Depress the brake pedal. Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by
X Continue to depress the brake pedal with depressing the accelerator pedal or the
increased pedal pressure until the message brake pedal
HOLD appears in the multifunction display. Rthe HOLD function or the power supply is
Controls in detail

The HOLD function is activated. You can malfunctioning, e.g. due to battery failure
now release the brake pedal.
Rthe electrical components in the engine
compartment or the fuses have been
manipulated
Rthe battery is disconnected

G Warning!
Never get out of the vehicle while the HOLD
Example illustration, HOLD function activated function is activated!
The HOLD function must never be operated
i If the HOLD function is not activated when or deactivated by passengers or from outside
depressing the brake pedal, wait briefly and the vehicle.
repeat the above steps. The HOLD function does not replace the
G Warning! parking brake. It must not be used to secure
the vehicle when parking.
The vehicle’s brakes are applied when the
HOLD function is activated. Therefore, Deactivate the HOLD function when leaving
deactivate the HOLD function, for example, or parking the vehicle. Use the parking brake
when the vehicle is pulled through an to secure the vehicle.
automatic car wash or being towed. When the HOLD function is activated, the
automatic transmission shifts into park
Deactivating HOLD position P automatically when
Ropening the driver’s door and releasing the
The HOLD function is switched off when
seat belt
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal with the
Rturning off the engine
automatic transmission in drive position D
or reverse gear R Ropening the hood
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into Ra system malfunction occurs
park position P Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient
Ryou depress the brake pedal fully again The HOLD function is deactivated.
until the message HOLD in the multifunction
display disappears
Ryou activate the DISTRONIC PLUS AIRMATIC (E 550 and E 550 4MATIC)
Introduction
The AIRMATIC lets you select the chassis and
suspension setup. The chassis and
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 163
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 163

suspension setup adjusts the damping tuning is selected. The message


behavior and the ride height for your vehicle. AIRMATIC SPORT appears in the
The AIRMATIC consists of two components. multifunction display.
The electronically controlled damping system
(Y page 163) and the vehicle level control Comfort damping adjustment
(Y page 163). Vehicle handling in Comfort driving mode is
softer. Select this mode when you prefer a
Damping system more comfortable driving style on straight

Controls in detail
freeways.
The damping system is controlled
X Press damping system switch :.
electronically and operates continuously. It
Indicator lamp = comes on. The Comfort
adjusts the damping characteristics to the
current operating and driving conditions. The driving mode is selected. The message
damping is adjusted individually for each AIRMATIC COMFORT appears in the
wheel. Driving safety and tire comfort are multifunction display.
increased.
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent Vehicle level control
on Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
Ryour driving style height.
Rroad surface conditions The all-around vehicle level control provides
best possible suspension and constant
Ryour personal settings ground clearance. The vehicle lowers at high
The selected setting remains stored in speed automatically in order to increase
memory even if the SmartKey is removed driving safety and to reduce fuel
from the starter switch. consumption.
The following vehicle levels are available:
Rnormal

Rraised; the vehicle is raised by


approximately 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to
normal level
Rlowered; the vehicle is lowered by
approximately 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to
normal level
You can choose between normal or raised
level.
X Start the engine. The vehicle chassis ride height is reduced
automatically
Sporty damping adjustment
Rat a speed exceeding approximately
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport driving
mode provides enhanced road contact. 93 mph (150 km/h)
Select this mode for example, on winding Rwith the Sport driving mode (Y page 163)
highways. set
X Press damping system switch :. With decreasing speed, the ride height is
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The Sport again raised to the normal level.
driving mode with a firmer suspension

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 164
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

164 Driving systems

i These height adjustments are so small When the vehicle is in raised level, pressing
that you may not notice any change. vehicle level control switch : will return
the vehicle to normal level.
Adjusting vehicle level manually
The vehicle is lowered to the normal level
G Warning! automatically when
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and Rthe vehicle speed is above 75 mph
feet away from wheel housing area, and stay (120 km/h)
away from under the vehicle when lowering
Controls in detail

Rthe vehicle speed stays between 50 mph


the vehicle chassis.
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
Select the normal level for driving on normal approximately 3 minutes.
roads. Select the raised level for driving on Indicator lamp ; in
rough roads or with snow chains. Select the vehicle level control switch : goes out.
raised level only when required by current
driving conditions. Otherwise, the handling If you do not drive in this speed range, the
may be impaired and the fuel consumption selected vehicle level setting remains stored
may increase. in memory even if the SmartKey is removed
The selected vehicle level setting remains from the starter switch.
stored in memory even if the SmartKey is Selecting normal level
removed from the starter switch.
X Start the engine.
When indicator lamp ; is on:
X Briefly press vehicle level control
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle
adjusts from raised level to normal level.

AMG adaptive sport suspension


system (E 63 AMG)

Selecting raised level Rear-axle level control


X Start the engine. The rear-axle level control adjusts the vehicle
When indicator lamp ; is off: level for the rear axle. The rear-axle level
control is beneficial because it keeps the
X Briefly press vehicle level control vehicle level at the rear axle constant,
switch :. independent of the load. Your vehicle adjusts
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The vehicle its ride height automatically to increase
adjusts from normal level to raised level. vehicle safety and to reduce fuel
The message: Vehicle Rising appears in consumption.
the multifunction display when adjusting
from normal level to raised level. The Damping system
message disappears when the vehicle is
raised. Indicator lamp ; is then lit. The damping system is controlled
electronically and operates continuously. It
adjusts the damping characteristics to the
current operating and driving conditions. The
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 165
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 165

damping is adjusted individually for each The message AMG Suspension System
wheel. Driving safety and tire comfort are SPORT+ appears in the multifunction
increased. display.
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
on: Comfort damping adjustment
Ryour
Vehicle handling in Comfort driving mode is
driving style
softer. Select this mode when you prefer a
Rroad surface conditions more comfortable driving style on straight

Controls in detail
Ryour personal settings (Comfort, Sport, or freeways.
Sport+) X Press damping system switch : until

When you start the engine, the Comfort indicator lamps = and ? are off.
driving mode is selected automatically. The Comfort driving mode is selected.
The message AMG Suspension System
COMFORT appears in the multifunction
display.

Storing and calling up settings


When you have selected the driving mode
(Comfort, Sport, or Sport+) and the program
mode (Y page 121), you can store, call up,
and display the settings using AMG
button ; when the engine is running.
Pressing AMG button ; when the ignition is
X Start the engine. switched on, displays the current settings
only.
Sporty damping adjustment X Storing: Press and hold AMG button ;
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport driving until an acoustic signal sounds.
mode provides enhanced road contact. The current settings are stored and
Select this mode for example, on winding appears in the multifunction display.
highways. X Calling up and displaying: Press AMG
X Press damping system switch :. button ;.
Indicator lamp ? comes on. The Sport The stored driving mode and program
driving mode with a firmer suspension mode are in effect and the settings appear
tuning is selected. in the multifunction display.
The message AMG Suspension System X Displaying: Tap AMG button ;.
SPORT appears in the multifunction display. The stored and/or currently active settings
appear in the multifunction display.
Sport+ damping adjustment
The very firm chassis and suspension setup
in Sport+ driving mode provides best possible
Parktronic system
road contact. Only select this setting for
driving on closed circuits. The Parktronic system with Parking Guidance
X Press damping system switch : until is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic
indicator lamps = and ? are on. sensors designed to assist the driver during
The Sport+ driving mode is selected. parking maneuvers. The Parktronic system

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 166
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

166 Driving systems

indicates the relative distance between the parking and other critical maneuvers always
vehicle and an obstacle visually and audibly. remains with the driver.
The Parktronic system is activated
automatically when G Warning!
Ryou switch on the ignition Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
and
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
Ryou release the parking brake injured.
Controls in detail

and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive ! Special attention must be paid to objects
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
position N (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds objects may not be detected by the system
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At and can damage the vehicle.
lower speeds, the Parktronic system
During parking maneuvers, pay special
activates again.
attention to objects located above or below
The Parktronic system also deactivates when the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
you shift the automatic transmission into painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
park position P or engage the parking brake. Parktronic system will not detect such
The Parktronic system monitors the objects at close range and damage to your
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors vehicle or the object may result.
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper. ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.

Range of the sensors

Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper


To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 263).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 167
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 167

Controls in detail
Front area warning indicators
Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)

Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Rear area warning indicators
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
in this range, all the distance warning Parktronic system is ready to measure when
segments illuminate and you hear a warning the yellow readiness indicators = are
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the illuminated.
minimum distance, the actual distance may The current transmission position determines
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic which warning indicator will be activated.
system.
Current Warning indicator
Warning indicators transmission
position
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle. D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one or


more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 168
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

168 Driving systems

RFront area: An intermittent acoustic Parktronic system malfunction


warning will sound as the first red distance
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
segment illuminates and a constant
system, if only the red distance segments
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
2 seconds will sound for the second red
The Parktronic system will switch off
distance segment. The signal is canceled
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
when the automatic transmission is shifted
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
into park position P or the parking brake is
Controls in detail

engaged. X Have the Parktronic system checked at an


RRear
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
area: An intermittent acoustic
as possible.
warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant If only the red distance segments illuminate
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of and no acoustic warning sounds, the
2 seconds will sound for the second red Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
distance segment. The signal is canceled ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
when the automatic transmission is shifted interference from other radio or ultrasonic
into drive position D, or park position P, or signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
the parking brake is engaged. jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
Switching the Parktronic system on/ comes on.
off
X Switch off the ignition.
The Parktronic system switches on X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
automatically when the ignition is switched (Y page 263).
on.
X Switch on the ignition.
or
X Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Parking Guidance
The Parking Guidance is part of the Parktronic
system. With the Parktronic system switched
on (Y page 168), the Parking Guidance is also
X Switching off: Press Parktronic available.
switch :. The Parking Guidance is an electronic parking
Indicator lamp ; comes on. aid equipped with ultrasonic sensors. The
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch : ultrasonic sensors scan the area on both
again. sides of vehicle. When a suitable parking
space is found, it is indicated by a parking
i When you switch the Parktronic system space symbol in the multifunction display.
on or off the Parking Guidance You will receive steering instructions for
(Y page 168) is also switched on or off. parking in that space.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 169
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 169

G Warning! objects may not be detected by the system


The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may and can damage the vehicle.
display parking spaces that are not suitable Use the Parking Guidance for parking spaces
for parking such as that are
Rno-parking zones Rparallel to the direction of travel
Rparking space with unsuitable road/ground Rlocated on straight streets, i.e. not in
surface curves

Controls in detail
Rdriveways Ron the same level as the street, i.e. not on
Rentrances/exits sidewalks, for example.
The Parking Guidance scans for and measures Parking instructions:
potential parking spaces when driving past. ROn narrow streets, drive by the parking
Subsequent changes to the parking space are space as close as possible.
not taken into account. This may be the case RParking spaces that are dirty, overgrown or
if the position of the vehicle parked in front or located in front of trailers may not be
behind the space changes or obstacles in the detected correctly.
parking space are moved.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may cause imprecise
The Parking Guidance does not relieve you of
measurement of the parking space.
the responsibility to pay attention. If you only
rely on the Parking Guidance, you may cause RAlso observe the Parktronic system
an accident and injure yourself and others. warning indicator (Y page 167) while the
You are always responsible for safety and Parking Guidance is active.
must continue to pay attention to your RYou may not use the Parking Guidance
immediate surroundings when parking and when transporting cargo that protrudes the
maneuvering. vehicle.
RDo not use the Parking Guidance when
G Warning!
driving with snow chains or when a spare
The system cannot detect objects located
wheel is mounted.
above the area that the sensors scan. These
objects, e.g. protruding load, overhang, or RHow well your vehicle will be parked after
truck tail lifts, will be ignored when computing completion of the Parking Guidance
the parking procedure. The Parking Guidance depends on the position and shape of the
might therefore provide untimely steering vehicles parked in front of and behind the
instructions. This could cause a collision. parking space as well as the conditions of
Thus, do not use the Parking Guidance in such the immediate surroundings. In certain
situations. cases, the Parking Guidance may guide you
too far into the parking space or not far
G Warning! enough. If this is the case, cancel the
Make sure no persons or animals are in the parking procedure with the Parking
area in which you are maneuvering. You could Guidance and correct the vehicle position
otherwise injure them. yourself.

! Special attention must be paid to objects Detecting a parking space


with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
The Parking Guidance is active when driving
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
forward. The system operates at a vehicle
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 170
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

170 Driving systems

speed of up to 22 mph (35 km/h). It scans responsible for safety and must continue to
automatically for and measures potential pay attention to your immediate surroundings
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,
you could endanger yourself and others.

X Bring the vehicle to a standstill as long as


the desired parking space is displayed by
the parking space symbol in the
Controls in detail

multifunction display.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
Example illustration reverse gear R.
: Detected parking space on the left The message Check Vehicle
; Parking space symbol Surroundings Press ’OK’ to Confirm
= Detected parking space on the right appears in the multifunction display.
X Press a on the multifunction steering
At a vehicle speed of below 19 mph wheel to confirm.
(30 km/h), you see parking space The display in the multifunction display
symbol ; as a system display in the changes to the Parking Guidance.
multifunction display.
The message Please Drive Backward
When a parking space has been detected, an appears in the multifunction display,
additional arrow to the right = or to the depending on the distance to the parking
left : appears. space.
In order to be detected by the Parking
Guidance, a parking space must be
Rparallel to the direction of travel
Rat least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide
Rat least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your
vehicle is
A parking space is shown in the multifunction Example illustration
display when driving by until you have
X If applicable, drive straight backward a
reached a distance of 50 ft (15 m) from the
space. The Parking Guidance only shows little.
parking spaces on the passenger side of the An arrow pointing toward you indicates the
vehicle unless you activate the driver’s side backward direction.
(left) turn signal. If you would like to park on X Drive straight backward until an acoustic

the driver’s side, the left turn signal must signal sounds. Stop the vehicle. You have
remain on until the reverse gear is engaged. reached the stop position. The arrow is
completely white.
Parking The message Please Steer Wheel to
the Right or Please Steer Wheel to
G Warning! the Left appears in the multifunction
The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may display.
not detect all obstacles. The Parking
Guidance does not relieve you of the
responsibility to pay attention. You are always
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 171
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 171

X If necessary, adjust the end position by


maneuvering as needed.
X Observe the warning indicators of the
Parktronic system (Y page 167).

Canceling the Parking Guidance


Example illustration X Press the Parktronic switch (Y page 168).

Controls in detail
X
The Parking Guidance is canceled
With the vehicle still standing, turn the
immediately and the Parktronic system is
steering wheel in the indicated direction
deactivated.
until the arrow is completely white and an
acoustic signal sounds. The Parking Guidance is canceled
X Pulling into parking space: Keep the
automatically if guidance into the parking
space is no longer possible or if an error
steering wheel in position and drive
occurs.
backward carefully.
X Stop as soon as an acoustic signal sounds.
The parking space symbol disappears and the
message Parking Guidance Canceled
The vehicle has reached the
appears in the multifunction display.
countersteering point.
The message Please Steer Wheel to
the Right or Please Steer Wheel to Rear view camera
the Left appears in the multifunction
display. The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
X Countersteering: With the vehicle still The area behind the vehicle appears in the
standing, turn the steering wheel in the COMAND system display as a mirror image,
indicated direction until the arrow is like in the rear view mirror.
completely white and an acoustic signal G Warning!
sounds.
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
X Pulling into parking space: Keep the
near the area in which you are parking/
steering wheel in position and drive maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
backward carefully. injured.
X Stop as soon as an acoustic signal sounds.
Stop the vehicle immediately when the G Warning!
Parktronic systems issues an audible, The rear view camera is only an aid and may
continuous warning signal. display obstacles
The message Parking Guidance Rfrom a distorted perspective
Finished appears in the multifunction
Rinaccurately
display and an acoustic signal sounds. You
may be prompted to steer into a different Rmay not display obstacles at all
direction and then shift the automatic
transmission to a another position. The
displays in the multifunction display will
then guide you into the final park position.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 172
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

172 Driving systems

The rear view camera does not relieve you of


the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
camera may not show objects which are
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rabove the trunk handle
Controls in detail

You are responsible for safety at all times and


must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
maneuvering. This includes the area behind, snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
you could endanger yourself and/or others. to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens”
G Warning!
(Y page 263).
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Switching on or off
Rthe trunk lid is open
X Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
X Make sure the rear view camera is switched
Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering on in the COMAND system. For more
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark information refer to separate COMAND
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white operating instructions.
light X Switch on the COMAND system.
Rthe immediate surroundings are X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
illuminated with fluorescent light (the gear R.
COMAND system display can flicker) The area behind the vehicle appears in the
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
COMAND system display.
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from i The image from the rear view camera will
the cold (lens condensation) no longer be displayed if you select another
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered function on the COMAND system while
Rthe
reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
rear of your vehicle is damaged
image again, disengage and reengage
In this case, have the position and setting reverse gear R.
of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz X Switching off: Shift the automatic
recommends that you contact a Mercedes- transmission into park position P, neutral
Benz Center for this purpose. position N, or drive position D.
Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property Night View Assist Plus
including your vehicle while parking/ The Night View Assist Plus illuminates the
maneuvering. road with infrared light in addition to the
normal headlamps.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 173
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 173

A camera at the top of the windshield


measures the infrared light and shows a
black-and-white image in the COMAND
system display. The image in the COMAND
system display corresponds to a road lit up
by high-beam headlamps.
G Warning!

Controls in detail
The Night View Assist Plus is only an aid to
support you while driving and cannot
substitute your careful attention. Do not rely
on the display of the Night View Assist Plus; The Night View Assist Plus monitors the area
instead, continue to look through the in front of your vehicle via camera :.
windshield. You are always responsible for
safety and must drive in accordance with Switching on or off
traffic conditions. Otherwise, you could
endanger yourself and others. You can only switch on the Night View Assist
The system may be impaired or unavailable Plus if
when Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is set to
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, position 2
or heavy spray Rit is dark
Rthe camera area of the windshield is dirty, Rthe exterior lamp switch is set to c or
fogged up or covered by a sticker for L
example
Rthe automatic transmission is not in
Rdriving through curves or on inclines or reverse gear R
declines

G Warning!
The Night View Assist Plus cannot record
objects immediately in front of or next to the
vehicle. When maneuvering, continue to look
through the windshield. Make sure no
persons or animals are in the area in which
you are maneuvering. You could otherwise
injure them.

The Night View Assist Plus image in the


COMAND system display is not impaired by X Switch on the COMAND system.
the headlamps of approaching vehicles. X Press button :.
As a result, you can better follow the course The Night View Assist Plus image appears
of the road and detect obstacles earlier on. in the COMAND system display.
i Infrared light is invisible to the human eye For information on how to adjust the
and thus does not blind. The Night View brightness of the COMAND system display,
Assist Plus can remain switched on refer to the separate COMAND system
permanently even with oncoming traffic operating instructions.
present.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 174
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

174 Driving systems

i The infrared headlamps only come on G Warning!


above a speed of approximately 6 mph The pedestrian detection may be impaired or
(10 km/h). Therefore, when you are at a unavailable when
standstill, you do not have a complete view
Rpedestrians are obstructed fully or in part
and cannot check the function of the Night
View Assist Plus. by other objects such as parking vehicles
Rthe silhouette in the Night View Assist Plus
Pedestrian detection image is displayed incomplete or
Controls in detail

interrupted, e.g. by significant light


The Night View Assist Plus detects reflection
pedestrians by means of specific
Ra pedestrian’s silhouette is not rich enough
characteristics, e.g. a human silhouette.
Pedestrian detection is activated when in contrast compared to the background
Rpedestrians are not in erected position but,
Rthe Night View Assist Plus is switched on
for example, sit, crouch down, or lie
Rthe vehicle speed is above approximately
6 mph (10 km/h)
i Animals cannot be detected.
Rdriving in darkness, e.g. on highways
without road lighting Dirty or fogged-up windshield
The Night View Assist Plus image is
diminished when the windshield in front of the
camera is
Rdirty

Rfogged up on the outside


Rfogged up on the inside

G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
: Night View Assist Plus image
attention to the road must always be his/her
; Detected pedestrian primary focus when driving. For your safety
= Frame and the safety of others, stop before trying to
? Symbol for active pedestrian detection remove window fogging or cleaning the
windshield in front of the Night View Assist
When pedestrian detection is active,
Plus camera.
symbol ? appears in the Night View Assist
Plus image. Once a pedestrian is detected, Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
that pedestrian is highlighted by frame =. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
When you have been made aware of a
(approximately 14 m) every second.
pedestrian, assess the situation by looking
through the windshield. The actual distance X Removing condensation: Check settings
between your vehicle and objects or
of the climate control and change them, if
pedestrians cannot be assessed properly via
necessary (Y page 181).
a screen display.
X Swing the camera cover downward
Other objects apart from pedestrians may
(Y page 263).
also be highlighted.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 175
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 175

X Cleaning inside of windshield: Use a soft, law does not permit the use of the radar
non-scratching cloth (Y page 263). sensor system for vehicles from outside of
Canada. When you switch off the radar sensor
system, the following functions are
Blind Spot Assist deactivated:
RBlind Spot Assist
The Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to
monitor the area on both sides of your RBAS PLUS (Y page 63)
vehicle. It will assist you when you change

Controls in detail
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
lanes driving at speeds of above 20 mph RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)
(30 km/h). A red warning lamp will come on
in the exterior rear view mirror as soon as i USA only:
another vehicle is detected. If you then This device has been approved by the FCC
activate the corresponding turn signals to as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
change lanes, the red warning lamp flashes sensor is intended for use in an automotive
and warning sounds (collision warning). The radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
Blind Spot Assist operates using sensors in altering of the device will void any
the rear bumper. warranties, and is not permitted by the
G Warning! FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
The Blind Spot Assist is only a driving aid and any non-approved way.
may not detect all vehicles. Any unauthorized modification to this
The Blind Spot Assist may not be able to device could void the user’s authority to
detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles operate the equipment.
or bicycles, or it may not detect them until it
i Canada only:
is too late.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
The monitoring function may be impaired if Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
your sensors are dirty, subject to heavy spray, the following two conditions:
or if visibility is poor due to e.g. snow, rain, or
fog. This can result in vehicles not being 1. This device may not cause interference,
detected or being detected too late. and
The Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road, 2. this device must accept any
traffic and weather conditions. interference received, including
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to interference that may cause undesired
be attentive to road, weather and traffic operation of the device.
conditions and to provide the steering, Removal, tampering, or altering of the
braking and other driving inputs necessary to device will void any warranties, and is not
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
could result in recognizing dangers too late, in any non-approved way.
possibly resulting in an accident and serious Any unauthorized modification to this
injury to yourself and others. device could void the user’s authority to
In order for the Blind Spot Assist to function, operate the equipment.
the radar sensors must be switched on and
operational. Sensor monitoring range
When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not The Blind Spot Assist is able to monitor a
registered in Canada, you must switch off the range up to 10 ft (3 m) to the rear and both
radar sensor system (Y page 144). Canadian sides of the vehicle.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 176
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

176 Driving systems

of the bumper around the sensors is free of


dirt, ice and snow. The radar sensors must not
be obstructed, for example, by bicycle
carriers or overhanging luggage.
! In the event of a significant impact or
damage affecting the bumpers, have the
radar sensors checked by a qualified
specialist workshop such as a Mercedes-
Controls in detail

Benz Center. Failure to do this can result in


Blind Spot Assist not functioning correctly.

Indicator and warning lamps

G Warning!
The Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas
in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
Vehicles approaching and passing at speeds
that exceed the speed of your vehicle
significantly will not be detected. There will be
no warning display and no audible warning.
When driving in a very wide lane, the sensors Exterior rear view mirror, driver’s side
may not be able to cover the entire width of
the neighboring lane. Vehicles driving on the X Make sure that the radar sensors
outside of the neighboring lane may not be (Y page 144) and Blind Spot Assist
detected. (Y page 138) are switched on.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to X Switch on the ignition.

be attentive to road, weather and traffic Red warning lamps : in the exterior rear
conditions and to provide the steering, view mirrors come on.
braking and other driving inputs necessary to X Start the engine.
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so Yellow indicator lamps : in the exterior
could result in recognizing dangers too late, rear view mirrors come on up to a speed of
possibly resulting in an accident and serious 20 mph (30 km/h).
injury to yourself and others. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), yellow
When driving in a very narrow lane, the indicator lamps : go out and the Blind Spot
sensors may detect and display vehicles in the Assist is active. If the Blind Spot Assist
second lane over. This will be the case if there detects a vehicle in its range, red warning
are vehicles driving on the inside edge of their lamp : on the corresponding side of the
lane. vehicle comes on. The warning is issued each
The system may issue causeless warnings in time a vehicle enters the area monitored by
the area of guardrails or similar structural the Blind Spot Assist from behind or from the
boundaries. side. When you pass another vehicle, the
warning is issued only when the speed
The two Blind Spot Assist sensors are built differential is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
into the rear bumper. Make sure that the area
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 177
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 177

When you shift the automatic transmission in Lane Keeping Assist


reverse gear R, yellow indicator lamps : in
The Lane Keeping Assist supports you at a
the exterior rear view mirrors goes out after
vehicle speed of above 40 mph when you
approximately 3 seconds. The Blind Spot
Assist is then not active. have set the display unit to miles in the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: menu in
The brightness of indicator lamps/warning the control system (Y page 141). When you
lamps : is controlled automatically have set the display unit to km, the system
depending on the brightness of the ambient supports you at a vehicle speed of above

Controls in detail
light. 60 km/h. When the Lane Keeping Assist
G Warning! detects lane markings, the system is
The Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds designed to alert you in case you leave your
below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The lane unintentionally. A warning is usually
yellow indicator lamps in the exterior rear issued when a front wheel is on the lane
view mirrors are illuminated. You will not be marking. An interval vibration in the steering
alerted to the presence of vehicles in the wheel that lasts for up to 1.5 seconds will
monitored area at these speeds. then alert you.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, weather and traffic
conditions and to provide the steering,
braking and other driving inputs necessary to
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in recognizing dangers too late,
possibly resulting in an accident and serious
injury to yourself and others.

Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the Blind Spot Assist The Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
range and you activate the turn signal, a two- front of your vehicle via camera :.
tone warning will sound once. Red warning The system can distinguish various
lamp : on the corresponding side of the conditions in order to alert you early enough
vehicle will flash. and to avoid unnecessary warnings when
G Warning! crossing lane markings.
Do not change lanes or make turns, while red The warning is issued sooner when
warning lamp : is flashing. Doing so could Rcutting a curve on the outside of the turn
result in an accident and serious injury to Rdriving on very wide lanes such as highway
yourself and others. lanes
Rthe system recognizes dividing lines
X Remain on the lane that you are currently
on until traffic conditions permit to change. because crossing them is often crucial due
to soft shoulders or guardrails behind for
If the turn signal remains on, red warning
example
lamp : will flash to indicate that vehicles
have been detected. No further audible The warning is issued later however when
warnings will sound. Rdriving on narrow lanes
Rcutting a curve on the inside of the turn

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 178
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

178 Driving systems

The system does not issue a warning when conditions and to provide the steering,
Rsteering, braking, or accelerating in a braking and other driving inputs necessary to
clearly active manner, e.g. when changing retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so
lanes, passing, exiting a highway could result in recognizing dangers too late,
possibly resulting in an accident and serious
Rcutting a narrow curve
injury to yourself and others.
Rmaking a very sharp turn
Ra driving safety system such as the ABS, Switching on or off
Controls in detail

the BAS, or the ESC has been activated


When setting the turn signal in either
direction, the warning will be suppressed. The
system will issue a warning if a turn signal has
been on for an extended period of time.
G Warning!
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the Example illustration
vehicle in the lane. The Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on or off the Lane Keeping Assist via
is only an aid to the driver and may not always
recognize lane markings properly or fail to the control system (Y page 138).
recognize them at all. Lane Keeping Assist indicator : appears
The system may be impaired or unavailable in the multifunction display.
when
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,
ATTENTION ASSIST
or heavy spray
Roncoming
The ATTENTION ASSIST supports you during
traffic, sun glare or reflection
long, monotonous rides, e.g. on freeways and
from other vehicles
highways. The ATTENTION ASSIST is active at
Rthe camera area of the windshield is dirty, a vehicle speed of between 50 mph
foggy, or otherwise obstructed (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). Always
Rlane markings are not present obey applicable speed limits. The
ATTENTION ASSIST suggests to take a rest
Rlane markings are worn, dark, or covered
when recognizing fatigue or increasing
e.g. by snow or dirt
inattentiveness of the driver.
Rthe distance to the preceding vehicle is too
short G Warning!
The ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
Rwhen lane markings are ambiguous, for driver. It might not recognize fatigue or
example in road work sections increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
Rlane markings change rapidly, e.g. on recognize them at all. The system cannot
highway exits or turn-off lanes substitute a rested and attentive driver.
Rlanes are narrow and winding Fatigue can cause you to recognize dangers
too late, to misjudge potential dangers, or to
The Lane Keeping Assist cannot take road and
react slower. Therefore, make sure to be
traffic conditions into account. It is the
rested before and during your trip. Take rests
driver’s responsibility at all times to be
early enough and regularly, especially during
attentive to road, weather and traffic
long trips. Failure to do so could cause you to
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 179
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving systems 179

recognize dangers too late which could result X Switch on the ATTENTION ASSIST via the
in an accident and serious injury to you and/ control system (Y page 138).
or others. ATTENTION ASSIST indicator : appears in
the multifunction display.
The ATTENTION ASSIST interprets your
When the ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will
fatigue or increasing inattentiveness
warn you after 20 minutes of driving at the
considering the following criteria:
earliest. An intermittent warning will then
Rthe individual driving style, for example the sound twice and the message Attention

Controls in detail
way you steer Assist: Time for a rest? appears in the
Rthe driving conditions such as time of day multifunction display.
and duration of the ride X If possible park your vehicle in a safe

The ATTENTION ASSIST function is restricted location and take a rest.


and warnings will be delayed or not issued at X Confirm the message by pressing button
all when a on the multifunction steering wheel.
Rroad conditions are bad, e.g. heavy bumps If you do not take a rest and the
or potholes ATTENTION ASSIST continues to recognize
fatigue or increasing inattentiveness, you will
Rcrosswinds are strong be warned once more after 15 minutes at the
Rdriving in a sporty manner with high speed earliest.
in curves or rapid acceleration During long trips, take regular and duly rests
Rdriving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or that allow you to recover sufficiently.
faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) most of The ATTENTION ASSIST will be reset and
the time restarts evaluating the degree of your fatigue
Roperating the COMAND or making phone when
calls via COMAND Ryou turn off the engine
Rchanging lanes or varying the vehicle Ryou release the seat belt and open the
speed, i.e. you intervene actively driver’s door, e.g. during a rest or for a
driver change
Warnings and displays in the
multifunction display

Example illustration

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 180
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

180 Climate control system

Climate control system


Overview of climate control system functions
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Dual-zone automatic climate control 3-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail

USA only Canada only

Canada only
The dual-zone automatic climate control The 3-zone automatic climate control
combines an automatic heating and combines an automatic heating and
ventilation system with a cooling system. ventilation system with a cooling system.
You can adjust the dual-zone automatic You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
climate control separately for the driver’s control separately for each zone in the
and passenger side. vehicle.

Rear climate control

Canada only
The rear climate control allows separate climate settings for the rear compartment.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 181
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control system 181

Control panels
Dual-zone automatic climate control

Controls in detail
USA only

Function Recommendation/Notes
: Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 186)
air volume indicator lamp above button à comes
(automatic mode) on.
; Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 189)
windshield and the front door windows are
clear again.
= ZONE-function on/ (Y page 191)
off
? Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 190)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
A MAX COOL function (Y page 190)
on/off
B A/C cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 185)
C Rear window (Y page 191)
defroster
D Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 185)
off system.
E Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, passenger
side
F Air distribution (Y page 189)
G Air volume (Y page 189)

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 182
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

182 Climate control system

Function Recommendation/Notes
H Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, driver’s side
I Display
Controls in detail

Canada only

Function Recommendation/Notes
: Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 190)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
; Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 189)
windshield and the front door windows are
clear again.
= ZONE-function on/ (Y page 191)
off
? Display
A Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 186)
air volume indicator lamp above button à comes
(automatic mode) on.
B A/C cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 185)
C Rear window (Y page 191)
defroster
D Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 185)
off system.
E Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, passenger
side
F Air distribution (Y page 189)
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 183
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control system 183

Function Recommendation/Notes
G Air volume (Y page 189)
H Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, driver’s side

3-zone automatic climate control

Controls in detail
Canada only

Function Recommendation/Notes
Front climate
control panel
: Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 186)
air volume indicator lamp in button à comes on.
(automatic mode)
; Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 189)
windshield and the front side windows are
clear again.
= ZONE-function on/ (Y page 191)
off
? Display
A Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 190)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 184
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

184 Climate control system

Function Recommendation/Notes
B Residual heat/ i With the engine turned off, it is possible (Y page 191)
ventilation to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior.
C A/C cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 185)
D Rear window (Y page 191)
Controls in detail

defroster
E Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 185)
off system.
F Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, passenger
side
G Controls the climate
control
automatically
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/
DIFFUSE)
H Air volume (Y page 189)
I Air distribution (Y page 189)
J Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, driver’s side
Rear climate
control panel
K Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, raising
L Display
M Increasing air (Y page 189)
volume
N Decreasing air (Y page 189)
volume
O Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
control, lowering

Notes on climate control system operate the climate control system in either
the automatic or manual mode. The system
The climate control system is operational cools or heats the interior depending on the
whenever the engine is running. You can selected interior temperature.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 185
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control system 185

It can only function optimally when you are Deactivating the climate control
driving with the windows, the tilt/sliding system
sunroof or tilt/sliding panel closed.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors G Warning!
are filtered out before outside air enters the When the climate control system is
passenger compartment through the air deactivated, the outside air supply and
distribution system. circulation are also deactivated. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
G Warning!

Controls in detail
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) endangering you and others.
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged X Deactivating: Press button ^.
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior The indicator lamp above the button comes
and the windows could fog up, impairing on.
visibility and endangering you and others. X Reactivating: Press button ^.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as The indicator lamp above the button goes
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz out. The previous settings are once again
Center. in effect.
The air conditioning will not engage (no or
cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 185) is X Press button Ã.
deactivated. The indicator lamp above the button comes
on. Air volume and air distribution are
G Warning!
adjusted automatically.
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
Air conditioning
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others. The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the the temperature set by the operator. In
windshield free of snow and debris. addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the interior air and helps prevent window
the air flow-through exhaust slots below the fogging.
rear window.
G Warning!
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
interior before driving off, see “Summer vehicle will not be cooled when weather
opening feature” (Y page 107). The climate conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
control will then adjust the interior more quickly. Window fogging may impair
temperature to the set value much faster. visibility and endanger you and others.

i Condensated water may drip out from


underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 186
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

186 Climate control system

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant Dual-zone automatic climate control
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
X Set the desired temperature
are harmful to the ozone layer.
(Y page 186).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
Deactivating
The indicator lamp above the button comes
It is possible to deactivate the air on. The air volume and air distribution are
conditioning. The interior air will then no adjusted automatically.
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Controls in detail

X Deactivating: Press rocker switch F or


X Press button ¿. G (Y page 181).
The indicator lamp above the button goes or
out.
X Press button ¬ or button Ù (USA
The cooling function switches off after a only)
short delay. The indicator lamp above button à goes
out.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can 3-zone automatic climate control
dehumidify the interior air with the air X Set the desired temperature
conditioning. (Y page 186).
X Press button ¿.
X Activating: Press button Ã.
The indicator lamp above the button comes The indicator lamp above the button comes
on. on. The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
X Press rocker switch G (Y page 183) up or
Automatic mode down and select the desired level.
When operating the climate control system in The automatic air conditioning settings:
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
FOCUS Air flow high/air distribution via
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
the center and side air vents
automatically.
MEDIUM Air flow medium/air distribution
In automatic mode, cooling with
via the center and side air vents
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary. DIFFUSE Air flow low/air distribution via the
center, side and defroster air vents
G Warning!
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch H or
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
I (Y page 183).
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
The indicator lamp above button à goes
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
out.
visibility and endanger you and others.

Setting temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 187
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control system 187

in small increments, preferably starting at Always keep sufficient distance between


72‡ (22†). unprotected parts of the body and the air
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
switch E or H (Y page 181) up or down. adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
3-zone automatic climate control
You can set the air temperature for each of For best possible performance of the climate

Controls in detail
the 3 zones separately. You should raise or control:
lower the temperature setting in small X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
increments, preferably starting at 72‡ windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
(22†). any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.

Center air vents

Front zones
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker
switch F or J (Y page 183) up or down.

Rear zones
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker
switch F or J (Y page 183) up or down.

Rear climate control : Left center air vent, adjustable


X Increasing/decreasing: Press button K ; Right center air vent, adjustable
or O (Y page 183). = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
Adjusting air vents adjustable left center air vent
G Warning! X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
When operating the climate control, the air and ? upward or downward.
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 188
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

188 Climate control system

Side air vents


Controls in detail

: Thumbwheel

Example illustration driver’s side ; Air vent


: Left side defroster air vent, fixed X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
; Left side air vent, adjustable clockwise or counterclockwise.
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent Rear center console air vents
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.

Ventilated glove box


The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents, when the climate control
system is activated. The level of airflow to the
glove box depends on the airflow and air
distribution settings. The temperature of the
air is approximately the same as that of the
air flowing from the center air vents. : Thumbwheel for air volume control for
rear center air vents
! Close the glove box air vent when heating
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
the vehicle interior. Activate the air
conditioning (cooling function) when the = Rear climate control panel (3-zone
outside temperature is high. Otherwise, automatic climate control, Canada only)
temperature-sensitive items stored in the ? Left rear center air vent, adjustable
glove box could be damaged.
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
upward or downward.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 189
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Climate control system 189

B-pillar air vents Symbol Function


O Directs air to the footwells
a Directs air through the
defroster air vents to the
windshield and door windows
and to the footwells

Controls in detail
X USA only: Press rocker switch F
(Y page 181) up or down until you have
select the desired setting and the
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control, corresponding symbol is shown in display
Canada only I.
: Side air vent, adjustable
X Canada only: Press rocker switch F
; Thumbwheel for air volume control for
(Y page 181) or I (Y page 183) up or down
side air vent
until you have select the desired setting
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel ; to and the corresponding symbol is shown in
the left or to the right. display ?.

Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume


USA only: The symbols shown in display I Dual-zone automatic climate control
(Y page 181) on the climate control panel
X Decreasing/increasing: Press rocker
represent the following functions:
switch G (Y page 181) up or down.
Canada only: The symbols shown in
display ? (Y page 181) or (Y page 183) on
the climate control panel represent the 3-zone automatic climate control
following functions: X Decreasing/increasing: Press rocker
switch H (Y page 183) up or down.
Symbol Function
¯ Directs air through the Rear air volume control with the rear
defroster air vents to the climate control panel
windshield and door windows X Decreasing/increasing: Press button M

P Directs air through the center or N (Y page 183).


and side air vents
S Directs air through the center Front defroster
and side air vents and to the
footwells, USA only You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
b Directs air through the center, You can also defog the windshield and the
side and defroster air vents to front door windows.
the windshield and door
windows, Canada only

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 190
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

190 Climate control system

i Keep this setting selected only until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/
windshield or the front door windows are sliding panel are closed).
clear again. X Activating: Press button Ù.

X Activating: Press button ¬. The indicator lamp above the button comes
The indicator lamp above the button comes on.
on. The climate control switches automatically to
The climate control switches to the following the following functions:
Controls in detail

functions automatically: Rmaximum cooling


Rcooling on to dehumidify Rmaximum blowing power
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating Rthe air recirculation mode is switched on
power, depending on outside temperature X Deactivating: Press button Ù again.
Rair flows onto the windshield and the front The indicator lamp above the button goes
door windows out. The previous settings are once again
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off in effect.

i You can adjust the air volume when the


front defroster is switched on. Air recirculation mode
X Deactivating: Press button ¬. Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
The indicator lamp above the button goes unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
out. The previous settings are once again from the outside (e. g. before driving through
in effect. The cooling remains switched on. a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
The air recirculation remains switched off. outside air and recirculates the air in the
or passenger compartment.
X Press button Ã.
G Warning!
The indicator lamp above button ¬ goes
Fogged windows impair visibility,
out. Air volume and air distribution are
endangering you and others. If the windows
adjusted automatically.
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
or air recirculation mode immediately should
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: clear interior window fogging. If interior
Press rocker switch E or H window fogging persists, make sure the air
(Y page 181) up or down. conditioning is activated, or press button
3-zone automatic climate control: Press ¬.
rocker switch F or J (Y page 183) up or
down. X Activating: Press button g.
The indicator lamp above the button comes
on.
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
i The air recirculation mode is activated
MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles. automatically at high outside
MAX COOL is only operational when the temperatures.
engine is running. The indicator lamp in button g is not lit
You can use this setting to provide the fastest when the air recirculation mode is switched
possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when on automatically.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 191
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Rear window defroster 191

A quantity of outside air is added after ZONE function


approximately 30 minutes.
The temperature can be adjusted for each
X Deactivating: Press button g again. zone individually.
The indicator lamp above the button goes
out. Dual-zone automatic climate control
i The manually selected air recirculation X Activating: Press button á, rocker
mode is deactivated automatically: switch E (Y page 181) or rocker switch

Controls in detail
Rafter5 minutes if the outside F (Y page 183).
temperature is below approximately The indicator lamp above button á
41‡ (5†) comes on.
Rafter
The temperature can be adjusted for each
5 minutes if the air conditioning is
zone individually.
turned off
X Deactivating: Press button á.
Rafter30 minutes if the outside The indicator lamp above the button goes
temperature is above approximately out.
41‡ (5†)
The temperature can be adjusted for all
zones via the driver’s-side settings.
Residual heat and ventilation
3-zone automatic climate control
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate X Activating: Press button á.
control. The indicator lamp above the button comes
With the engine turned off, it is possible to on.
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for The temperature can be adjusted for each
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of zone individually.
the residual heat produced by the engine. X Deactivating: Press button á.

i If you switch on the residual heat function The indicator lamp above the button goes
out.
when outside temperatures are high, only
the ventilation will be switched on. The temperature can be adjusted for all
zones via the driver’s-side settings.
X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X Press button Ì.
The indicator lamp above the button comes Rear window defroster
on.
X Deactivating: Press button Ì. G Warning!
The indicator lamp above the button goes Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
out. removed from the rear window before driving.
The residual heat is deactivated Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
automatically: endangering you and others.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on The rear window defroster uses a large
Rafter approximately 30 minutes amount of power. To keep the battery drain
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
Rif the battery voltage drops soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is switched off automatically after

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 192
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

192 Power tilt/sliding sunroof

some time of operation depending on the shatter. This may result in an opening in the
outside temperature. roof.
X Switch on the ignition. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
X Switching on: Press button ¤. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
The indicator lamp above the button comes may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
on. opening also presents a potential for injury for
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
X Switching off: Press button ¤ again. entire body parts or portions of them may
Controls in detail

The rear window defroster switches off when protrude from the passenger compartment.
the battery voltage is too low. Too many
electrical consumers may be operating ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
simultaneously. transport any objects with sharp edges
X Switch off consumers that are currently not which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
needed if required. sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Power tilt/sliding sunroof result in malfunctions.
Opening and closing If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding ! Please keep in mind that weather
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
procedure. when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
express operation and automatic reversal could be damaged which is not covered by
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
and open slightly. sunroof using the SmartKey or the
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. opening feature” (Y page 107) and
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof “Convenience closing feature”
is blocked” section for details. (Y page 108).
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ i After switching off the ignition or
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by removing the SmartKey from the starter
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
switch was moved past the resistance point sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in passenger door. If no door was opened you
any direction. can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
G Warning!
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 193
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 193

Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow :.
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/

Controls in detail
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
Sunroof switch
X Stopping during express operation:
: Raising
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
; Opening
= Closing i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can sunroof must be closed first.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back.
X Switch on the ignition. Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
X Opening manually: Press and hold the direction of arrow =.
sunroof switch to the resistance point in X Release the sunroof switch when the
direction of arrow ;. desired position is reached.
X Release the sunroof switch when the X Express operation: To close the tilt/
desired position is reached. sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ switch past the resistance point in
sliding sunroof completely, press the direction of arrow = and release.
sunroof switch past the resistance point in X Stopping during express operation:
direction of arrow ; and release. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked
i Express opening is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sliding sunroof must be closed first.
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater
resonance noises may result in addition to force or without automatic reversal function.
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will
noises, change the position of the tilt/
stop and open slightly.
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
has stopped and opened because it was
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 194
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

194 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding Panorama roof with power tilt/
sunroof is fully closed. sliding panel
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater
force. Extending and retracting the roller
sunblinds
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and
opens slightly: The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof sunblind cannot be operated individually.
Controls in detail

was blocked and has opened, pull and hold


the sunroof switch in direction of arrow G Warning!
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully When extending the roller sunblinds, make
closed. sure no one is in danger of being injured by
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without the extending procedure.
automatic reversal function. The roller sunblinds are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
G Warning! function. If the movement of the roller
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to sunblinds is blocked during the extending
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately procedure, the roller sunblinds will stop and
after it had been blocked two times will cause retract slightly.
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any The extending of the roller sunblinds can be
reversal function for as long as you hold the immediately halted by releasing the roof panel
sunroof switch. switch or, if the roof panel switch was moved
past the resistance point and released, by
moving the roof panel switch in any direction.
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
after a malfunction or if it does not open
smoothly.
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
or synchronized, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow : (Y page 193) until the Roof panel switch
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the : Retracting
rear. ; Retracting
X Keep holding the sunroof switch in = Extending
direction of arrow : for approximately
1 second. X Switch on the ignition.
X Check the express operation feature X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
(Y page 193). panel switch to the resistance point in the
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes required direction of arrow :, ; or =
completely, the roof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 195
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 195

until the roller sunblinds have reached their opening also presents a potential for injury for
desired position. occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
X Express operation: Move the roof panel entire body parts or portions of them may
switch past the resistance point in protrude from the passenger compartment.
direction of arrow :, ; or = and release.
The roller sunblinds retract/extend ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
completely. transport any objects with sharp edges
X Stopping during express operation: which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.

Controls in detail
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result
in malfunctions.
Opening and closing the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel ! Please keep in mind that weather
conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
G Warning!
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel, could be damaged which is not covered by
make sure there is no danger of anyone being the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked” section in this chapter for
details.
Roof panel switch
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ : Raising
sliding panel can be immediately halted by
; Opening
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof
panel switch was moved past the resistance = Closing
point and released, by moving the roof panel The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
switch in any direction. roller sunblinds retracted.
G Warning! i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer
made out of glass. In the event of an accident, opening feature” (Y page 107) or see
the glass may shatter. This may result in an “Convenience closing feature”
opening in the roof. (Y page 108).
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing X Switch on the ignition.
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 196
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

196 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening X Express operation: To close the tilt/


sliding panel completely, pull the roof panel
X Opening manually: Press and hold the
switch past the resistance point in
roof panel switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow = and release.
direction of arrow ;.
X Stopping during express operation:
X Release the roof panel switch when the
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is
Controls in detail

sliding panel completely, press the roof blocked


panel switch past the resistance point in
G Warning!
direction of arrow ; and release.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
X Stopping during express operation:
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. closing the tilt/sliding panel without
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open, automatic reversal function.
resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
minimal pressure changes in the passenger blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop
noises, change the position of the tilt/ and open slightly.
sliding panel or open a window slightly. X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
stopped and opened because it was
Raising blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof
panel is fully closed.
panel switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow :. If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and
X Release the roof panel switch when the opens slightly:
desired position is reached. X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/ blocked and has opened, pull and hold the
sliding panel completely, press the roof roof panel switch in direction of arrow =
panel switch past the resistance point in until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
direction of arrow : and release. The tilt sliding panel closes without
X Stopping during express operation: automatic reversal function.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. G Warning!
i Express raising is not available when the Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to
tilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/sliding close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after
panel must be closed first. it had been blocked two times will cause the
tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal
Closing function for as long as you hold the roof panel
switch.
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof
panel switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =. Synchronizing
X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached. The tilt/sliding panel and roller sunblinds
must be synchronized after a malfunction or
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 197
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 197

if the tilt/sliding panel does not open To help avoid personal injury during a collision
smoothly. or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
panel before the tilt/sliding panel is cargo higher than the seat backrests.
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding The trunk is the preferred place to carry
panel could otherwise lock-up in the open objects.
position. Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may

Controls in detail
synchronized, contact an authorized enter vehicle interior resulting in
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside unconsciousness and death.
Assistance.
Load distribution
X Switch on the ignition.
X Pull the roof panel switch repeatedly in
direction of arrow = to the resistance
point until the tilt/sliding panel is closed
completely.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = for 1 more second.
X Pull the roof panel switch repeatedly in
direction of arrow = to the resistance
point until the roller sunblinds are closed
completely.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in The total load weight including vehicle
direction of arrow = for 1 more second. occupants and luggage/cargo should not
X Check whether the tilt/sliding panel and
exceed the total load limit indicated on the
the roller sunblinds can be opened corresponding Tire and Loading Information
completely (Y page 195). placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 238).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
Loading and storing vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
Loading instructions load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
G Warning! towards the front of the vehicle.
Always fasten items being carried as securely Please pay attention to and comply with the
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and following instructions when loading the
fastening materials appropriate for the weight vehicle and transporting cargo:
and size of the load.
RAlways place items being carried against
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
them as securely as possible.
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
securely fastened in the vehicle. always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 198
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

198 Loading and storing

Roof rack
For information about further roof rack
equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
G Warning!
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage
Controls in detail

to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/
attached roof rack system or its load could sliding panel
become detached from the vehicle.
X Flip trim covers : open.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage
220 lb (100 kg).
points under trim covers :.
Take into consideration that when the roof
X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the installation.
vehicle without the roof rack loaded.

Make sure Through-loading feature


Ryou can raise the power tilt/sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel G Warning!
completely Do not transport any unsecured items in the
through-loading area.
Ryou can open the trunk completely
X Fold the rear armrest down.
X Opening through-loading area: Open the
trunk.

Vehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroof

X Press release button :.


The cover opens.
X Closing through-loading area: Swing
cover in trunk back until it engages.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 199
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 199

Parcel nets
G Warning!
Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the

Controls in detail
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
Cargo tie-down hooks
injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods Vehicles without split rear seat bench are
in the event of an accident. equipped with six cargo tie-down hooks.
Cargo tie-down hooks are intended for
Parcel nets are located: securing light-weight items only.
Rin the front passenger footwell Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
Rbehind the rear armrest on all cargo tie-down hooks with a rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Rat each side of the left and right trunk side
walls
Retaining hook

Cargo tie-down rings A retaining hook can be used to attach cargo


items such as bags.
Vehicles with split rear seat bench are
equipped with six cargo tie-down rings. ! Do not use the retaining hook to tie down
cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 197).
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.

X Pull strap : of retaining hook ; down.

Split rear seat bench


Cargo tie-down rings
To expand the cargo volume, you can fold
down the left and right rear seat backrests.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 200
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

200 Loading and storing

The two sections can be folded down X Fold seat backrests ; forward.
separately. X Adjust front seats to desired position

G Warning! (Y page 88).


When expanding the cargo volume, always
fold the seat backrests fully forward. Setting up seat backrest
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
Controls in detail

upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.

Folding seat backrest forward


X Fold seat backrest : rearward until it
X Open the trunk.
engages.
! Make sure that the seat belt is not
pinched.
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
X Adjust head restraints, if necessary
(Y page 90).
X Adjust front seats to desired position
(Y page 88).

G Warning!
X Pull on left and/or right release handle :. Always lock the seat backrest in its upright
The driver’s and/or front passenger seat position when the rear seat bench is
moves forward automatically. occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not
in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 201
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Loading and storing 201

i To prevent unauthorized persons from You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
access to the trunk, always lock the seat vehicle is in the shop for service.
backrests in its upright position. The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key.

Front storage compartments


G Warning!

Controls in detail
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 1 Glove box unlocked
about and injuring vehicle occupants during 2 Glove box locked
Rbraking

Rvehicle maneuvers Storage compartment in front center


console
Ran accident
i A storage compartment is located under
Glove box the cup holder in the front center console.

Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX


socket or a media interface is located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
mode or on media interface, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 188).

X Open cover : (Y page 203).


X Remove cup holder in the front center
console (Y page 203).

X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.


X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 202
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

202 Loading and storing

Front armrest storage compartment


Controls in detail

X Opening: Pull handle : up.


All models except E 63 AMG X Fold storage compartment lid ; forward

X Opening storage compartment: Pull in direction of arrow.


button :.
The armrest opens to the left and the right
side automatically. Rear storage compartments
X Closing storage compartment: Swing
G Warning!
the left and/or right armrest backward To help avoid personal injury during a collision
until it engages. or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking

Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
E 63 AMG
X Opening storage compartment: Press Rear armrest storage compartment
button : or ;.
The armrest opens to the left and the right ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
side automatically. against the armrest when it is folded down,
X Closing storage compartment: Swing as you could otherwise damage it.
the left and/or right armrest backward
! Before storing the armrest in the seat
until it engages.
backrest, close the storage compartment
cover.
Seat storage compartments
X Fold the rear armrest down.
A storage compartment is located in the seat
base of each front seat.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 203
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 203

may cause serious personal injury. Liquids


spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

Controls in detail
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
X Opening: Pull release catch : and swing thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
the storage compartment cover ; upward thrown around in the vehicle interior may
in direction of arrow. cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Storage bags
Cup holder in front center console
G Warning!
Storage bags are intended for storing light- A storage compartment is located under the
weight items only. cup holder in the front center console.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.

Storage bags are located on the back of the


front seats.
All models except E 63 AMG
X Opening: Push cover = forward until it
Useful features engages.
Cup holders X Removing: Press latch ; forward and pull
cup holder : out.
G Warning!
X Inserting: Insert cup holder : and press
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
latch ; back.
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup X Closing: Briefly press on cover =.

holder. Use lids on open containers and do Cover = closes automatically.


not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 204
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

204 Useful features

! Close the cup holder before folding the


armrest upwards. Otherwise you could
damage the cup holder.

Bottle holder
G Warning!
Controls in detail

Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged, or


fragile bottles in the bottle holder.
In the event of an accident, the bottle holder
E 63 AMG cannot secure a bottle sufficiently. You and/
X Opening/closing: Slide cover : forward or vehicle occupants could be injured.
or rearward.
! Make sure that the bottom of the bottle
in the bottle holder touches the floor. The
Cup holder in rear armrest
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
X Opening: Open rear armrest storage The bottle holder is designed to secure
compartment (Y page 202). bottles of 25 fl.oz (0,7 l) to 54 fl.oz (1,5 l).
The bottle holder does not keep a bottle in
place but prevents it from tipping over.

X Press release button :.


Cup holder ; swings out and opens
automatically. X Press and hold adjuster :.
X Close rear armrest storage compartment. X Slide it in direction of arrow to match the
X Closing: Open rear armrest storage size of the bottle.
compartment (Y page 202). X Release adjuster :.
X Swing cup holder ; backward until it
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
engages.
X Close rear armrest storage compartment.

Sun visors
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, G Warning!
as you could otherwise damage it. Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 205
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 205

closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected X Adjust sun visor : by pushing or pulling in
glare can endanger you and others. direction of arrows.
X Flip down additional sun visor ; when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.

Vanity mirror

Controls in detail
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when
the sun visor : is engaged in mounting =.
X Flip sun visor : down.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover B.
Vanity mirror lamp comes on.
: Sun visor
; Additional sun visor
= Mounting Rear window sunshade
? Holder, e.g. for gas cards G Warning!
A Vanity mirror When operating the rear window sunshade
B Vanity mirror cover make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the extending or retracting
Glare through the windshield procedure.
The extending or retracting procedure can be
X Flip sun visor : down when you immediately halted by briefly pressing rear
experience glare. window sunshade switch. To reverse direction
of movement, press rear window sunshade
Glare through a door window switch again.
X Close vanity mirror cover B if opened. G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
X Disengage sun visor : from mounting =.
X Pivot sun visor to the side.

X Switch on the ignition.


X Extending/Retracting: Press rear
window sunshade switch : briefly.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 206
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

206 Useful features

Ashtrays X Removing ashtray insert: Push button


= to disengage ashtray insert : and
Center console ashtray remove it.
i A storage compartment is located under X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
the ashtray insert. insert : down into the retainer until it
engages.
! The storage compartment is not heat-
proof. When smoking always make sure the
Controls in detail

ashtray insert is present and properly Cigarette lighter


inserted.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.

If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is


being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
X Opening: Open cover : (Y page 203).
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert ; on the sides and pull it up and out
in the direction indicated by arrows.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert ; back into the frame until it
engages.
X Closing: Tap front of cover :.

Rear center console ashtray

X Switch on the ignition.


X Open cover : (Y page 206).
X Push in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when hot.
X Take out cigarette lighter ;.
X Reinsert cigarette lighter ; in its socket
after use.

X Opening: Press at top of cover ; briefly.


Cover ; opens automatically.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 207
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 207

Power outlets Power outlet in trunk


The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
If the engine is off and the power outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle battery

Controls in detail
may become discharged.

Power outlet in glove box


X Open the glove box (Y page 201).

Tele Aid
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press Information
button ï to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
If you have any questions regarding
Power outlet in rear passenger activation, please call the Customer
compartment Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
only).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
access to account information, remote door
unlock and more.
X Briefly press top of cover :. The Tele Aid system is available if
Cover : opens automatically. Rit has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires a subscription for
monitoring services, connection and
cellular air time
Rvehicle battery power is available
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 208
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

208 Useful features

information on to the Customer Assistance RThe indicator lamp in the Information


Center button ï does not come on during the
system self-test.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
signals from the GPS satellite network and Roadside Assistance button F, or
pass the information on to the Customer Information button ï remains
Assistance Center. illuminated constantly in red after the
system self-test.
Controls in detail

The Tele Aid system RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or


(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
multifunction display after the system self-
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
test
of response:
RAutomatic If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
and manual emergency
the system may not operate as expected. In
RRoadside Assistance case of an emergency, help will have to be
RInformation summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
Aid call do the following:
Customer Assistance Center at
X Press button W or X on the 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
multifunction steering wheel. (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
or as soon as possible.
X Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system. Emergency calls
Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more
subscriber agreement must be completed.
information and a description of all available
To ensure your system is activated and
features.
operational, please press Information
button ï to perform the acquaintance
System self-test
call. Failure to complete either of these
The system performs a self-test after you steps may result in a system that is not
have switched on the ignition. activated.
G Warning! If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Customer
A malfunction in the system has been
Assistance Center at
detected if any or all of the following
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
conditions occur:
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
only).
not come on during the system self-test.
An emergency call is initiated automatically
RThe indicator lamp in the Roadside
following an accident in which the Emergency
Assistance button F does not come on
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
during the system self-test. deployed.
i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
emergency call cannot be canceled.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 209
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 209

An emergency call can also be initiated Initiating an emergency call manually


manually (Y page 209).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message

Controls in detail
Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location X Briefly press on cover : to open.
system), vehicle model, identification number X Press SOS button ; briefly.
and color are generated.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
A voice connection between the Customer flash until the emergency call is concluded.
Assistance Center and the occupants of the
X Wait for a voice connection to the
vehicle will be established automatically soon
after the emergency call has been initiated. Customer Assistance Center.
The Customer Assistance Center will attempt X Close cover : after the emergency call is

to determine the nature of the emergency concluded.


more precisely, provided they can speak to
an occupant of the vehicle. G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
immediately. do not wait for voice contact after you have
G Warning! pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
The Customer Assistance Center will
flashing continuously and there was no voice
automatically contact local emergency
connection to the Customer Assistance
officials with the vehicle’s approximate
Center established, then the Tele Aid system
location if they receive an automatic SOS
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
relevant cellular phone network is not
vehicle occupants.
available).
The message Call Failed appears in the X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
multifunction display for approximately the multifunction steering wheel.
10 seconds.
or
Should this occur, assistance must be
X Press the respective button for ending a
summoned by other means.
telephone call on the COMAND system.
i The “911” emergency call system is a
public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 210
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

210 Useful features

Roadside Assistance button Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for


more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside
Controls in detail

Assistance button : is flashing


continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Customer Assistance
Center established, then the Tele Aid
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance system could not initiate a Roadside
button : for longer than 2 seconds. Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside phone network is not available). The
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The message Call Failed appears in the
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance multifunction display.
button : will flash while the call is in
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
progress. The message Connecting
the multifunction steering wheel.
Call will appear in the multifunction
display and the audio system or the or
COMAND system is muted. X Press the respective button for ending a
When the connection is established, the telephone call on the COMAND system.
message appears in the multifunction
display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data Information button
generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to
availability of cellular and GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established. X Press and hold Information button : for
X Describe the nature of the need for longer than 2 seconds.
assistance. A call to the Customer Assistance Center
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Information button : will flash while the
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow call is in progress. The message
your vehicle to the nearest authorized Connecting Call will appear in the
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as multifunction display and the COMAND
labor and/or towing, charges may apply. system is muted.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 211
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 211

When the connection is established, the case, the emergency call will take priority and
message Call Connected appears in the override all other active calls.
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will The indicator lamp in the respective button
transmit data generating the vehicle flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic
identification number, model, color and initiated emergency calls can only be
location (subject to availability of cellular and terminated by a Customer Assistance Center
GPS signals). representative. All other calls can be
i The COMAND system display indicates terminated by pressing button ~ on the

Controls in detail
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the multifunction steering wheel or the
call is connected you can change to the respective button for ending a telephone call
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI on the COMAND system.
button on the COMAND system. Spoken i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
commands are not available. the COMAND system audio is muted. The
A voice connection between the Customer mobile phone is no longer connected to the
Assistance Center representative and the COMAND system. If you must use this
occupants of the vehicle will be established. phone, we recommend that you use it only
Information regarding the operation of your with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes- location.
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you. Search & Send
For more details concerning the Tele Aid “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA address entry service. For more information
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more. COMAND system operating instructions.
i If the indicator lamp in Information
button : is flashing continuously and Remote door unlock
there was no voice connection to the In case you have locked your vehicle
Customer Assistance Center established, unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
multifunction display. (1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on You will be asked to provide your password.
the multifunction steering wheel. X Then return to your vehicle at the time
or arranged with the Customer Assistance
X Press the respective button for ending a Center and pull the trunk lid handle for a
telephone call on the COMAND system. minimum of 20 seconds until the indicator
lamp in the SOS button is flashing.
The message Connecting Call appears in
Call priority the multifunction display.
If other service calls such as a Roadside As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
Assistance call or Information call are active, via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
an emergency call is still possible. In this “Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
(USA only).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 212
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

212 Useful features

i The remote door unlock feature is Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services


available if the relevant cellular phone
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
network is available.
X Report the incident to the police.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting Call will appear in the The police will issue a numbered incident
multifunction display to indicate receipt of report.
the door unlock command. X Pass this number on to the Customer

If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more Assistance Center along with your
Controls in detail

than 20 seconds before door unlock password.


authorization was received, you must wait The Customer Assistance Center will then
15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
handle again. Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Customer Assistance Center
will contact the local law enforcement and
Remote door lock
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle and provided to law enforcement.
are no longer near it, you can have it locked
remotely through the Customer Assistance i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
Center. than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
notify the Customer Assistance Center
The vehicle can be remotely locked within
automatically.
four days after the ignition has been switched
off.
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center Garage door opener
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or The integrated remote control can operate up
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). to three separately controlled devices
You will be asked to provide your password. compatible with HomeLink® or some other
When you are inside your vehicle the next systems.
time and switch on the ignition, the message G Warning!
Tele Aid Doors locked by remote Before programming the integrated remote
control will appear on the multifunction control to a garage door opener or gate
display. operator, make sure people and objects are
i The remote door lock feature is available out of the way of the device to prevent
if the relevant cellular phone network is potential harm or damage. When
available and data connection is possible. programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 213
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 213

When programming a garage door opener, transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
park vehicle outside the garage. and begin directly with step 3.
Do not run the engine while programming the X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
integrated remote control. Inhalation of control A of the device you wish to train
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), from the signal transmitter button (;, =
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
and possible death. indicator lamp : in view.

Controls in detail
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button B
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control start flashing after 20 seconds.
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. observe indicator lamp :.
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
a signal transmitter button and wish to programming is complete and your device
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. should activate when the respective signal
or transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
X If you are programming the integrated and released.
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped with
Do not hold the buttons for longer than
the “rolling code” feature.
30 seconds.
This procedure erases any previous X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
initializes the memory. If you later wish to above starting with step 3.
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 214
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

214 Useful features

Rolling code programming Gate operator/Canadian programming


To train a garage door opener (or other rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require
code devices) with the rolling code feature, transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
follow these instructions after completing the after several seconds of transmission which
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of may not be long enough for the integrated
this text. For your convenience and to signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
complete the procedure faster, you might programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
want to have someone assist you. some U.S. gate operators are designed to
Controls in detail

X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the “time-out” in the same manner.
garage door opener motor head unit. If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
i Exact location and color of the button may (regardless of where you live) by using the
vary by garage door opener brand. programming procedures, replace step 4 with
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” the following:
button may also be referred to as “learn” or X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual. release this button until it has been
successfully trained.
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the X While still holding down the signal
garage door opener motor head unit. transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
The “training light” is activated.
your hand-held remote control button B
You have 30 seconds to initiate the as follows: Press and hold button B for
following two steps. 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
programmed signal transmitter button (;, remote control until the frequency signal
= or ?). has been learned.
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and Upon successful training, indicator
release same signal transmitter button a lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
second time to complete the training after several seconds.
process. X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may require i Upon completion of programming the
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and integrated remote control, make sure you
release the same signal transmitter button retain the hand-held remote control that
a third time to complete the training came with the garage door opener, gate
process. operator or other device. You may need it
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door for use in other vehicles, for future
operation by pressing the programmed programming of an integrated remote
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 215
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 215

Reprogramming a single signal Programming tips


transmitter button
If you are having difficulty programming the
To program a device using a signal integrated remote control, here are some
transmitter button previously trained, follow helpful tips:
these steps: RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
X Switch on the ignition. control A (typically located on the reverse
X Press and hold the desired signal side of the remote). The integrated remote

Controls in detail
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not control is compatible with radio-frequency
release the button. devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
20 seconds. control A. This will increase the likelihood
X Without releasing the signal transmitter of the hand-held remote control sending a
button, proceed with programming starting stronger and more accurate signal to the
with step 3. integrated remote control.
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
Operation of integrated remote control remote control A at different lengths and
X Switch on the ignition. angles from the signal transmitter button
X
(;, = or ?) you are programming.
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button (;, Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
angle at varying distances.
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter RIf another hand-held remote control is
continues to send the signal as long as the available for the same device, try the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. programming steps again using that other
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
Erasing the integrated remote control batteries are in the hand-held remote
memory control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of garage door opener assembly. This may
all three channels. help improve transmitting and/or receiving
X Switch on the ignition. signals.
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal i Certain types of garage door openers are
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for incompatible with the integrated remote
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator control. If you should experience further
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for difficulties with programming the
longer than 30 seconds. integrated remote control, contact an
The codes of all three channels are erased. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 216
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

216 Useful features

i USA only: compass must be calibrated and the


This device complies with Part 15 of the magnetic field zone set.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
X Calling up the compass: Press button
following two conditions:
= briefly.
1. This device may not cause harmful The compass displays the direction into
interference, and which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
2. this device must accept any NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
Controls in detail

interference received, including X Compass adjustment: Determine your


interference that may cause undesired location on the basis of the following zone
operation. maps.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to Zone map North America
operate the equipment.

Compass

i In order to receive an accurate reading in


the interior rear view mirror :, the Zone map South America
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 217
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Useful features 217

X Press button = approximately 3 seconds. loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
The currently selected zone appears in functioning of the pedals.
compass display ;. Do not place several floormats on top of each
X Selecting zone: Press button = until the other as this may impair pedal movement.
desired zone is selected.
Do not press the button again until the X Move the driver’s seat as far to the rear as
direction is indicated. possible.
X Compass calibration: Make sure you are

Controls in detail
in an area where you can drive a full circle
with your vehicle without disturbing traffic
in order to calibrate the compass.
In order to calibrate the compass properly,
mind the following:
RCalibrate the compass in open terrain.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and
large antenna masts, for example, could
impair compass calibration.
RSwitch off electrical consumers (e.g.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
climate control, windshield wipers, or rear
pins ;.
window defroster).
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets : onto
RClose all doors and the trunk.
retainer pins ;.
X Start the engine.
X Press button = approximately 6 seconds
until symbol C appears in compass
display ;.
X Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of
between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When calibration was successful, the
current direction appears in compass
display ;.

Floormat (driver’s side only)


G Warning!
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 218
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

218
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 219
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

219

Vehicle equipment ............................ 220


The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 220
At the gas station ............................. 220
Engine compartment ........................ 223
Tires and wheels ............................... 228
Winter driving ................................... 252
Driving instructions .......................... 254
Maintenance ...................................... 258
Vehicle care ....................................... 260

Operation
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 220
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

220 At the gas station

Vehicle equipment Notes on breaking-in the rear


differential (AMG vehicles only)
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
The vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
features, standard or optional, potentially rear differential. For increased protection of
available for your vehicle at the time of the rear differential, carry out an oil change
purchase. Please be aware that your after a break-in phase of 2 000 miles
vehicle might not be equipped with all (3 000 km). This oil change will extend the
features described in this manual. useful life of the differential. Have the oil
change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends you
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Operation

have this work done at a authorized


Mercedes-Benz Center.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied
you will be with its performance later on. At the gas station
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but Refueling
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
G Warning!
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
throttle driving) and excessive engine and poisonous. They burn violently and can
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm cause serious injury.
in each gear). Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown. materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 120) Turn off the engine before refueling.
only when driving at moderate speeds (for Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
hill driving). fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
materials.
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum. Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles: health.
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph G Warning!
(140 km/h). Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
RDuring
pressure in the system which could cause a
this period, avoid engine speeds
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
RShift gears in a timely manner. nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
G Warning!
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
or the rear differential has been replaced.
fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
i Always obey applicable speed limits. addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 221
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

At the gas station 221

! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm
with diesel fuel. Never refuel vehicles with SULFUR MAXIMUM).
diesel engine with gasoline. Even small The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the special additives is not covered by the
fuel system and engine. Damage resulting Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
additives or resulting from mixing gasoline i Gasoline engine:
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
! If you have accidentally filled the tank Information on gasoline quality can

Operation
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the contact gas station personnel in case
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into labels on the pump cannot be found.
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
For more information on gasoline, see
drained completely. Contact an authorized
“Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
engine)” (Y page 362), see “Fuel
system drained completely.
requirements” (Y page 363), or contact an
! Gasoline engine: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded i Diesel engine:
gasoline in this vehicle. Only use commercially available vehicular
Any noticeable irregularities in engine ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
operation should be repaired promptly. FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may Information on diesel quality can normally
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to be found on the fuel pump. Please contact
overheat and potentially start a fire. gas station personnel in case labels on the
pump cannot be found.
! Diesel engine:
For more information on diesel fuels, see
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel “Fuel requirements” (Y page 363), or
containers, place a filling filter, a suede contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container only).
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system. i Diesel engine:
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
! Diesel engine: is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
The engine is more susceptible to wear and (Y page 333).
damage if you use
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
Rmarine diesel fuel SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
Rheating oil locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Radditives i In case the central locking system does
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
seriously damaged if you use any other flap” (Y page 316).
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 222
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

222 At the gas station

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
side of the vehicle towards the rear. until it audibly engages.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
X Close fuel filler flap :.

Low outside temperatures (diesel


engine)
Operation

! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not


blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
X
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
Turn off the engine.
be damaged, which is not covered by the
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
filler cap open can cause the yellow engine To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
malfunction indicator lamp ; to improved cold flow characteristics is offered
illuminate. in the winter months. Check with your fuel
For more information, see also “Practical retailer.
hints” (Y page 310).
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter Check regularly and before a long trip
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This For information on quantities and
puts the starter switch in position 0, same requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
as with the SmartKey removed from the coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 359).
starter switch. The driver’s door then can Check the following:
be closed again. REngine oil level (Y page 224)
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the RTire inflation pressure (Y page 231)
point indicated by the arrow.
RCoolant level (Y page 226)
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
RVehicle lighting (Y page 318)
RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel system (Y page 227)
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could RBrake fluid (Y page 227)
damage the vehicle paint finish.
X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow
into holder =.
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 223
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Engine compartment 223

Engine compartment G Warning!


Vehicles with gasoline engine:
Hood
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
G Warning! ignition system. Because of the high voltage
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle it is dangerous to touch any components
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
forced open by passing air flow. socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose and Rwith the engine running
injure you and/or others. Rwhile starting the engine

Operation
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
Opening
engine is turned manually
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is G Warning!
overheated. You could be seriously injured. Vehicles with diesel engine:
Observe the coolant temperature gauge to The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
determine whether the engine may be electronic control unit for the injection
overheated. If you see flames or smoke system. Because of the high voltage it is
coming from the engine compartment, move dangerous to touch any components of the
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire Rwith the engine running
department.
Rwhile starting the engine
G Warning! Rwhen the ignition is switched on
You could be injured when the hood is open –
even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.

G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for X Pull hood lock release lever :.
approximately 30 seconds or may even The hood is unlocked.
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades. ! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
hood could be damaged.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 224
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

224 Engine compartment

readings are required by law and must be


accurate at all times.

Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Operation

Engine oil consumption checks should only


X Push handle ; under the hood upwards. be made after the vehicle break-in period.
X Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be held open at shoulder ! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
height by gas-filled struts automatically. as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
Closing covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
G Warning! Warranty.
When closing the hood, use extreme caution For further information contact an
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged Notes on checking engine oil level
before driving off. Do not continue driving if When checking the oil level
the hood can no longer engage after an Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
motion and injure you and/or others. the vehicle must have been stationary for
at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
X Let the hood drop from a height of off
approximately 8 in (20 cm). Rwith the engine not at operating
X Check to make sure the hood is fully temperature, the vehicle must have been
closed. stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
If you can raise the hood at a point above engine turned off
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with Checking engine oil level
somewhat greater force.
X Open the hood (Y page 223).

Radiator
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with
a winter front or bug cover. Otherwise the
readings of the on-board diagnostic system
may be inaccurate. Some of theses
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 225
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Engine compartment 225

For more information on engine oil, see


“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 359).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 298).

Adding engine oil


! Only use approved engine oils and oil

Operation
Example illustration: Gasoline engine filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty:
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System.
Example illustration: Diesel engine
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change
X Pull out oil dipstick :. intervals longer than those called for by
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean. the Maintenance System.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the RUsing any oil additives.
dipstick guide tube.
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :.
i E 350:
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
Example illustration: E 350 (E 550 similar)
E 550, E 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 226
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

226 Engine compartment

G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature gauge indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
Operation

E 63 AMG cool down before removing the cap. The


X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil. RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil to relieve excess pressure. If opened
entering the ground or water. immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam
will be blown out under pressure.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts.
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 359) and
(Y page 361).

Transmission fluid level


The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
X Using a rag, slowly open cap :
approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
Coolant level to relieve excess pressure.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and X Continue turning cap : counterclockwise
anticorrosion/antifreeze. and remove it.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 227
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Engine compartment 227

The coolant level is correct if the level


Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar
= in coolant expansion tank ;
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X Add coolant as required.
X Screw cap : back on and tighten it.

For more information on coolant, see the


“Technical data” section (Y page 361) and

Operation
(Y page 365).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap : upwards.
Washer system and headlamp X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
cleaning system X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
G Warning!
For more information, see “Washer system
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
and headlamp cleaning system”
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
(Y page 361).
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Brake fluid level
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
where temperatures may fall below fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
freezing point. Failure to do so could result mark or below, have the brake system
in damage to the washer system/fluid checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
reservoir. immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can problem. For more information, see
damage the plastic lenses of the “Practical hints”.
headlamps.
When checking the brake fluid level, the
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in vehicle must be parked on level ground.
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system is supplied from the washer
fluid reservoir.
During all seasons, use MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
with water or premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze depending on the ambient
temperature (Y page 367).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 228
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

228 Tires and wheels

The brake fluid level is correct when it is should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Tires and wheels appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Safety notes nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended G Warning!
rims and tires for summer and winter
Operation

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects


operation. They can also offer advice the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
concerning tire service and purchase. could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
G Warning!
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
Replace rims or tires with the same up and possibly a fire.
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
Important guidelines
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the type and make.
operating clearance of the wheels and the RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
tires may no longer be correct.
RBreak in new tires for approximately
G Warning! 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RRegularly check the tires and rims for
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
the tires have sustained damage, replace inflation pressure loss and damage to the
them. tire beads.
When replacing rims, only use genuine RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the inflation pressure and correct as required.
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident. far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
previous damage cannot always be RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
recognized on retreads. The operating safety mount new tires on the front wheels first
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
tires are used. around).

G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 229
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 229

Recommended tire inflation pressure pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be


underinflated.
G Warning! Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires Information placard on the driver’s door
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely B-pillar.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
more likely to fail from being overheated. the best handling, tread life and riding
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can comfort.
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, In addition to the Tire and Loading

Operation
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Information placard on the driver’s door
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
because they are more likely to become pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
punctured or damaged by road debris, for any additional information pertaining to
potholes etc. special driving situations. For more
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the information, see “Important notes on tire
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire inflation pressure” (Y page 230).
and Loading Information placard on the
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Information placard example are for
can overheat them, possibly causing a
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
in handling or steering problems, or brake
data shown in the following illustration.
failure.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and placard on vehicle for actual data specific
Loading Information placard located on the to your vehicle.
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 237).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on the recommended cold tire inflation
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
current operating conditions. If you check the apply to the tires installed as original
tire inflation pressure when the tires are equipment.
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 230
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

230 Tires and wheels

Important notes on tire inflation Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressure pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
G Warning! tires.
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
check the tires for punctures from foreign
i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the label examples are for illustration purposes
valves or from around the rim. only. Tire inflation pressure data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure data shown in the following illustrations.
are also increased while driving, depending Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
Operation

on the driving speed and the tire load. vehicle for actual data specific to your
If you will be driving your vehicle at high vehicle.
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the approved, factory equipped tires
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the pressure that follows applies to that
fuel filler flap. particular tire size only.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
wheels with collapsible tire refer to Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for
Rthe
particular tire sizes
yellow label on the spare wheel rim
Rthe
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only
“Technical data” section of this
show the rim diameter instead of the entire
Operator’s Manual (Y page 358)
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as
the driver’s door B-pillar specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 246).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 231
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 231

Rbe more prone to damage from road


hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance

Checking tire inflation pressure


Safety notes
G Warning!

Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures
specific to rim diameter Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Underinflated tires Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
G Warning! adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Underinflated tires can specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear and Loading Information placard on the
Radversely
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
affect fuel economy
can overheat them, possibly causing a
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
Radversely affect handling characteristics in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Overinflated tires
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
G Warning! a month.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can when the tires are cold (Y page 229).
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Checking tire inflation pressure
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) manually
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris, Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
potholes etc. inflation pressure:
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
Overinflated tires can X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
Radversely affect handling characteristics X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
Rcause uneven tire wear gauge and check against the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 232
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

232 Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information placard on the Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 237). If causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
necessary, add air to achieve the tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
recommended tire inflation pressure. efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
inflation pressure by pushing the metal Each tire, including the spare, should be
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. checked at least once a month when cold.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
with the tire gauge. inflation pressure as specified on
X Install the valve cap. Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
Operation

X Repeat this procedure for each tire. the driver’s door B-pillar
or
Tire pressure loss warning system Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
(Canada only) the inside of the fuel filler flap
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the i The recommended tire inflation pressures
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each for your vehicle can be found on
wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard
system to detect a significant loss of pressure
in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes located on the driver’s door B-pillar
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will (Y page 237)
see a corresponding warning message in the Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the
multifunction display. inside of the fuel filler flap
The tire pressure loss warning system may The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
function in a restricted manner or with a delay the Operator’s Manual.
Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the G Warning!
vehicle
The tire pressure loss warning system does
Rin the presence of ice and snow not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface inflation pressures. Always adjust tire
(e.g. sand or gravel) inflation pressure according to the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure
manner (involving rapid acceleration or
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
high speeds in curves)
The tire pressure loss warning system does
G Warning! not replace regular checks of the tire inflation
When the multifunction display shows the pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
message Check Tire Pressure Soon, one more than one tire cannot be detected by the
or more of your tires are significantly tire pressure loss warning system.
underinflated. You should stop and check The tire pressure loss warning system is not
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate able to issue a warning due to a sudden
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
Information placard or, if available, on the tire this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
inflation pressure label.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 233
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 233

applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Now OK?


steering maneuvers. Cancel
Yes
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning X If you wish to confirm: Press button
system 9 or : to select Yes.
The tire pressure loss warning system must X Press button a.
be restarted in the following situations:
The following message will appear in the
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation multifunction display:
pressure Run Flat
Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires Indicator

Operation
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
Restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the tire
X Using the Tire and Loading Information pressure loss warning system checks the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if set pressure values for all four tires.
available, the tire inflation pressure label on X If you wish to cancel: Press button 9
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
or : to select Cancel.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
X Press button a to confirm.
correct.
The previous settings remain unchanged.
G Warning!
The tire pressure loss warning system can Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
only warn you in a reliable manner if you have System (Advanced TPMS)
set the correct tire inflation pressures for
each tire. Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
the system will monitor the pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
according to the incorrect value.
case of pressure loss in one or more of the
X
tires.
Switch on the ignition.
X
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
Press button = or ; on the
tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
multifunction steering wheel to select the
(USA) or a low tire pressure telltale (Canada)
Serv. menu (Y page 138).
in the instrument cluster. Depending on how
X Press button 9 or : on the
the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
multifunction steering wheel to select pressure condition or a malfunction in the
Tire Pressure. TPMS system itself:
X Press button a on the multifunction
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
steering wheel to confirm. or more of your tires is significantly
The following message appears in the underinflated. There is no malfunction in
multifunction display: the TPMS.
Run Flat Indicator
RUSA only: If the telltale flashes for 60
Active
Press 'OK' to Restart seconds and then stays illuminated, the
TPMS system itself is not operating
X Press button a.
properly.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display: The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
Tire Pressure equipped with the proper electronic sensors.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 234
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

234 Tires and wheels

G Warning! reached the level to trigger illumination of the


The TPMS does not indicate a warning for TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always USA only:
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Tire and Loading Information placard or the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
supplemental tire inflation pressure the system is not operating properly. The
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due the low tire pressure telltale. When the
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this flash for approximately 1 minute and then
Operation

case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully remain continuously illuminated. This
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt sequence will continue upon subsequent
steering maneuvers. vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
G Warning! illuminated, the system may not be able to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
should be checked at least once a month TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
when cold and inflated to the inflation reasons, including the installation of
pressure recommended by the vehicle incompatible replacement or alternate tires
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Information placard on the driver’s door B- TPMS from functioning properly. Always
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
tires of a different size than the size indicated vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
on the Tire and Loading Information placard alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should continue to function properly.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires. i USA only:
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has If a condition causing the TPMS to
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring malfunction develops, it may take up to
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire 10 minutes for the system to signal a
pressure telltale when one or more of your malfunction using the TPMS telltale
tires are significantly underinflated. flashing and illumination sequence.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure The telltale extinguishes after a few
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check minutes driving if the malfunction has been
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate corrected.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. multifunction display. The current tire
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
multifunction display after a few minutes of
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
driving.
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire i Possible differences between the
maintenance, and it is the driver’s readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
responsibility to maintain correct tire hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
pressure, even if underinflation has not vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 235
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 235

pressure displayed by the control system i Operating radio transmission equipment


apply to sea level. In high-altitude (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
locations, the reading on a tire pressure or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
gauge will be higher than the reading issued to malfunction.
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not
reduce the tire inflation pressure under i USA only:
such circumstances. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
X Switch on the ignition. following two conditions:
X Press button = or ; on the
1. This device may not cause harmful
multifunction steering wheel to select the interference, and

Operation
Serv. menu (Y page 138).
X Press button 9 or : to select Tire
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
Pressure.
interference that may cause undesired.
X Press button a.
The current inflation pressure for each tire Any unauthorized modification to this
appears in the multifunction display. device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
Example illustration
2. this device must accept any
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
interference received, including
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
interference that may cause undesired
pressures will be displayed after
operation of the device.
driving a few minutes appears in the
multifunction display. Any unauthorized modification to this
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors device could void the user’s authority to
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long operate the equipment.
as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be Tire inflation pressure warnings
allocated to the individual wheels, the
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
message Tire Pressure Monitor Active inflation pressure in one or more than one
appears. Despite this message, the tire tire, a message appears in the multifunction
inflation pressure values are monitored display. In addition, an acoustic warning
already. sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system instrument cluster comes on.
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
of the removed road wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 236
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

236 Tires and wheels

X Using the Tire and Loading Information


placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 237) or the supplemental tire
inflation pressure information on the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
X Switch on the ignition.
Example illustration
X Press button = or ; on the
The respective tire is indicated by a red multifunction steering wheel to select the
rectangle. Serv. menu.
Operation

Restarting Advanced TPMS X Press button 9 or : on the


multifunction steering wheel to select
G Warning!
Tire Pressure.
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
X Press button a.
inflation pressure to the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires The current inflation pressure for each tire
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. appears in the multifunction display or the
You might lose control over the vehicle. following message appears in the
multifunction display:
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets Tire pressures
new reference values for each tire. will be displayed
The TPMS must be restarted when you have after driving
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new a few minutes
level (e.g. because of different load or driving X Press button :.
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to The following message appears in the
the current tire inflation pressures. multifunction display:
i Canada only: Use Current
The TPMS usually recognizes tire pressure Pressures As New
adjustments and sets new reference values Reference Values
automatically. You can, however, restart Press 'OK' to Confirm
X Press button a.
the TPMS manually as described.
The following message appears in the
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
multifunction display:
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
Tire Press. Monitor
recommended for the vehicle operating
Restarted
condition. Tire inflation pressure should only
be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the After driving a few minutes the system
recommended tire inflation pressure on the verifies that the current tire inflation
Tire and Loading Information placard on the pressures are within the system’s specified
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
supplemental tire inflation pressure pressures are accepted as reference values
information for driving at high speeds or for and then monitored.
vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded X If you wish to cancel: Press button %.
vehicle condition. If such information is or
provided, it can be found on the inside of the X Press button 9 to exit the menu screen.
fuel filler flap.
i When the wheel positions have been
changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 237
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 237

may be displayed for the wrong position Loading the vehicle


temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
the inflation pressure will be shown for the Two labels on your vehicle show how much
correct position. weight it may properly carry.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door
Maximum tire inflation pressure B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
G Warning! that can be in the vehicle and the total
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation It also contains information on the proper

Operation
pressures. size and recommended tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires pressures for the original equipment tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely on your vehicle.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are (2) The certification label, also found on the
more likely to fail from being overheated. driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
because they are more likely to become cargo. The certification label also tells
punctured or damaged by road debris, you about the front and rear axle weight
potholes etc. capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.

i For illustration purposes only. Actual data


on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
: Driver’s door B-pillar
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation Following is a discussion on how to work with
pressure (Y page 229) for proper tire the information contained on the Tire and
inflation. Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 238
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

238 Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information Seating capacity


G Warning! i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Information placard example are for
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
and Loading Information placard on the data are specific to each vehicle and may
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires vary from data shown in the following
can overheat them, possibly causing a illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result Information placard on vehicle for actual
in handling or steering problems, or brake data specific to your vehicle.
failure.
Operation

Tire and Loading Information placard


i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 237).

Steps for determining correct load limit


The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
The Tire and Loading Information placard
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
showing load limit information : is located
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 237).
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
X Locate the statement “The combined
combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight of occupants and cargo should
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
on the Tire and Loading Information
Information placard.
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
The combined weight of all occupants,
the driver and passengers that will be riding
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
in your vehicle.
applicable) should never exceed the weight
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
referenced in that statement.
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 239
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 239

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the


available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed

Operation
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 241).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 238).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 240
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

240 Tires and wheels

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation

Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1


rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)

The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label


less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 241). (Y page 241) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 241
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 241

Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle in handling or steering problems, or brake
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or failure.
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 346).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.

Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
allowable weight that can be carried by a
single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
the maximum permissible weight limits on tires are specific to each vehicle and
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), may vary from data shown in above
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, illustration.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
The maximum tire load rating : is the
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
maximum weight the tires are designed to
commercial scale.
support.
Trailer tongue load For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 246).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important For information on calculating total and cargo
weight to measure because it affects the load load capacities, see (Y page 238).
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo Direction of rotation
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
everything loaded in it. such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
tires rotate in the direction specified.
primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
towing with your vehicle. intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
Maximum tire load unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
G Warning! replaced. Always observe and follow
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the applicable temporary use restrictions and
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire speed limitations indicated on the spare
and Loading Information placard on the wheel.
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 242
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

242 Tires and wheels

MOExtended system Tire inspection


The MOExtended system allows you to Every time you check the tire inflation
continue driving your vehicle even if there is pressure, you should also inspect your tires
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. for the following:
You may only use the MOExtended system in Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 242)
conjunction with the tire pressure loss Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s
warning system (Y page 232) or the rubber
Advanced TPMS (Y page 233).
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are tread or side of the tire
Operation

not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.


When retrofitting with tires that do not have Replace the tire if you find any of the above
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires, conditions.
you should also equip your vehicle with a Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
For information on driving in case of pressure
and replaced when necessary.
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode),
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 329).
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
Tire care and maintenance 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
G Warning! The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Regularly check the tires for damage. varying factors including but not limited to:
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
RDriving style
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. RTire inflation pressure
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RDistance driven
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
Tread depth
them.
G Warning!
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
a month. For more information on checking Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 229). the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
recommend that you do not allow your tires
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 243
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 243

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply Standards
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
(3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six places
on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
considered worn and should be replaced.

Operation
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
recommended minimum tire tread depth for
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information
regarding tire performance. Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid on tires are specific to each vehicle and
band across the tread. may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Storing tires Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place shoulder and maximum section width. For
with as little exposure to light as possible. example:
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash All passenger car tires must conform to
tires. The intense jet of water can result in federal safety requirements in addition to
damage to the tire. these grades.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 244
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

244 Tires and wheels

tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
(1 1/2) times as well on the government appropriate caution.
course as a tire graded 100. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
The relative performance of tires depends cause serious damage to the drivetrain
upon the actual conditions of their use, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
however, and may depart significantly from Limited Warranty.
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road Temperature
characteristics and climate.
G Warning!
Operation

Traction The temperature grade for this tire is


established for a tire that is properly inflated
G Warning! and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
The traction grade assigned to this tire is underinflation, or excessive loading, either
based on straight-ahead braking traction separately or in combination, can cause
tests, and does not include acceleration, excessive heat build-up and possible tire
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction failure.
characteristics.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the generation of heat and its ability to
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as dissipate heat when tested under controlled
measured under controlled conditions on conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
specified government test surfaces of asphalt test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor cause the material of the tire to degenerate
traction performance. and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
G Warning!
The grade C corresponds to a level of
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will performance which all passenger car tires
be substantially reduced. Under such weather must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
conditions, drive, steer and brake with Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
extreme caution. represent higher levels of performance on the
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Rotating tires
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 252) with a minimum tread depth of Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 245
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 245

G Warning! Following are some explanations for the


Have the tightening torque checked after markings on your vehicle’s tires:
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles


with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the

Operation
same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
pattern that will maintain the intended
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
(Y page 241).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
possible. (Y page 243)
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire ; DOT, Tire Identification Number
configuration, tires can be rotated according (Y page 248)
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended = Maximum tire load (Y page 241)
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty ? Maximum tire inflation pressure
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature (Y page 237)
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be A Manufacturer
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
B Tire ply material (Y page 249)
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation C Tire size designation, load and speed
(spinning) direction must be maintained. rating (Y page 246)
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire D Load identification (Y page 248)
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear E Tire name
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires). i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels on tires are specific to each vehicle and
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the may vary from data shown in above
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for illustration.
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. For more information, see “Rims and tires”
For information on wheel change, see “Flat (Y page 353).
tire” (Y page 323).

Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 246
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

246 Tires and wheels

Tire size designation, load and speed Aspect ratio


rating Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
Operation

letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.


At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
: Tire width with a speed capability above 149 mph
; Aspect ratio in % (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
= Radial tire code designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
? Rim diameter
rating” (Y page 247).
A Load index
B Speed symbol Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
on tires are specific to each vehicle and rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
may vary from data shown in above
illustration. Load index
General: Depending on the design standards G Warning!
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall The tire load rating must always be at least
may have no letter or a letter preceding the half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
tire size designation. tire failure may be the result which may cause
No letter preceding the size designation (as an accident and/or serious injury to you or
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based others.
on European design standards. Always replace rims and tires with the same
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: designation, manufacturer and type as shown
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design on the original part.
standards.
G Warning!
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
standards.
and Loading Information placard on the
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Temporary spare tires which are high can overheat them, possibly causing a
pressure compact spares designed for blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
temporary emergency use only. in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width Load index A is a numerical code associated
in millimeters. with the maximum load a tire can support.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 247
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 247

For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds Index Speed rating


to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 241) where the
maximum load associated with the load index ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
For additional information on the load index,
see “Load identification” (Y page 248). with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
Speed symbol designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
G Warning! To determine the maximum speed

Operation
capability of the tire, the service
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
description for the tire must be referred to.
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires. The service description is comprised of
load index A and speed symbol B.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly designation and no service description is
resulting in an accident and/or serious given, the tire manufacturer must be
personal injury and possible death, for you consulted for the maximum speed
and for others. capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local capability is limited by the speed symbol in
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent the service description. Example:
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
conditions. is the service description. The letter “Y”
Speed symbol B indicates the approved designates the speed rating and the speed
maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
tire. (300 km/h).
Summer tires RAny tire with a speed capability above
Index Speed rating 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S14 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S14 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

14 or M+Sifor winter tires

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 248
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

248 Tires and wheels

Index Speed rating Load identification

H M+S14 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)


V M+S14 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all M+S rated tires provide special


winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire
Operation

sidewall. These tires meet specific snow


traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
and the Rubber Association of Canada
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
may vary from data shown in above
for use in snow conditions.
illustration.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
In addition to the load index, special load
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
identification : may be molded into the tire
RAllmodels except AMG vehicles: sidewall following the letter designating the
130 mph (210 km/h) speed symbol B (Y page 246).
RE 63 AMG: RNo specification given: absence of any text
155 mph (250 km/h) (like in above example) indicates a
RE 63 AMG (Performance Package): standard load (SL) tire.
186 mph (300 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle (or reinforced) tire.
may have a tire speed rating above the RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
maximum speed permitted by the electronic RC, D, E: designates load range associated
speed limiter.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
Make sure your tires have the required tire a specified pressure.
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (Y page 353),
for example when purchasing new tires.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
glad to assist you. into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

14 or M+Sifor winter tires


212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 249
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 249

Tire type code


Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.

Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture A identifies the
week and year of manufacture.

Operation
The first two figures identify the week,
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
starting with “01” to represent the first full
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
week of the calendar year. The second two
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
figures represent the year.
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such For example, “3208” represents the 32nd
tires. week of 2008.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
Tire ply material
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.

DOT (Department of Transportation)


Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
Manufacturer’s identification mark on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
Manufacturer’s identification mark ; illustration.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
Retreaded tires have a mark with four under the tread ;.
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 228).
Tire and loading terminology
Tire size
Accessory weight
Code = indicates the tire size.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 250
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

250 Tires and wheels

radio, and heater, to the extent that these GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
items are available as factory-installed
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
equipment (whether installed or not).
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
Air pressure and rear axle indicated on the certification
The amount of air inside the tire pressing label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Operation

Aspect ratio accessories, passengers and cargo and, if


Dimensional relationship between tire applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
section height and section width expressed never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
in percentage. certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Bar
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Metric unit for air pressure. There are
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to This is the maximum permissible vehicle
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers,
Bead fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
tongue load). It is indicated on the
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by certification label located on the driver’s door
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. B-pillar.

Cold tire inflation pressure Kilopascal (kPa)


Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
1 bar.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard Load index
equipment including the maximum capacity Numerical code associated with the
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, maximum load a tire can support.
air conditioning and additional optional
equipment, but without passengers and Maximum load rating
cargo.
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
DOT (Department of Transportation) that can be carried by the tire.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit, and production options
weight.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 251
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Tires and wheels 251

Maximum permissible tire inflation Sidewall


pressure
The portion of a tire between the tread and
This number is the greatest amount of air the bead.
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Normal occupant weight
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
The number of occupants the vehicle is tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms recall situations or other safety matters
(150 lb). concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is

Operation
Occupant distribution comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at of manufacture”.
their designated seating positions.
Tire ply composition and material used
Production options weight
This indicates the number of plies or the
The combined weight of those installed number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
regular production options weighing over the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those manufacturers also must indicate the ply
standard items which they replace, not materials in the tire and sidewall, which
previously considered in curb weight or include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
Tire speed rating
battery, and special trim.
Part of tire designation (speed symbol);
PSI (Pounds per square inch) indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Total load limit
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
The recommended tire inflation pressure for 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire designated seating capacity.
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
Traction
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
special driving situations can be found on the which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap. Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into contact
Rim
with the road.
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 252
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

252 Winter driving

Treadwear indicators the difference in tire characteristics may very


Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” well impair turning stability and that overall
that show across the tread of a tire when only driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. driving style accordingly.
16
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, Always use winter tires at temperatures
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
Operation

determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.


government testing procedures. The ratings provide special winter performance. Make
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire These tires meet specific snow traction
performance requirements of the Rubber
Load on an individual tire that is determined Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
by distributing to each axle its share of the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing have been designed specifically for use in
it by two. snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
Winter driving systems such as the ABS and the ESC in
winter operation.
General information
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized winter tires are of the same make and have
Mercedes-Benz Center. the same tread design.
i Vehicles with diesel engine: For information on winter tires for your
Do not cover the radiator, for example with vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
a winter front. Otherwise the readings of section (Y page 353).
the on-board diagnostic system may be Always observe the speed rating of the winter
inaccurate. Some of theses readings are tires installed on your vehicle.
required by law and must be accurate at all After installing winter tires:
times.
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust
it if necessary (Y page 231).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
Winter tires
system (Y page 232) or the Advanced Tire
G Warning! Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 233).
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation. Snow chains

G Warning! ! Vehicles with AIRMAITC:


When driving with snow chains, always
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
select the raised level of the vehicle level
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 253
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Winter driving 253

control. Other settings may result in Winter driving instructions


damage to your vehicle.
G Warning!
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, and from around the vehicle with the engine
make sure the use of snow chains is running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
permissible as specified in the “Technical (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
data” section of this Operator’s Manual. resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
covered roads at speeds not to exceed a window slightly on the side of the vehicle

Operation
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon not facing the wind.
as possible when driving on roads without
snow. G Warning!
Observe the following guidelines when using The outside temperature indicator is not
snow chains: designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
Indicated temperatures just above the
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 353).
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
mounting instructions.
G Warning!
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
wheels, they may scrape against the body
order to obtain braking action. This could
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by this type of loss of control.
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on The most important rule for slippery or icy
this subject. roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
RUse
acceleration, braking and steering
of snow chains may be prohibited
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or
depending on location. Always check local
DISTRONIC PLUS system under such
and state laws before installing snow
conditions.
chains.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
the automatic transmission to neutral
i When driving with snow chains, you may position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
wish to switch off the ESC (Y page 66) control by corrective steering action.
before setting the vehicle in motion. This i For information on driving with snow
will improve the vehicle’s traction. chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 252).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the
normal brake effect.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 254
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

254 Driving instructions

Depressing the brake pedal periodically when The possibility of a serious or even fatal
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can accident are greatly increased when you drink
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency or take drugs and drive.
back to normal. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on anyone to drive who has been drinking or
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency taking drugs.
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed.
G Warning! Pedals
Make sure not to endanger any other road G Warning!
Operation

users when carrying out these braking


Make sure absolutely no objects are
maneuvers.
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Driving instructions carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
Drive sensibly – save fuel pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
To save fuel you should: the objects could get caught between the
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation pedals. You could then no longer brake or
pressures. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
RRemove unnecessary loads. injury.
RRemove roof rack when not in use.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load Power assistance
use.
G Warning!
RAvoid frequent acceleration and
There is no power assistance for the steering
deceleration.
and the brake when the engine is not running.
RHave all maintenance work performed at Steering and braking requires significantly
the intervals specified in the Maintenance more effort and you could lose control of the
Booklet and as required by the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
Maintenance system. Contact an
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
in motion.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas. Brakes
Downhill grades
Drinking and driving
! When driving down long and steep
G Warning! grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and shifting into a lower gear to use the
driving are very dangerous combinations. engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can overheating of the brakes and reduces
affect your reflexes, perceptions and wear.
judgment.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 255
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving instructions 255

When using the engine’s braking power, a braking distance, which could lead to an
drive wheel may not spin for an extended accident.
period of time, e.g. on slippery road To avoid this danger, you should:
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
layer of salt that may have built up on the
Continuous or hard braking brake discs and the brake linings is
removed without putting other road users
G Warning! at risk
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

Operation
cause excessive and premature wear of the ahead and drive with particular care
brake pads. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
It can also result in the brakes overheating, trip and immediately after commencing a
thereby significantly reducing their new trip, so that salt residues are removed
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop from the brake disc
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident.
Brake service
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
for some time, rather than immediately park, ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
so that the air stream will cool down the be too low if the red brake warning lamp in
brakes faster. the instrument cluster comes on while the
engine is running and an acoustic warning
Wet roads sounds. Observe additional messages in
the multifunction display that may appear.
G Warning! Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
After driving in heavy rain for some time be the reason for low brake fluid in the
without applying the brakes or through water reservoir.
deep enough to wet brake components, the Have the brake system inspected
first braking action may be somewhat immediately. Contact an authorized
reduced and increased pedal pressure may be Mercedes-Benz Center.
necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
All checks and service work on the brake
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
system should be carried out by qualified
front.
technicians only. Contact an authorized
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Mercedes-Benz Center.
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
advisable to brake the vehicle with recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
considerable force prior to parking. The heat
generated serves to dry the brakes. G Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
Salt-covered roads installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
G Warning! vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake braking is substantially impaired. This could
linings may cause a delay in the braking result in an accident.
effect, resulting in a significantly increased

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 256
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

256 Driving instructions

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Refer to the description of the Brake Assist


Only conduct operational or performance System (BAS) (Y page 63) or BAS PLUS
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such (Y page 63).
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could High-performance brake system and
otherwise seriously damage the brake ceramic brake system
system or the transfer case which is not
The high-performance brake system and
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
ceramic brake system is only available on
Warranty.
E 63 AMG.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: G Warning!
Operation

Because the ESC operates automatically, New vehicle brake pads and disks, and
the engine and ignition must be shut off replacement brake pads and disks may take
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or several hundred miles of driving until they
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that
position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking time, you may need to use increased brake
brake is being tested on a brake test pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
dynamometer. of this and adjust your driving and braking
Active braking action through the ESC may accordingly during this break-in period.
otherwise seriously damage the brake Excessive high-demand braking will cause
system which is not covered by the correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
messages in the multifunction display.
Because the ESC operates automatically,
Especially for high performance driving, it is
the engine and ignition must be shut off
important to maintain and have the brake
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
system checked regularly.
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking The high-performance brake system is
brake is being tested on a brake test designed to operate under the extremely high
dynamometer or when the vehicle is being operating demands required to
towed with one axle raised. accommodate the performance capabilities
Active braking action through the ESC may of the vehicle.
otherwise seriously damage the brake The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
system which is not covered by the noise depending on the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rvehicle speed
If your brake system is only subjected to Rbrake force applied
moderate loads, you should occasionally test
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
above-normal braking pressure at higher humidity
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the As with any brake system, the wear of
brake pads. individual brake system components such as
G Warning! brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
driving style and the conditions under which
Make sure not to endanger any other road
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
users when carrying out these braking
calling for high-demand braking will cause
maneuvers.
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 257
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Driving instructions 257

Driving off damage is not covered by the Mercedes-


Benz Limited Warranty.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached. Driving abroad
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an or Canada, you should request dealer
extended period with the ESC switched off. network information for your destination from
Doing so may cause serious damage to the any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Operation
Control and operation of radio
! Simultaneously depressing the
transmitters
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes Safety notes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Limited Warranty. Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be his/her
Hydroplaning primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
you pull over to a safe location and stop
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
before placing or taking a telephone call.
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
when conditions indicate possible If you choose to use the telephone15 while
hydroplaning: driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the telephone when road, weather
X Reduce vehicle speed.
and traffic conditions permit. Some
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
X Apply brakes cautiously. mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the audio system or
COMAND15 (Cockpit Management and Data
Standing water System) if road, weather and traffic
! Do not drive through flooded areas. conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not be
Before driving through water, determine its able to observe traffic conditions and could
depth. endanger yourself and others.
If you must drive through standing water, Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
drive slowly to prevent water from entering (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
the passenger compartment or the engine covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
compartment. Water in these areas could 14 m) every second.
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such

15 Observe all legal requirements.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 258
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

258 Maintenance

Emission control called for by the maintenance service


indicator.
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
within permissible limits required by law. accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
These systems will function properly only and maintenance service indicator at the
when maintained strictly according to factory designated times/mileage will result in
specifications. Any adjustments on the vehicle damage not covered by the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized technicians.
Operation

Maintenance service indicator


Engine adjustments should not be altered in
message
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly Information on maintenance work and
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing maintenance intervals are specified in the
requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized
Maintenance Booklet. Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
G Warning! information.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
The maintenance service indicator message
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
will notify you when the next maintenance
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
service is required.
unconsciousness and possible death.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
next maintenance service is required, one of
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
the following messages will appear in the
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
multifunction display. The messages will
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
appear while you are driving or when you
cause determined and corrected
switch on the ignition (example service A):
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one Next Service A in XXXX miles (km)
window fully open at all times. Next Service A in XX days
Service A Due

Maintenance
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks the distance driven and the time
elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work An additional number or a further letter in
required, and calls for the next maintenance combination with the maintenance type can
service accordingly. be indicated. This indicates that further
We strongly recommend that you have your auxiliary maintenance work is required.
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance for more information.
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 259
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Maintenance 259

Clearing the maintenance service X Switch on the ignition.


indicator message The standard display of the control system
appears (Y page 129).
The maintenance service indicator message
X Press button = or ; on the
is cleared automatically
multifunction steering wheel to select the
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you Serv. menu.
switch on the ignition
X Press button : or 9 to select
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when ASSYST PLUS.
reaching the service threshold while driving X Press button a on the multifunction
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the steering wheel to confirm.

Operation
suggested maintenance service term has The maintenance service indicator display
passed with the maintenance service deadline
X Clearing the maintenance service appears in the multifunction display.
indicator message manually: Press i If the battery was disconnected, the days
button % or button a on the of disconnection will not be included in the
multifunction steering wheel. count shown by the maintenance service
The standard display appears in the indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
multifunction display. service deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the
Maintenance service term exceeded maintenance service indicator message or
maintenance service indicator display.
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
Resetting the maintenance service
display:
indicator
Service A Exceeded by XXXXX miles
(km) In the event that the maintenance service on
Service A Exceeded by XXX days your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
In addition, a signal sounds when the maintenance service indicator reset.
message appears.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will out the maintenance service will find the
reset the maintenance service indicator information for resetting the maintenance
following a completed maintenance service. service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Calling up the maintenance service Such literature is available at any authorized
indicator display Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
i The menu overview can be found on
! If the maintenance service indicator was
(Y page 129).
reset inadvertently, have an authorized
You can call up the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
indicator display at any time to check when Only reset the maintenance service
the next maintenance service is required. indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 260
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

260 Vehicle care

engine damage and/or other vehicle To avoid paint damage, you should
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz immediately remove:
Limited Warranty. RGrease and oil
RFuel

Vehicle care RCoolant

Cleaning and care of the vehicle RBrake fluid


RBird droppings
Notes
RInsects
Regular and proper care will help to maintain
Operation

RTree resins etc.


the value of your vehicle.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
G Warning!
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. adverse influences.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
More frequent washings are necessary to
particular container. Always open your
deal with unfavorable conditions:
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the Rnear the ocean
inside. Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Never use fluids or solvents that are not emissions)
designed for cleaning your vehicle. Rduring winter operation
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children. You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
surface to be cleaned. check is a washing of the underbody followed
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
While in operation, even while parked, your need to be re-undercoated.
vehicle is subjected to varying external
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
Such damage is caused not only by extreme necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-
and varying climatic conditions, but also by: Benz because of the possibility of
RAir pollution incompatibility between materials used in the
RRoad salt production process and others applied later.
We have selected vehicle-care products and
RTar
compiled recommendations which are
RGravel and stone chipping specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 261
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle care 261

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or normally be done every 3 to 5 months,


damage due to negligent or incorrect care depending on the climate and washing
cannot always be removed or repaired with detergent used.
the vehicle-care products recommended Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an should be applied if the paint surface shows
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
The following topics deal with the cleaning Do not apply any of these products or wax if
and care of your vehicle and give important your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
“how-to” information as well as references to is still hot.
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
products.

Operation
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
Power washer doors, etc.).
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on Engine cleaning
maintaining a distance between the vehicle
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
and the nozzle of the power washer.
make sure to protect electrical components
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash and connectors from contact with water and
tires. The intense jet of water can result in cleaning agents.
damage to the tire.
Corrosion protection, such as MB
Always replace a damaged tire. Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
Always keep the jet of water moving across engine compartment after every engine
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
rubber parts. poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
protected from any wax.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of Vehicle washing
water, and a SmartKey is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
Tar stains forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
become more difficult to remove. A tar If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
remover is recommended. water, and a SmartKey is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
Paintwork, painted body components could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape Hand-wash


or similar materials to painted body X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
components may damage the paintwork. in direct sunlight.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
be applied when water drops on the paint clean the vehicle.
surface do not “bead up”. This should

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 262
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

262 Vehicle care

X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent, X When taking the vehicle through an
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Shampoo. Make sure the automatic transmission
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a remains in neutral position N. Observe
diffused jet of water. instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
X Do not spray directly towards the position N” (Y page 117).
ventilation intake. When leaving the automatic car wash, make
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge sure the mirrors are folded out.
and chamois frequently. After running the vehicle through an
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
Operation

chamois thoroughly. windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This


will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
which can be caused by residual wax on the
finish.
windshield.
Automatic car wash
Ornamental moldings
G Warning!
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, moldings, use a damp cloth.
deactivate the HOLD function or DISTRONIC ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
automatic car wash.
may have chrome appearance, they could
You can have your vehicle washed in an be made of anodized aluminum that will be
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless damaged when cleaned with chrome
car washes are preferable. cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
those ornamental moldings.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button g on For very dirty ornamental moldings of
the climate control panel. which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
touchless car wash which uses caustic contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint Center.
or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
running it through the automatic car wash. side markers, turn signal lenses
! Make sure the combination switch is set X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
sensor could activate and cause the wipers with plenty of water.
to move unintentionally. This may lead to ! Only use window cleaning solutions that
vehicle damage. are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in Window cleaning solutions which are not
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running suitable may damage the plastic lamp
the vehicle through an automatic car wash lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
to prevent damage to the mirrors. use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 263
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle care 263

Cleaning the driving systems sensors Cleaning the rear view camera lens

Operation
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-
scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
lens :.
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
X Switch off the ignition. necessary, remove the wax using the
X Clean DISTRONIC PLUS/PRE-SAFE® Brake Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
system sensor cover : by hand. plenty of water.
To clean DISTRONIC PLUS/PRE-SAFE® Brake ! Do not clean the camera and the area
system sensor cover : and the bumper area around the camera
near sensors ; observe the following: Rwith a high-pressure cleaner
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
with plenty of water.
RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth. You could otherwise damage the camera.

! If you use a power washer to clean the Cleaning the windshield in front of the
sensor covers, observe the following: Night View Assist Plus camera
RFollow the instructions provided by the The Night View Assist Plus camera is located
power washer manufacturer. in front of the interior rear view mirror.
RMaintain a distance between the sensor
G Warning!
covers and the nozzle of the power
Please do not forget that your primary
washer.
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be his/her
primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, stop before trying to
remove window fogging or cleaning the
window in front of the Night View Assist Plus
camera.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 264
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

264 Vehicle care

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately Cleaning the windows and the wiper
14 m) every second. blades
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
! Do not clean the lens of the Night View are folded forward.
Assist Plus camera. If the camera lens is
dirty, please contact an authorized G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
Operation

sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have


status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
suddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.


They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
X Use recessed handle : of camera cover to X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
swing camera cover downward. inserts with a clean cloth and mild
detergent solution.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
X Clean inside of windshield in front of
arm back. If released, the force of the
camera ; with a soft, non-scratching
impact from the tensioning spring could
cloth. crack the windshield.
! If you use a windshield cleaning product,
! To clean the window interior, do not use
make sure that none of the cleaning
product comes into contact with the lens a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
of the Night View Assist Plus camera. containing solvents. Do not touch the
inside of the windows with hard objects
X Use recessed handle : of camera cover to such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
swing camera cover up. damage the windows.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 265
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle care 265

Cleaning the panorama roof Plastic and rubber parts


The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
protective layer on the inside. detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window solution.
cleaning solution. X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm

An automotive glass cleaner is solution.


recommended. The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not G Warning!

Operation
touch the protective layer with hard objects Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
strong force and only use a soft, non- steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents
scratching cloth when cleaning the rear will make the surface porous and vehicle
part of the tilt/sliding panel. occupants could suffer serious injuries from
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
protective layer. bag deployment.

Light alloy wheels ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.


Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
surface.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of Hard plastic trim items
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
pressure.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat.
COMAND display
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
! You must switch off the COMAND display
extended period of time immediately after
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
it has been cleaned. This applies especially
after the wheel rims have been cleaned ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners These can damage or even destroy the
can lead to increased corrosion of the COMAND display screen.
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
paint if the vehicle is not driven after with light pressure.
cleaning.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system Steering wheel and gear selector lever
should always be warmed-up before it is
X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
Wheel Care products, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 266
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

266 Vehicle care

Carpets Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center


X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and for availability.
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets. Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
Headliner and shelf below rear window natural product and is therefore subject to a
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo natural aging process. Leather upholstery
cleaner in case of excessive dirt. may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
Seat belts
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
Operation

X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap. and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the ! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡ RWipe with light pressure only.
(80†) or in direct sunlight.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
G Warning! agents such as scouring milk or powder.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection. As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
RExercise particular care when cleaning
Upholstery
perforated leather as its underside
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing should not become wet.
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
upholstery to become permanently
Wood trims
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will wood trims in your vehicle.
be prevented.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
G Warning! wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
Only use seat or head restraint covers which these may be abrasive.
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model. Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
interfere with or prevent
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
Rdeployment of the front side impact air and the classy appearance.
bags X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
Rdeployment of the pelvis air bags been washed, especially during the winter.
Ractivation of the NECK-PRO active front ! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
head restraints wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 267
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

267

Vehicle equipment ............................ 268


Where will I find ...? .......................... 268
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 272
What to do if … .................................. 304
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 314
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 316
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 317
Replacing bulbs ................................. 318
Replacing wiper blades .................... 322

Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 323
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) ....................................... 333
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) ........... 333
Battery ............................................... 336
Jump starting .................................... 338
Towing the vehicle ............................ 340
Fuses .................................................. 343
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 268
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

268 Where will I find ...?

Vehicle equipment wrench. Some tools required for a wheel


change are specific to your vehicle.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
features, standard or optional, potentially Center to obtain the tools approved for
available for your vehicle at the time of your vehicle.
purchase. Please be aware that your The vehicle tool kit includes:
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
RCollapsible wheel chock16
RElectric air pump17,18
RFuse chart
Where will I find ...?
RJack16
First aid kit RPair of gloves16
Practical hints

i Check expiration dates and contents for RProtective wrap17


completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items. RTIREFIT kit18
The first-aid kit is located in the trunk on the RTowing eye bolt
right-hand side behind the cover. RWheel wrench16
X Open the trunk (Y page 81).

X Turn the lock clockwise and fold down the


cover.
X Lift the trunk floor using floor handle :.
X Loosen tensioning strap :.
First aid kit ; can be removed.

Vehicle tool kit


The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor.
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel

16 Vehicles with spare wheel only.


17 E 63 AMG
18 E 350 BlueTEC (if so equipped)
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 269
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Where will I find ...? 269

E 350 BlueTEC
X Engage floor handle = on upper trunk
: TIREFIT kit
lip ;.

Practical hints
; Electric air pump
= Jack
Vehicles without spare wheel
? Towing eye bolt
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not A Wheel wrench
factory-equipped with the tools required for
B Fuse chart
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel C Collapsible wheel chock
change are specific to your vehicle. D Alignment bolt
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain the tools approved for Vehicles with spare wheel
your vehicle. The illustration shows the
vehicle retrofitted with the necessary tools All models except E 63 AMG
for a wheel change.

i USA only: Vehicles with MOExtended


system are not factory-equipped with a
TIREFIT kit. When retrofitting with tires that
do not have run-flat characteristics, you
should also equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

: Tab
; Removing vehicle tool kit box
= Vehicle tool kit box cover
A Opening vehicle tool kit box cover
B Tab
C Vehicle tool kit
D Vehicle tool kit box
E Luggage bowl

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 270
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

270 Where will I find ...?

X Removing vehicle tool kit box: Pull X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
tab : in direction of arrow ; and lift vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
vehicle tool kit box D.
X Remove vehicle tool kit box D from
luggage bowl E.
X Opening vehicle tool kit box cover: Pull
tab B in direction of arrow A and open
vehicle tool kit box cover =.
X Closing vehicle tool kit box cover: Push
vehicle tool kit box cover = downward
until it engages into vehicle tool kit box
D.
Practical hints

X Installing vehicle tool kit box: Slide


X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.
vehicle tool kit box D into the recess of
X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
luggage bowl E.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
X Push vehicle tool kit box D downward until
into the openings of base plate =.
it engages into luggage bowl E.
For information on where to place wheel
E 63 AMG chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 324).

Jack
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is
designed only for the purpose of changing a
wheel.
: Towing eye bolt When using the jack, observe the safety notes
; Pair of gloves in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
= Jack
the notes on the jack.
? Collapsible wheel chock X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
A Alignment bolt (Y page 268).
B Protective wrap
C Electric air pump
D Wheel wrench
E Fuse chart

Collapsible wheel chock


The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 271
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Where will I find ...? 271

! To prevent damage, always disengage the


floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk.

All models except E 63 AMG

Storage position
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of

Practical hints
arrow as far as it will go.

X Removing: Remove luggage bowl ; by


turning it counterclockwise.
X Remove spare wheel :.

Storing the spare wheel after use


X Place spare wheel : into the spare wheel
well.
Operational position X Secure spare wheel : by turning luggage
bowl ; clockwise.
X Turn the crank handle clockwise.
Before placing the jack back into the vehicle E 63 AMG
tool kit:
X Fully collapse the jack.
X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).

Spare wheel
G Observe Safety notes, see page 323.
i The E 350 BlueTEC does not have a spare
wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor. X Removing: Reach into recess : of
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 81). storage well casing to pull it up and remove
it.
X Lift the trunk floor and secure it on the
X Remove spare wheel ;.
upper trunk lip (Y page 268).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 272
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

272 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Storing the spare wheel after use Other messages of high priority and
If you wish to store the spare wheel after use, messages of less immediate priority can be
carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the cleared from the multifunction display using
spare wheel may not fit into the spare wheel a or %. They are then stored in the
well. vehicle status message memory
(Y page 139). Remember that clearing a
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before message will only make the message
storing it. disappear. Clearing a message will not
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the correct the condition that caused the
collapsible tire. message to appear.
X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve G Warning!
using the valve extractor integrated in the All categories of messages contain important
valve cap. information which should be taken note of
Practical hints

X Allow the air to escape. and, where a malfunction is indicated,


addressed as soon as possible at an
i It may take a few minutes for the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
collapsible tire to deflate completely.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
X Screw the valve cap back onto the valve. Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
X Take the protective wrap from the vehicle damage or personal injury.
tool kit (Y page 268).
X Pull the protective wrap over the spare
G Warning!
wheel. No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
X Place the spare wheel into the spare wheel
display is inoperative.
well.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Vehicle status messages in the
Rspeed
multifunction display
Routside temperature
Notes
Rwarning/indicator lamps
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
Rmalfunction/warning messages
the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster. Rfailure of any systems
Certain warning and malfunction messages Driving characteristics may be impaired.
are accompanied by an audible signal. If you must continue to drive, do so with added
Address these messages accordingly and caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
follow the additional instructions given in this Benz Center as soon as possible.
Operator’s Manual.
High-priority messages appear in the Read and observe the notes on the HOLD
multifunction display in red color. function (Y page 161) and parking
(Y page 113) when you park the vehicle.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using On the pages that follow, you will find a
a or % on the multifunction steering compilation of the most important warning
wheel (Y page 126). and malfunction messages that may appear.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 273
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 273

For your convenience the messages are


divided into text messages (Y page 274) and
symbol messages (Y page 287).

Practical hints

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 274
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

274 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Text messages
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


PRE-SAFE Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Operator's X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual possible.

PRE-SAFE Functions The PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily unavailable.


Currently The PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated because:
Limited
Practical hints

Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty


See
Operator's Rthe area around the sensors in the front or the rear bumper
Manual is dirty
Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative due to
electromagnetic interference near television and radio
transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring
systems, etc.
Rthe system is out of the operating temperature range
Rthe battery voltage is insufficient
RE 63 AMG only: The ESC has been switched off.
The PRE-SAFE® Brake becomes operational again and the
message in the multifunction display disappears when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range
RE 63 AMG only: The ESC is switched back on.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 263).
X Clean the front and the rear bumper (Y page 263).
X Restart the vehicle.
X Wait until the battery recovers.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 275
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 275

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


PRE-SAFE Functions The PRE-SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction.
Limited The BAS PLUS may also be unavailable.
See
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Operator's
possible.
Manual

Practical hints

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 276
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

276 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operator’s forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
Practical hints

X Open the front passenger door.


X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to
the seat are present. The system may recognize such
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 43) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 277
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 277

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps,
do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.

Practical hints

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 278
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

278 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operator’s weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints

vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 43) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 279
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 279

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Check See Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):
Child Operator's The BabySmart™ child seat is not positioned correctly.
Seat Manual Risk of injury!
Position
X Install the BabySmart™ child seat in correct position.

Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):


The sensor for child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
Risk of injury!
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Practical hints
G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger
seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e In addition an acoustic warning sounds.
X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Cruise - - - mph One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 147).

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 280
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

280 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


DISTRONIC Currently The DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
PLUS Unavailabl The DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated because:
e See Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty
Operator's
Manual Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation

Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative due to


electromagnetic interference near television and radio
transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring
systems, etc.
Rthe radar sensors do not sense any other vehicles or
objects, i.e. road sign or similar to this, for a long time
Practical hints

Rthe system is out of the operating temperature range


Rthe battery voltage is insufficient
X If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the
radiator grille (Y page 263).
X Restart the vehicle.
X Try activating the DISTRONIC PLUS again later.
X Wait until the system is within the operating temperature
range or the battery recovers.
The DISTRONIC PLUS becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe message in the multifunction display disappears

DISTRONIC Inoperativ The DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioning.


PLUS e The BAS PLUS and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are also not
available.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The DISTRONIC PLUS has switched off.
PLUS X Stop accelerating.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 281
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 281

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


DISTRONIC - - - mph One of the activation conditions for the DISTRONIC PLUS has
PLUS not been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for the DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 153).

HOLD Off The HOLD function switched off because the vehicle was
sliding, for example on a slippery surface.
X Activate the HOLD function later.

Practical hints
Blind Currently The Blind Spot Assist is deactivated because the area around
Spot Unavailabl the sensors in the front or the rear bumper is dirty.
Assist e See X Clean the front and rear bumper (Y page 263).
Operator's
Manual The Blind Spot Assist is deactivated because the battery
voltage is insufficient.
X Have the battery checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

The Blind Spot Assist is switched off because the radar sensor
system is temporarily inoperative due to electromagnetic
interference near television and radio transmitter stations,
toll stations, speed measuring systems, etc.
X Wait until the message in the multifunction display
disappears.

Blind Inoperativ The Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.


Spot e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Assist possible.

Parking Inoperativ The Parktronic system is malfunctioning.


Guidance e X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 282
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

282 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Parking Canceled The Advanced Parking Guidance has been canceled because:
Guidance Rthe vehicle is sliding
Rthe bumper became dirty in the area of the sensors
Rthere has been a malfunction
X Use the Advanced Parking Guidance again later.
If the parking space symbol is not shown in the multifunction
display at a speed below 10 mph (16 km/h):
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 263).
or
Practical hints

X Restart the engine.


or
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Parking Finished Advanced Parking Guidance: The vehicle is in the end


Guidance position.
The display message disappears automatically.
Radar Deactivate You have attempted to activate the DISTRONIC PLUS or the
Sensors d See PRE-SAFE® Brake even though you have switched off the
Operator's radar sensors on the vehicle.
Manual X Check if switching on the radar sensors is permitted
(Y page 144).
X Switch on the radar sensors using the instrument cluster
control system.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 283
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 283

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Lane Currently The Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Keeping Unavailabl The Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated because:
Assist e See Rthe windshield in front of the camera is dirty
Operator's
Manual Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation or
fog
Rlane markings are not present for an extended period of
time
Rlane markings are worn, dark, or covered by dirt or snow
for example

Practical hints
The Lane Keeping Assist becomes operational again and the
message in the multifunction display disappears when:
Rdirt on the windshield has fallen off while driving (e.g. slush
or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full camera availability
X If necessary, clean the windshield in front of the camera
(Y page 264).

Lane Inoperativ The Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.


Keeping e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Assist

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Apply to Shift You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
Brake from 'P' drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

Door Open Vehicle In addition an acoustic warning sounds.


Not in 'P' You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
transmission is in park position P and the parking brake is
engaged.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 284
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

284 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Service Do Not In addition an acoustic warning sounds.
Required Shift The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the
Gears current transmission position because of a malfunction.
Visit If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
Dealer
X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to position neutral
position N, reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Practical hints

Roadside Assistance.

Only You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into


Shift to park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
'P' when X Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
is
Stationary
Shift to to Start You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
'P' or 'N' Engine start/stop button while the automatic transmission was in
reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.

Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no


Battery n longer charging.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Check Then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
Tire Restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Pressure Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 232).

Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 285
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 285

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Soon X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 323).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 231).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 232).

Practical hints
Tire after The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressures driving a TPMS.
will be few X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed minutes
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Press. e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

TirePress. Sensor(s)M At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).


issing The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is


mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 286
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

286 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Press. Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Correct The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Tire or
Pressure The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
each other significantly.
Practical hints

The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the


multifunction display.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 231).
X Restart the Advanced TPMS (Y page 236).

Caution At least one tire is deflating.


Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 323).

Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly


Tires below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 323).

G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.

G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 287
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 287

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Symbol messages
Brake

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Check The brake pads have reached their wear limit.


Brake Pad X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an
Wear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Practical hints
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 288
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

288 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ ABS and In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ä, the yellow
ESC ESC OFF warning lamp å, and the yellow ABS indicator
(USA only) Inoperativ lamp ! come on.
J e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
(Canada Operator’s malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the
only) Manual hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE®
system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints

X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking


responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.

$ ABS and In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ä, the yellow
ESC ESC OFF warning lamp å, and the yellow ABS indicator
(USA only) Currently lamp ! come on.
J Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
(Canada e See insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS,
only) Operator’s the ESC, the hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the
Manual PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are
unavailable.
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist system,
the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the
PRE-SAFE® Brake are operational again and the message
should disappear.
If the message does not disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 289
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 289

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ EBD, ABS, In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ä, the yellow
and ESC ESC OFF warning lamp å, and the yellow ABS indicator
(USA only) Inoperativ lamp ! come on.
J e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
(Canada Operator's malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the EBP, the
only) Manual ESC, the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-
SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

Practical hints
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.

$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)

$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.


Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake.
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 290
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

290 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ ESC In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ä and the yellow
Inoperativ ESC OFF warning lamp å come on.
e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Operator's malfunction, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start
Manual assist system, the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE® system,
and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints

X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking


responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.

G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

6 SRS There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System


Malfunctio (SRS). The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
n Service could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Required X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

6 Front Components of the driver’s supplemental restraint system


Left SRS may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required

6 Front Components of the front passenger’s supplemental restraint


Right SRS system may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 291
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 291

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 Rear Left Components of the left rear passenger’s supplemental


SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required

6 Rear Components of the center rear passenger’s supplemental


Center restraint system may not work properly.
SRS X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center.
n Service
Required

Practical hints
6 Rear Components of the right rear passenger’s supplemental
Right SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required

6 Left Side The left window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Curtain X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Airbag Mercedes-Benz Center.
Malfunctio
n Service
Required

6 Right The right window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Side X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Curtain Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbag
Malfunctio
n Service
Required

G Warning! Center immediately to have the system


In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 292
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

292 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¨ Vehicle The vehicle is adjusting to your level selection.


Rising

¨ Vehicle The vehicle level is too low.


Rising X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Please display.
Wait

¨ Pull Over You have started driving although the vehicle level was too
Car Too low.
Low
Practical hints

The vehicle will be raised.


X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the electronic parking brake.
X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
display.
You may then drive off.

¨ Pull Over The AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.


Car Too X Avoid excessive steering maneuvers. The fenders or tires
Low could otherwise be damaged. Listen for scraping noises.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Drive to the side of the road and select a higher vehicle level
(Y page 163).
Depending on the type of malfunction, this may raise the
vehicle’s level.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.

¨ Malfunctio The capability of the AIRMATIC system is restricted. This can


n impair the handling.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

À Attention The ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that your


Assist concentration has declined considering certain criteria. In
Time for addition, an acoustic warning sounds.
a rest? X Take a rest if required.
During long trips, take regular and duly rests that allow you
to recover sufficiently.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 293
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 293

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Attention The ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.


Assist X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The trunk is open.


X Close the trunk (Y page 82).

Practical hints
M You are driving with the hood open.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 224).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.

C You are driving with at least one door open.


The display symbol shows you which doors are open.
X Close all doors.

_ Rear Left The left or right rear seat backrest is not engaged.
Backrest X Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully engaged in
Not position.
Latched
or
Rear
Right
Backrest
Not
Latched

+ Take Your You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.


Key From X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Ignition

+ Obtain A The SmartKey is malfunctioning.


New Key X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

+ Close You tried to lock the vehicle but not all doors were closed.
Doors To X Close doors and lock the vehicle again.
Lock
Vehicle

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 294
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

294 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicle

+ Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are


Key discharged.
Battery X Replace the batteries (Y page 317).

+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Practical hints

appears in X Engage the parking brake.


red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.

+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 86).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.

+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.


Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 86).
white)

+ Remove The KEYLESS-GO system is malfunctioning.


'Start' X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
Button (Y page 86).
and X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Insert Key

¥ Check The washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen below
Washer the minimum level.
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 227).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 295
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 295

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

D Power Power assistance for the steering system is not available. A


Steering considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the
Malfunctio vehicle.
n X Check whether you are capable to apply the higher degree
See of effort necessary to safely steer the vehicle.
Operator's
Manual If you are able to steer the vehicle safely:
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If, in any way, you feel that you are not able to steer the vehicle

Practical hints
safely:
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ Check The coolant level is too low.


Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 226).
Level See X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator's
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual

G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 296
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

296 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? Coolant The coolant is too hot.


Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Engage the parking brake.
Engine Off
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints

During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city


traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).

G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 297
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 297

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.


Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Check the poly-V-belt.
Engine Off
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine

Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.

? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.


X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

# The battery is no longer charging.


Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 298
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

298 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4 Check The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.


Engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 224) and add engine oil
Oil At as required (Y page 225).
Next X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
Refueling
checked for possible leaks.

If the message Check Engine Oil At Next For information on approved engine oils
Refueling appears while the engine is contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
running and at operating temperature, the or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
engine oil level has dropped to approximately ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
Practical hints

the minimum level.


ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

C The fuel level is low.


X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 Fuel The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Level Low X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 Ultra Low- Vehicles with diesel engine only:


sulfur The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Diesel X Refuel at the next gas station.
Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM).

8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Loose fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 220).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 299
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 299

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¸ Replace The air filter is clogged.


Air Filter X Have the air filter checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

! Check There is water in the fuel filter.


Fuel X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Filter Center as soon as possible.

Ø Check The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.


Additive X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as possible
See (Y page 333).

Practical hints
Operator's Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual

Ø Remaining The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the minimum level.


Starts: 20 X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately (Y page 333).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i When the message Remaining approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®


Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction (corresponds to approximately 2 refill
display, you can start the engine 20 more containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
engine cannot be started beyond that Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the
point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with engine can be started again.

Lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.


Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e

b Adaptive The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.


Highbeam X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Assist possible.
Inoperativ
e

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 300
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

300 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b Check The left or right daytime running lamps are malfunctioning.


Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Daytime possible.
Running
Light
or
Check
Right
Daytime
Running
Light
Practical hints

b Check The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.


Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Reverse possible.
Lamp
or
Check
Right
Reverse
Lamp

b Check The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This


Center message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Brake Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

b Check The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. This message
Left Fog will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Check
Right Fog
Lamp

b Check The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
Sidemarker
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 301
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 301

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b Check The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Sidemarker possible.
Lamp
or
Check
Rear
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp

b Check The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

Practical hints
Front X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left (Y page 318).
Parking X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Lamp
Benz Center as soon as possible.
or
Check
Front
Right
Parking
Lamp

b Check The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.


Left High X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Beam (Y page 318).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Check
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Right
High Beam

b Check The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.


Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
License possible.
Plate Lamp
or
Check
Right
License
Plate Lamp

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 302
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

302 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b Auto Lamp The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on


Function automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X Switch off the daytime running lamp mode in the control
system (Y page 141).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 97).
Practical hints

b Check The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.


Left Low X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Beam (Y page 318).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Check
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Right Low
Beam

b Check The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only
Rear Left appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Fog Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or c
(Y page 97).
or
X With the fog lamps switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.

b Check The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning. This


Left Tail message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
and Brake X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Lamps possible.
or
Check
Right
Tail and
Brake
Lamps
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 303
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 303

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b Check The left or right corner-illuminating lamp is malfunctioning.


Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 318).
Cornering
Light
or
Check
Right
Cornering
Light

b Check The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.


Rear Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

Practical hints
Turn possible.
Signal
or
Check
Rear
Right
Turn
Signal

b Check The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.


Front X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 318).
Left Turn
Signal
or
Check
Front
Right
Turn
Signal

b Check The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Left malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Mirror stopped working.
Turn X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Signal possible.
or
Check
Right
Mirror
Turn
Signal

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 304
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

304 What to do if …

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Tire At least one tire is deflating.


Press. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Warning steering and braking maneuvers.
Caution X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 323).
Tire
Malfunctio
n

h Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly


Tire below the reference value.
Practical hints

Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt


steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 323).

G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.

G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in


the instrument cluster come on. The low-
Lamps in instrument cluster beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam
headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
Notes
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for
If any of the following lamps in the instrument the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
check when switching on the ignition, have come on when the ignition is switched on,
the respective bulb checked and replaced if have it checked and replaced if necessary.
necessary.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 305
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

What to do if … 305

Brake

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


! The yellow ABS The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
indicator lamp malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the
comes on while hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE®
the engine is system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
running. The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.

Practical hints
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ä The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
å malfunction.
! The ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist
The yellow ESC warning system, the HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the
lamp, the yellow ESC PRE-SAFE® Brake are also switched off.
OFF warning lamp, and The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the yellow ABS systems specified above available.
indicator lamp come on
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
while the engine is
running and an X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

acoustic warning hard braking, reducing steering capability.


sounds. X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 306
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

306 What to do if …

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


$ (USA only) The brake system is malfunctioning. Braking characteristics may
J (Canada only) be impaired.
The red brake warning Risk of accident!
lamp comes on while X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
driving. soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
Practical hints

J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.


The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running X Engage the parking brake.
and an acoustic
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
warning sounds.
multifunction display (Y page 272).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be


Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 307
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

What to do if … 307

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.

Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 308
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

308 What to do if …

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


6 The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints

G Warning! Center immediately to have the system


In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


å The yellow ESC The ESC has been switched off.
OFF warning Risk of accident!
lamp comes on When the ESC is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
while the engine system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is running. is spinning.
X Switch the ESC back on.
Exceptions: All models except E 63 AMG (Y page 66), E 63 AMG
(Y page 68).
X If leaving the ESC switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESC cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
ì E 63 AMG only: ESC SPORT is activated.
The yellow ESC Risk of accident!
SPORT warning When ESC SPORT is activated it will only stabilize the vehicle to a
lamp comes on limited extent if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts to
while the engine skid or that a wheel is spinning.
is running. X Switch the ESC SPORT off (Y page 67).
The message ESC-ON appears in the multifunction display.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 309
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

What to do if … 309

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


ä The yellow ESC The ESC is not operational due to a malfunction.
å warning lamp The ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the hill-start assist system, the
and the yellow HOLD function, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake
ESC OFF are also switched off.
warning lamp
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
come on while
systems specified above available.
the engine is
running. The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
multifunction display.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

Practical hints
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ä The yellow ESC The ESC or the ETS has come into operation because of detected
warning lamp traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
driving. X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESC.
Exceptions: All models except E 63 AMG (Y page 66), E 63 AMG
(Y page 68).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


· The red distance You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or
warning lamp DISTRONIC PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake has recognized a stationary
comes on while obstacle on your probable line of travel.
driving and an X Apply the brakes immediately.
acoustic
X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
warning sounds.
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 310
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

310 What to do if …

Vehicle

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


8 The yellow fuel The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
tank reserve X Refuel at the next gas station.
warning lamp
comes on when
the engine is
running.

Engine
Practical hints

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


; There may be a malfunction in
The yellow engine Rthe fuel management system
malfunction indicator Rthe ignition system (gasoline engine)
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rthe emission control system
Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
; A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
The yellow engine cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
malfunction indicator X Check the fuel cap (Y page 220).
lamp comes on when X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
the engine is running. X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was driven empty.


X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 311
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

What to do if … 311

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


? The red coolant There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
temperature If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the
warning lamp cooling system.
comes on when If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be
the engine is broken.
running.
X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating
(Y page 226).
X Have the cooling system checked.
X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can
continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz

Practical hints
Center.
X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go
driving.
? The red coolant The coolant temperature has exceeded 248‡ (120†).
temperature X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine
warning lamp and coolant to cool down.
comes on when
the engine is
running and an
acoustic
warning sounds.

G Warning! Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from


Driving when your engine is overheated can other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
cause some fluids which may have leaked into vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine compartment to catch fire. You the engine has cooled down.
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause ! The engine should not be operated with
serious burns which can occur just by opening the coolant temperature above 248‡
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine (120†). Doing so may cause serious
if you see or hear steam coming from it. damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 312
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

312 What to do if …

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 272).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Practical hints

Canada only:
Low tire
pressure telltale
for the
Advanced TPMS
illuminates
continuously.
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 272).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.

G Warning! determine the proper tire inflation pressure


Each tire, including the spare (if provided), for those tires.
should be checked at least once a month As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
when cold and inflated to the inflation been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
pressure recommended by the vehicle system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading pressure telltale when one or more of your
Information placard on the driver’s door B- tires are significantly underinflated.
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
tires of a different size than the size indicated your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
on the Tire and Loading Information placard them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 313
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

What to do if … 313

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency remain continuously illuminated. This


and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s sequence will continue upon subsequent
handling and stopping ability. Please note that vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire exists. When the malfunction indicator is
maintenance, and it is the driver’s illuminated, the system may not be able to
responsibility to maintain correct tire detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
pressure, even if underinflation has not TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reached the level to trigger illumination of the reasons, including the installation of
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. incompatible replacement or alternate tires
USA only: or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS from functioning properly. Always
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
the system is not operating properly. The replacing one or more tires or wheels on your

Practical hints
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
the low tire pressure telltale. When the alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will continue to function properly.
flash for approximately 1 minute and then

Lamp in center console

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
45 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47).
Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 58).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
Mercedes-Benz Center.
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 314
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

314 Unlocking/locking manually

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
Practical hints

front passenger seat.

G Warning! individual on the front passenger seat, do not


If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates have any passenger use the front passenger
and remains illuminated with the weight of a seat until the system has been repaired.
typical adult or someone larger than a small

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
not remain illuminated out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
with the weight of a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
typical 12-month-old the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
child in a standard child X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
restraint or less on the
follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
front passenger seat.

G Warning! Unlocking/locking manually


If the 45 indicator lamp does not
Unlocking the vehicle
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
restraint or less on the front passenger seat, SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
do not transport a child on the front driver’s door and the trunk using the
passenger seat until the system has been mechanical key.
repaired.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 315
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Unlocking/locking manually 315

The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when X Pull the door handle to open the driver’s
you door.
Runlock the driver’s door or the trunk with X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
the mechanical key it from the driver’s door lock.
and
Ropen the driver’s door or the trunk Unlocking the trunk
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft
the starter switch. (1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

Removing the mechanical key

Practical hints
X Insert mechanical key ; into the trunk lid
lock.
X Move locking tab : in the direction of X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise

arrow. to position 1.
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
swings open upwards. Always make sure
Unlocking the driver’s door there is sufficient overhead clearance.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
it from the trunk lid lock.

Locking the vehicle


If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Open the driver’s door.
X Close the front passenger door, the rear
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s doors, and the trunk.
door lock. X Press the central locking switch
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise (Y page 81).
to position 1. The locking knobs of the front passenger
door and the rear doors move down.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained: Press down the locking knobs on

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 316
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

316 Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints

the front passenger door and the rear The fuel filler flap release is located on the
doors. passenger side in the trunk behind the cover.
X Exit the vehicle. X Open the trunk (Y page 81).
X Close the driver’s door. X Push the parcel net down.
X Open the cover (Y page 268).
Practical hints

X Remove mechanical key ; from the


SmartKey (Y page 315). X Remove fuel filler flap release ; from
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s holder :.
door lock. X Pull fuel filler flap release ; in direction of
X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise to the arrow.
position 1.
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 220).
The vehicle is locked.
X Close the cover.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
X Close the trunk.
it from the driver’s door lock.
X Check whether the doors and the trunk are
locked. Resetting activated NECK-PRO active
X If necessary, lock the trunk with the front head restraints
mechanical key (Y page 85).
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
i This procedure does not arm the anti-
have been triggered in a rear-end collision,
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
they must be reset.
filler flap.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when
Fuel filler flap they have been moved forward and cannot be
adjusted.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
front head restraints checked at an
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a
filler flap.
rear-end collision.
In case the central locking system does not
release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
manually.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 317
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Replacing SmartKey batteries 317

G Warning! G Warning!
When pushing back the head restraint Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
cushion, make sure your fingers do not substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
become caught between the head restraint of reach of children.
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
lead to injury. immediately.

G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

Practical hints
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the


environment if disposed of improperly.
X Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
direction of arrow : as far as it will go. of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
X Adjust the head restraint cushion
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
downward in direction of arrow ; as far as
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
it will go.
are clean and free of lint.
X Firmly press the top of the head restraint
When replacing batteries, always replace
cushion towards the head restraint cover in
both batteries.
direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO i The required replacement batteries are
active front head restraint for the second available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
front seat. Center.
For information on NECK-PRO active front Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front CR 2025 or equivalent.
head restraints” (Y page 54). X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 315).

Replacing SmartKey batteries

If the batteries in the SmartKey are


discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 318
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

318 Replacing bulbs

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
opening until battery compartment important. Have headlamps checked and
cover : opens. Do not keep the cover readjusted at regular intervals and when a
shut. bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
Practical hints

Rtouch or move it when hot


Rdrop the bulb
X Remove the battery compartment cover. Rscratch the bulb
X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
Wear eye and hand protection.
hand until battery = falls out.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
X Insert the new battery with the positive
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth. lamp and its components. We recommend
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment that you have such work done by a qualified
cover into the housing and press the cover technician.
closed.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
well as the KEYLESS-GO function. highly demanding process, we recommend
to have them replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing bulbs
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
Safety notes fogged up on the inside as a result of high
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 319
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Replacing bulbs 319

Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: 3457A

Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type
: Corner-illuminating lamp: H7 55 W
; IR emitter (for Night View Assist Plus):
H11 55 W

Notes on bulb replacement RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and Center.
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- i Mercedes-Benz recommends using
Benz Center. Longlife (LL) bulbs.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 318.
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
with the specified watt rating. Replacing bulbs for front lamps
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb G Warning!
to prevent short circuits. Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
handling bulbs. lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. It is

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 320
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

320 Replacing bulbs

recommended to have such work done by a Low beam (halogen headlamps only)
qualified technician.

Before you start to replace a bulb for a front


lamp, do the following:
X Switch off the ignition.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
X Open the hood (Y page 223).

Releasing/fixing the washer fluid


reservoir
X Driver’s side only: Release the washer fluid
Practical hints

To replace bulbs of the driver’s side reservoir (Y page 320).


headlamp, the washer fluid reservoir in the
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
engine compartment must be released.
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket ; counterclockwise and
pull it out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ;.
X Insert bulb socket ; into the housing and
turn it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise.
X Driver’s side only: Fix the washer fluid

X
reservoir (Y page 320).
Releasing: Turn screw ;
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Tilt washer fluid reservoir : to the side as
High beam (halogen headlamps only) or
Corner-illuminating lamp (Bi-Xenon
far as necessary to access the headlamp
headlamps only)
bulbs.
X Fixing: Tilt washer fluid reservoir : back
into fixing position.
X Fasten screw ; by turning it clockwise.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 321
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Replacing bulbs 321

X Driver’s side only: Release the washer fluid IR emitter lamp bulb (Night View Assist
reservoir (Y page 320). Plus)
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket ; counterclockwise and
pull it out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ;.
X Insert bulb socket ; into the housing and
turn it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise.

Practical hints
X Driver’s side only: Fix the washer fluid X Driver’s side only: Release the washer fluid
reservoir (Y page 320). reservoir (Y page 320).
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
Parking and standing lamp bulb and remove it.
(halogen headlamps only) X Turn bulb ; counterclockwise and pull it
out.
X Insert bulb ; into the housing and turn it
clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise.
X Driver’s side only: Fix the washer fluid
reservoir (Y page 320).

Front turn signal lamp bulb (halogen


headlamps only)
X Driver’s side only: Release the washer fluid
reservoir (Y page 320).
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Pull out bulb socket ;.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ;.
X Insert bulb socket ;.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise.
X Driver’s side only: Release the washer fluid
X Driver’s side only: Fix the washer fluid
reservoir (Y page 320).
reservoir (Y page 320).
X Turn bulb socket : counterclockwise and
pull it out.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 322
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

322 Replacing wiper blades

X Turn the bulb counterclockwise with light Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:


pressure and pull it out of bulb socket :. X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket : and electronics have status 0 (Y page 86).
turn the bulb clockwise.
X Insert bulb socket : into the housing and
turn it clockwise. Removing wiper blades
X Driver’s side only: Fix the washer fluid
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
reservoir (Y page 320). They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps
Replacing wiper blades into place.

Safety notes
Practical hints

G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
injury.

G Warning! X Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to


Wiper blades are components that are subject wiper arm.
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. retainer.
Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
Installing wiper blades
could cause an accident.
X Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is until it locks in place.
folded forward. X Rotate the wiper blade into a position
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper parallel to the wiper arm.
arm back. If released, the force of the X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
impact from the tensioning spring could windshield.
crack the windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the folding the wiper arm back.
windshield glass without a wiper blade
inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 323
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Flat tire 323

Flat tire X Turn the steering wheel so that the front


wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
Safety notes X Engage the parking brake.
Your vehicle may be equipped with: X Shift the automatic transmission into park
Ra Minispare wheel position P.
X Turn off the engine.
Ra spare wheel with collapsible tire
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
Ran MOExtended system (your vehicle does switch.
not have a spare wheel or a TIREFIT kit)
or
Ra TIREFIT kit19 (your vehicle does not have X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
a spare wheel) driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
G Warning!

Practical hints
removed from the starter switch). The
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
driver’s door can then be closed again.
different from those of the road wheels. As a
Open doors only when conditions are safe
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
to do so.
change when driving with a spare wheel
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
starter switch.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do safe distance from the roadway. Open
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph doors only when conditions are safe to do
(80 km/h). so.
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
Mounting the spare wheel
wheel. Introduction
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
X Prepare the vehicle as described
spare wheel mounted.
(Y page 323).
Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel
X Take the following out of the vehicle:
is mounted.
Rspare wheel

Rjack
Preparing the vehicle Rvehicle tool kit
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: Rcollapsible wheel chock
Make sure the vehicle level is set to normal
Relectric air pump (required for vehicles
level (Y page 163).
with spare wheel with collapsible tire
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
only)
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
flat surface. For information on where to find the
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
(Y page 268) and (Y page 271).

19 Canada only.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 324
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

324 Flat tire

i Vehicles without spare wheel are not surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
factory-equipped with the tools required for a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
change are specific to your vehicle. not be able to achieve its load-bearing
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz capacity if it is not at its full height.
Center to obtain the tools approved for
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
your vehicle. This section describes the
raised.
wheel change using the tools approved and
recommended for your vehicle. Also observe the notes on the jack.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by


Lifting the vehicle
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
G Warning! sizeable objects.
Practical hints

When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
which has been specifically approved by chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. (Y page 268). For information on setting up
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the collapsible wheel chock, see
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built (Y page 270).
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the When changing a wheel on a level surface:
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
bracket. The jack must always be vertical
object in front of and another wheel chock
when in use, especially on inclines or
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
declines.
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle being changed.
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the a level surface. However, should
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel circumstances require you to do so on a hill:
change. X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is objects on the downhill side in front of both
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet wheels on the side opposite to the side on
away from the area under the lifted vehicle. which the wheel is to be changed.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the G Warning!
vehicle. Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
Always engage the parking brake firmly and slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle others.
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 325
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Flat tire 325

the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or


others.

! Do not position the jack on the body of


the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.

X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do


not yet remove the wheel bolts

Practical hints
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench :).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
X Place jack ? on firm ground.
E 63 AMG and vehicles with AMG
bodystyling: The respective cover in the X Position jack ? under take-up bracket
door-sill trim must be removed to access the = so that it is always vertical as seen from
jack take-up brackets. the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.

Example illustration: Vehicles with AMG


bodystyling
X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? is
X E 63 AMG and vehicles with AMG fully seated in take-up bracket = and the
bodystyling: Remove cover ; in direction jack base evenly meets the ground.
of arrow.
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a

G Warning! maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.


The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 326
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

326 Flat tire

Removing the wheel Damaged wheel hub threads should be


repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.

G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Practical hints

! E 63 AMG with ceramic composite


Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
brake disk: The rim could strike the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
ceramic composite brake disk when
fall off the jack.
removing and attaching the spare wheel.
The ceramic composite brake disk could be X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
damaged. Exercise appropriate care and
hub.
have a second person assist you if possible
or use a second alignment bolt. ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
X
against hub and hold it there while
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and
installing first wheel bolt.
remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment ! E 63 AMG with ceramic composite
bolt :. brake disk: The rim could strike the
X Remove the remaining bolts. ceramic composite brake disk when
removing and attaching the spare wheel.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The ceramic composite brake disk could be
This could result in damage to the wheel damaged. Exercise appropriate care and
bolts and wheel hub threads. have a second person assist you if possible
X Remove the wheel. or use a second alignment bolt.

Attaching the spare wheel


G Warning!
Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire
only: Inflate collapsible tire only after the
wheel is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.

G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged Example illustration: All models except E 63 AMG.
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 327
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Flat tire 327

X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment The following description applies to both
bolt and push it on. versions. Differences in usage are expressly
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them declared.
slightly.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X Vehicles with spare wheel with
collapsible tire: Continue the procedure
by following the instructions under
“Inflating the collapsible tire”
(Y page 327) and then “Lowering the
vehicle” (Y page 328).

Practical hints
or Version 1
X Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Continue
the procedure by following the instructions
under “Lowering the vehicle”
(Y page 328).

Inflating the collapsible tire


G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle. Version 2

G Warning! X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric


Observe safety instructions on air pump label. air pump.
X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating = and air hose with pressure gauge and
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may vent screw ?.
be damaged. X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and

Your vehicle may be equipped with either of the air hose out of the pump housing
two versions of the electric air pump: bottom.
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located hose ?.
behind a flap. X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible

RVersion
tire valve.
2: The pressure gauge is located
X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of valve.
the pump housing. X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
X Insert electrical plug = into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 206) or a power
outlet (Y page 207).
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 328
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

328 Flat tire

X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to pressure as specified for your vehicle
position 1. (Y page 358), decrease tire pressure using
or the vent screw on air hose ?.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do is above the recommended tire inflation
not depress the brake pedal. pressure as specified for your vehicle
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;. (Y page 358), decrease tire pressure using
The electric air pump switches on and deflate button B.
inflates the collapsible tire. G Observe Safety notes, see page 231.
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the X Detach the electric air pump.
recommended tire inflation pressure as X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
specified for your vehicle (Y page 358).
X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =
This should take approximately 5 minutes.
Practical hints

and air hose ? behind flap :.


G Warning! X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =
The air hose and the union nut can become and the air hose back into the pump
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution housing bottom.
to avoid burning yourself when using the X Place the electric air pump back in its
equipment. designated storage space.
X Lower the vehicle.
! Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Lowering the vehicle
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after X Lower the vehicle by turning the crank
it has cooled off. counterclockwise until the vehicle is
resting fully on its own weight.
! Compare the recommended tire inflation X Remove the jack.
pressure for your vehicle with the tire
inflation pressure on the yellow label
located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0. X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
or following the diagonal sequence illustrated
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 329
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Flat tire 329

G Warning! G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
changing a wheel. The wheels could come characteristics are diminished in such
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of situations as:
96 lb-ft (130 Nm). Rdriving around curves
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded Rwhile braking
in (storage position), see (Y page 270). Rwhile accelerating rapidly
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted
in the designated storage space. accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving
X E 63 AMG and vehicles with AMG maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles
bodystyling: Reinstall the respective (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This
cover of the door-sill trim. is especially important if the vehicle is heavily

Practical hints
loaded.
i Vehicles with Advanced TPMS:
Do not restart the Advanced TPMS until a The emergency driving distance that can be
full size wheel/tire with functioning sensor achieved greatly depends on the demands
has been placed back into service on the placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
vehicle. load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can be
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven
50 mph (80 km/h). cautiously, somewhat longer.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode if
Ryou notice knocking sounds
MOExtended system
Rthe vehicle starts to shake
The MOExtended system allows you to
Rsmoke develops and you smell rubber
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. RESC is intervening continuously
You may only use the MOExtended system in Ryou notice tears on the tire sidewalls
conjunction with the tire pressure loss
After driving in emergency mode, you must
warning system (Y page 232) or the
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Advanced TPMS (Y page 233).
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
The maximum distance in emergency mode suitable for further use. The failed tire must
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles be replaced in any case.
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded. When replacing individual or all tires on the
The point at which the maximum driving vehicle, make sure only tires marked with
distance in emergency mode begins is when “MOExtended” are mounted in the size
the warning message appears in the specified for your vehicle (Y page 353).
multifunction display indicating that there is
a loss of tire inflation pressure.
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of Sealing tires with TIREFIT
50 mph (80 km/h). This section applies to vehicles that are
factory equipped20 or retrofitted with a
TIREFIT kit only.
20 Canada only.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 330
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

330 Flat tire

Small tire punctures, particularly those in the Any contact with eyes or skin should be
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. flushed immediately with plenty of water.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
down to -4‡ (-20†). change clothing as soon as possible.
G Warning! In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT physician immediately.
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
G Warning!
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
damage caused by driving with extremely low Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
damaged wheel. plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not drive the vehicle under such Do not induce vomiting!
Practical hints

circumstances. Consult a physician immediately.


Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
Assistance. can then peel it off.
If clothing has come in contact with
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with
should not be removed from the tire. perchloroethylene as soon as possible.
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the
G Warning!
electric air pump out of the vehicle.
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either of


two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
Two-part sticker The following description applies to both
X Attach upper part : of the sticker where versions. Differences in usage are expressly
it will be easily seen by the driver on the declared.
instrument cluster.
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).

G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
and respiratory irritation.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 331
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Flat tire 331

Version 1 Version 1
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on

Practical hints
pressure gauge G.
X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E.
X Insert electrical plug ? into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 206) or a power
outlet (Y page 207).
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
Version 2 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
X Version 1 only: Open flap C on the not depress the brake pedal.
electric air pump. X Press I on electric air pump switch =.
X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump The electric air pump is switched on and
housing. inflates the tire.
X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
flange B of TIREFIT container :. The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down (5 bar). This is normal and not an indication
into notch ; of the electric air pump. of a malfunction. Do not switch off the
electric air pump.
X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for
approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
26 psi (1.8 bar).

G Warning!
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.

! Do not operate the electric air pump


X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
from tire valve E. Otherwise it may overheat.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 332
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

332 Flat tire

You may operate the air pump again after G Warning!


it has cooled off. Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
If the tire inflation pressure of at least (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained: operate at higher speeds.
X
The sticker must be attached on the
Turn off the electric air pump by pressing
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
0 on electric air pump switch =.
by the driver.
X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
approximately 30 ft (10 m). accordingly.
This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
sealant material inside the tire. X After driving the vehicle for an initial
X Inflate the tire again. 10 minutes, check the tire inflation
Practical hints

pressure using the pressure gauge.


G Warning!
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) G Warning!
is not attained, the tire is too severely If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
repair. vehicle.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the Park your vehicle safely away from the
tire. roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Do not drive the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance. Have the damaged tire replaced.

After attaining a tire inflation pressure of If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar): (1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the
correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch =. Loading Information placard on the driver’s
The electric air pump is switched off. door B-pillar):
X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve.

G Warning!
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself when
detaching the electric air pump.

! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape


from the filler hose after it has been
detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT
sealant may cause stains.
Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by Version 2
inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT X To increase tire inflation pressure:
kit was packed in. Switch on the electric air pump.
X Drive off immediately. X To decrease tire inflation pressure:
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 333
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 333

Version 1: Open vent screw F on X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
pressure gauge G (Y page 331). to position 0.
Version 2: Press yellow deflate button a X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
located in air pump housing next to position 3 and hold it there for a maximum
pressure gauge G. of 10 seconds or until the engine runs
surge-free.
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop,
If the engine does not start:
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
to have the damaged tire replaced. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch

X Recommended duration of use: A


once more to position 2 for at least
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph 10 seconds.
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch

tire inflation pressure. to position 0.

Practical hints
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
Center as soon as possible to obtain a new once more to position 3 and hold it there
TIREFIT kit. for a maximum of 10 seconds or until the
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an engine runs surge-free.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for X If necessary, repeat the above steps.
proper disposal. If the engine still does not start after
X Replace your TIREFIT container every 3 attempts:
4 years. Replacement containers are Do not make any further attempts to start the
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Center. Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance
(Y page 210).
i When the malfunction indicator
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel lamp ; in the instrument cluster has
engine only) been illuminated for the above condition, it
will remain illuminated until the engine was
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty cycled on and off four times in a row.
is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens,
the malfunction indicator lamp ; comes AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
on and the engine may not start immediately
after refueling the vehicle. The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
After refueling: system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in in order to function properly. Refilling with
park position P. AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
The transmission position indicator in the service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
multifunction display should be on P. suffice until the next maintenance service
X Do not depress the accelerator. under normal driving conditions.
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
start/stop button from the starter switch. Check Additive See Operator’s
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to Manual appears in the multifunction display.
position 2 for at least 10 seconds. When the AdBlue® level drops to the
minimum level, the message Remaining

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 334
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

334 AdBlue® (diesel engine only)

Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction If you and/or others have come into contact
display. with AdBlue®:
i When the message Remaining Starts: RIf AdBlue® has gotten into contact with
20 appears in the multifunction display, you eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately
can start the engine 20 more times. If you and seek medical help.
do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be RClean affected skin immediately with plenty
started beyond that point. Fill the of water.
AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
(3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
RIf AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth
approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers) immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Consult a physician.
or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Practical hints

i For refilling outside the maintenance When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
AdBlue®
service intervals, refill the tank tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue® AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
(corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue® Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
refill containers). are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
Always use the particular AdBlue® refill ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
containers for refilling outside the nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
maintenance service interval. Contact an watering eyes.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance if necessary
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
(Y page 210).
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
Refilling with AdBlue®
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G Warning!
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
Make sure
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
RAdBlue® does not come into contact with with a moist cloth and cold water
skin, eyes, or clothing immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.

! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must


not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
engine could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 335
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 335

For more information on AdBlue®, see


(Y page 364).
The AdBlue® filler neck is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the trunk (Y page 81).
X Lift the trunk floor (Y page 268).

X Unscrew the dust cap from AdBlue® refill


container =.

Practical hints
X Place AdBlue® refill container = on the
filler neck as illustrated and tighten it
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it
clockwise.
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap cover : container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight,
as you could otherwise damage it.
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Push AdBlue® refill container = down.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up
to 1 minute.
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill
container.
X Release AdBlue® refill container =.
X Turn AdBlue® refill container =
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap ;
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ; on filler neck
counterclockwise and open it.
Filler cap ; is tethered with a plastic strap. and turn it clockwise.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 336
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

336 Battery

X Place AdBlue® filler cap cover : as Risk of explosion.


illustrated and turn it clockwise to its stop.
X Lower the trunk floor.
X Close the trunk.
Fire, open flames and
X Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least smoking are prohibited
10 mph (16 km/h). when handling batteries.
The message Check Additive See Avoid creating sparks.
Operator’s Manual disappears after Battery acid is caustic. Do
approximately 1 minute. not allow it to come into
i If the message Check Additive See contact with skin, eyes or
clothing.
Operator’s Manual still appears in the
multifunction display, refill with one more Wear suitable protective
Practical hints

container of AdBlue®. clothing, especially gloves,


apron and faceguard.
i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if Wear eye protection.
necessary, filled completely afterward at Rinse any acid spills
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. immediately with clear
water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Battery Keep children away.
Safety notes
A battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service Follow the instructions in
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery this Operator’s Manual.
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
distance trips, you will need to have the A battery contains materials that can harm
battery charge checked more frequently. the environment if disposed of improperly. A
When replacing a battery, always use a large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz. Recycling of the battery is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
for an extended period of time, contact an
batteries to accept the old battery for
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
recycling.
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can result
Observe all safety instructions and
in severe injury or death.
precautions when handling automotive
batteries. Never lean over batteries while connecting.
You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 337
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Battery 337

flush affected area with water and seek The factory-equipped battery may only be
medical help if necessary. replaced with a battery that
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Rhas the same security features
which is flammable and explosive. Keep Ris of identical size
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Ris of identical voltage
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc. Ris of identical capacity

G Warning! ! As any other battery, the battery may


Do not place metal objects on the battery as discharge if you do not operate the vehicle
this could result in a short circuit. for an extended period of time. Have the
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk battery disconnected at a qualified
of acid burns in the event of an accident. workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Practical hints
Take care that you do not become statically Center in such a case. You may also
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or connect an accessory battery charge unit
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for
also should not pull or push the battery over your vehicle model to maintain the battery
carpets or other synthetic materials. charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Never touch the battery first. First touch the Benz Center for further information.
outside body of the vehicle in order to release The battery, the battery ventilation hose
any possible electrostatic charges. and the lateral plug must always be
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The securely installed when the vehicle is in
battery could explode if touched due to operation.
electrostatic charge or due to spark
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
formation.
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch or
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as Otherwise the alternator and other
“fleece” battery. electronic components could be severely
Such batteries do not require topping-up of damaged.
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries Have the battery checked regularly at an
therefore do not have cell caps and the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
battery cover is non-removable. Do not
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
attempt to open the battery as otherwise
maintenance intervals or contact an
the battery will be damaged.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of further information.
the electrolyte level. They cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level.
However, the battery condition must be Charging the battery
checked periodically by performing a
battery conductance test. Refer to G Warning!
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition Never charge a battery while still installed in
testing intervals. the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 338
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

338 Jump starting

charging and could cause an explosion that improper connection of jumper cables,
may result in personal injury, paint damage or smoking, etc.
corrosion. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
An accessory battery charge unit specially result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and Read all instructions before proceeding.
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available. It permits the charging of the ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
battery in its installed position. Contact an otherwise seriously damage the automatic
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for transmission which is not covered by the
information and availability. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory ! Jump starting should only be performed
battery charger. using the jump-start terminals located in
Practical hints

the engine compartment.


Have the battery charged at an authorized
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
attempts.
battery yourself, follow the operating
instructions for your charging device. Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
Only use a battery charge unit with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
X Charge battery in accordance with the
checked at the nearest authorized
instructions of the battery charger
Mercedes-Benz Center.
manufacturer.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter21 and may
Jump starting
present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
G Warning!
loose or missing insulation.
Failure to follow these directions will cause
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
damage to the electronic components, and
any other metal part while the other end is
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
still attached to a battery.
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
jump starting. You might get injured. started with jumper cables and the fully
charged battery of another vehicle or an
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
equivalent starter pack. Observe the
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
following:
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
medical help if necessary. vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, of the other vehicle, provide jump start
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid

21 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.


212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 339
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Jump starting 339

power by an external battery or starter RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
pack. not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
RJump starting should only be performed that move when an engine is started or
running.
when the engine and catalytic converter22
are cold. RShould the battery be drained completely,
RDo let the donating power source charge the
not jump start the engine or charge the
vehicle for several minutes before
battery if the battery is frozen. Let the
reattempting the starting process.
battery thaw out first.
ROnly The jump-start contacts are located in the
jump start from batteries with the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
with a more powerful battery could damage X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
the vehicle’s electrical system. Such X Switch off all electrical consumers.

Practical hints
damage will not be covered by the X Engage the parking brake.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient park position P.
cross-section and insulated terminal X Open the hood (Y page 223).
clamps.

Position B represents the charged battery of X Connect positive terminal ; of charged


another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. battery B with positive terminal = with a
X Slide cover : from positive terminal = in jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
direction of arrow. terminal ; of charged battery B first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
! Never invert the terminal connections! battery B and run at idle speed.

22 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 340
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

340 Towing the vehicle

X Connect negative terminal ? of charged recommended towing methods can be


battery B with negative terminal A with employed.
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to ! Before towing the vehicle observe the
negative terminal ? of charged battery following instructions:
B first.
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
otherwise seriously damage the
discharged battery and run at idle speed. automatic transmission which is not
You can now turn on the electrical covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
consumers. Do not switch on the Warranty.
headlamps under any circumstances.
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.
X Remove the jumper cables from negative
terminals ? and A first. Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
X Remove the jumper cables from positive
Practical hints

supports.
terminals ; and =.
RTowing of the vehicle should only be
You can now switch on the headlamps.
done using the properly installed towing
X Slide cover : from positive terminal =
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
back. rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
X Have the battery checked at the nearest frame or suspension parts.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
Towing the vehicle assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
Safety notes in mind that a considerably higher degree of
G Warning! effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
deactivate the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
be transported with all wheels off the ground ! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
equipment. This method is preferable to other If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
types of towing.
i If the battery is disconnected or
! To prevent damage during transport, do discharged
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
suspension parts.
switch
If circumstances do not permit the
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
may be towed with all wheels on the ground park position P
or front axle raised (except vehicles with For more information see “Battery”
4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the (Y page 336) or “Jump starting”
vehicle moved to a safe location where the (Y page 338).
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 341
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Towing the vehicle 341

Installing towing eye bolt


Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
which are located behind covers on each
bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
vehicle tool kit, located underneath the trunk
floor (Y page 268).
X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
Removing cover in front bumper arrow.

Practical hints
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.

Fixing towing eye bolt

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the


arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Example illustration front bumper

Removing cover in rear bumper X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
equipped, the wheel wrench from the
G Warning! vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
In order to avoid possible serious burns or X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
injury, use extreme caution when removing threaded hole to its stop.
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
is extremely hot.
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
clockwise.
or
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 342
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

342 Towing the vehicle

Removing towing eye bolt Towing with all wheels on the ground
X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it G Warning!
counterclockwise. If circumstances require towing the vehicle
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;. with all wheels on the ground, always tow with
X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover : a tow bar if:
(Y page 341) and snap it into place. Rthe engine will not run
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
or in the vehicle’s electrical system

Towing with one axle raised This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Practical hints

! The vehicle may be towed only for Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). starter switch position 2.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
one axle raised. Doing so could damage the
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
transfer case, which is not covered by the
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
All wheels must be on or off the ground. reinsert.
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground. G Warning!
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. With the engine not running, there is no power
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
X Release the brake pedal.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
X If engaged, release the parking brake. vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
X Switch off the automatic central locking
(Y page 144). X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
SmartKey in the starter switch. brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher X Shift the automatic transmission into
(Y page 101). neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
! Because the ESC operates automatically,
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in (Y page 101).
position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
! The vehicle may be towed only for
towed with one axle raised.
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
Active braking action through the ESC may speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 343
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuses 343

i While being towed with the hazard Before replacing fuses


warning flasher in use, use the combination
X Engage the parking brake.
switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
Only the selected turn signal will operate. X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard park position P.
warning flasher will operate again. The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Fuses X Turn off the engine.

Introduction X Remove the SmartKey from the starter


switch.
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in

Practical hints
If a fuse is blown, the components and
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
systems secured by that fuse will stop
removed from the starter switch). The
operating.
driver’s door then can be closed again.
G Warning!
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in Fuse box in trunk
question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

A blown fuse must be replaced by an


appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse X Open the trunk.
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object as a lever
to advise you on this subject. into the upper edge of cover : and pull
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside cover : downward in direction of arrow.
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes- X Closing: Install cover :.
Benz Center.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an Fuse box in engine compartment
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Open the hood.
The fuse chart is located in the trunk with the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 268). The fuse chart
explains the fuse allocation and fuse
amperages.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 344
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

344 Fuses

X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from


fuse box cover.
Practical hints

X Opening: Release wire ; from fuse box


cover.
X Move aside wire ;. Route wire ; behind
connection = to do this.
X Release clamps :.

X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is


positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover down and secure with
clamps :.
X Fasten wire ; on fuse box cover.

! The fuse box cover must be properly


positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 345
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

345

Vehicle equipment ............................ 346


Parts service ..................................... 346
Warranty coverage ........................... 346
Identification labels .......................... 346
Vehicle specification E 350
(212.056) ........................................... 348
Vehicle specification E 350 Blue-
TEC (212.024) ................................... 348
Vehicle specification E 350
4MATIC (212.087) ............................. 349
Vehicle specification E 550
(212.072) ........................................... 350
Vehicle specification E 550
4MATIC (212.090) ............................. 351

Technical data
Vehicle specification E 63 AMG
(212.077) ........................................... 352
Rims and tires ................................... 353
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 359
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 346
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

346 Identification labels

Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty


REmission System Warranty
i This Operator’s Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
Technical data

distribution centers provide quick and


reliable parts service.
Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.

Warranty coverage

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
warranties printed in the Service and be found
Warranty Information booklet. Ron certification label : on the driver’s door
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will B-pillar
exchange or repair any defective parts
Rembossed underneath the carpet in the
originally installed in the vehicle in
front passenger footwell
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties: Ron the lower edge of the windshield
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 347
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Identification labels 347

Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)


X Move the front passenger seat backward
; VIN
as far as possible (Y page 88).
= Paintwork code X Fold carpet ? backward.
VIN A is now visible.

Technical data
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
; VIN B Emission control information label,
= Paintwork code includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
i Data shown on certification label are for C VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
illustration purposes only. These data are D Engine number (engraved on engine)
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to i When ordering parts, please specify
certification label on vehicle for actual data vehicle identification and engine number.
specific to your vehicle.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 348
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

348 Vehicle specification E 350 BlueTEC (212.024)

Vehicle specification E 350 (212.056) Electrical system E 350

The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- electrode gap
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
special bodies and special equipment. tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine E 350
Engine, type 272 Main dimensions E 350
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, Overall vehicle 191.9 in (4 874 mm)
gasoline injection length
No. of cylinders 6 Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm)
width24
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Overall vehicle 57.8 in (1 467 mm)
Technical data

Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) height


Total piston 213.5 cu in Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm)
displacement (3 498 cm3)
Track, front 62.2 in (1 580 mm)
Compression 10.7:1
ratio Track, rear 63.0 in (1 599 mm)
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm Ground clearance 4.1 in (104 mm)
SAE J 134923 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
Turning circle 36.9 ft (11.3 m)
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
Weights E 350
(350 Nm/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm) Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Vehicle specification E 350 BlueTEC
Poly-V-belt 2 392 mm (212.024)

The quoted data apply only to the standard


Electrical system E 350 vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Alternator 14 V/180 A Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Battery 12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33

23 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
24 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 349
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle specification E 350 4MATIC (212.087) 349

Engine E 350 BlueTEC Main dimensions E 350 BlueTEC


Engine, type 642 Overall vehicle 57.8 in (1 467 mm)
height26
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke
engine Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm)
No. of cylinders 6 Track, front 62.2 in (1 580 mm)
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) Track, rear 63.0 in (1 599 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) Ground 3.5 in (89 mm)
clearance26
Total piston 182.3 cu in
displacement (2 987 cm3) Turning circle 36.9 ft (11.3 m)
Compression 16.5:1
ratio Weights E 350 BlueTEC

Technical data
Output acc. to 210 hp/3 400 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
SAE J 1349 (157 kW/3 400 rpm)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum torque 400 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 1 600 - 2 400 rpm
(543 Nm/ Vehicle specification E 350 4MATIC
1 600 - 2 400 rpm) (212.087)
Maximum engine 4 500 rpm
speed The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Poly-V-belt special bodies and special equipment.
2 035 mm
Engine E 350 4MATIC
Electrical system E 350 BlueTEC Engine, type 272
Alternator 14 V/180 A Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW
No. of cylinders 6
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Main dimensions E 350 BlueTEC Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Overall vehicle 191.9 in (4 874 mm) Total piston 213.5 cu in
length displacement (3 498 cm3)
Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm) Compression 10.7:1
width25 ratio

25 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.


26 Data apply to unladen vehicle with standard equipment. Data may vary in vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC
depending on the selected damping settings and the current vehicle level.
Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 350
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

350 Vehicle specification E 550 (212.072)

Engine E 350 4MATIC Main dimensions E 350 4MATIC


Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm Ground clearance 4.1 in (104 mm)
SAE J 134927 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
Turning circle 36.9 ft (11.3 m)
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/ Weights E 350 4MATIC
2 400 - 5 000 rpm) Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Vehicle specification E 550 (212.072)
Poly-V-belt 2 392 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Technical data

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-


Electrical system E 350 4MATIC
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Alternator 14 V/180 A special bodies and special equipment.
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Engine E 550
Battery 12 V/70 Ah Engine, type 273
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap No. of cylinders 8
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)
Total piston 333.2 cu in
Main dimensions E 350 4MATIC displacement (5 461 cm3)
Overall vehicle 191.9 in (4 874 mm)
Compression 10.7:1
length
ratio
Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm)
Output acc. to 382 hp/6 000 rpm
width28
SAE J 134929 (285 kW/6 000 rpm)
Overall vehicle 57.8 in (1 467 mm)
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/
height
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm) (530 Nm/
2 800 - 4 800 rpm)
Track, front 62.2 in (1 580 mm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
Track, rear 63.0 in (1 599 mm) speed

27 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
28 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
29 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 351
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Vehicle specification E 550 4MATIC (212.090) 351

Engine E 550 Vehicle specification E 550 4MATIC


(212.090)
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 392 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Electrical system E 550 special bodies and special equipment.
Alternator 14 V/180 A Engine E 550 4MATIC
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Engine, type 273
Battery 12 V/95 Ah Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A
No. of cylinders 8
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)

Technical data
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Total piston 333.2 cu in
displacement (5 461 cm3)
Main dimensions E 550
Compression 10.7:1
Overall vehicle 191.9 in (4 874 mm) ratio
length
Output acc. to 382 hp/6 000 rpm
Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm) SAE J 134931 (285 kW/6 000 rpm)
width30
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 447 mm) acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
height (530 Nm/
2 800 - 4 800 rpm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
Track, front 62.5 in (1 587 mm) speed
Track, rear 63.0 in (1 599 mm) Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Ground clearance 5.4 in (137 mm) Poly-V-belt 2 392 mm
Turning circle 36.9 ft (11.3 m)
Electrical system E 550 4MATIC
Weights E 550 Alternator 14 V/180 A
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Battery 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A

30 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.


31 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 352
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

352 Vehicle specification E 63 AMG (212.077)

Electrical system E 550 4MATIC Engine E 63 AMG


Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) Engine, type 156
electrode gap
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft gasoline injection
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Main dimensions E 550 4MATIC
Stroke 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Overall vehicle 191.9 in (4 874 mm)
length Total piston 378.8 cu in
displacement (6 208 cm3)
Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm)
width32 Compression 11.3:1
ratio
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 447 mm)
Technical data

height Output acc. to 518 hp/6 800 rpm


SAE J 134933 (386 kW/6 800 rpm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm)
Track, front 62.2 in (1 580 mm) Maximum torque 465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (630 Nm/5 200 rpm)
Track, rear 63.0 in (1 599 mm)
Maximum engine 7 200 rpm
Ground clearance 5.4 in (137 mm) speed
Turning circle 36.9 ft (11.3 m) Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 360 mm
Weights E 550 4MATIC
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Electrical system E 63 AMG
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Alternator 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW
Vehicle specification E 63 AMG Battery 12 V/80 Ah
(212.077)
Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- electrode gap
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment. Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)

32 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.


33 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 353
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Rims and tires 353

Main dimensions E 63 AMG Rims and tires


Overall vehicle 192.6 in (4 891 mm) Notes
length ! Only use tires which have been tested and
Overall vehicle 81.5 in (2 071 mm) approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
width34 approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in
Overall vehicle 56.8 in (1 442 mm) conjunction with the driving safety systems
height on your vehicle such as the ABS or the ESC.
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2 874 mm) Tires specially developed for your vehicle
and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Track, front 64.0 in (1 625 mm) Benz can be identified by finding the
following on the tire’s sidewall:
Track, rear 62.8 in (1 594 mm)
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Ground clearance 4.5 in (114 mm) equipment tires

Technical data
Turning circle 37.1 ft (11.30 m) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tires (applicable to selected
tire sizes only)
E 63 AMG
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) (tires with limited run-flat
characteristics) original equipment tires
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 329).
i USA only: Vehicles with MOExtended
system are not factory-equipped with a
TIREFIT kit. When retrofitting with tires that
do not have run-flat characteristics, you
should also equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Using tires other than those approved by


Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Rpoor handling characteristics

Rincreased noise
Rincreased fuel consumption

34 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 354
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

354 Rims and tires

Moreover, tires and rims not approved by inflation pressure information for special
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit driving situations, see (Y page 229).
dimensional variations and different tire
i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
deformation characteristics that could
be equipped
cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
tires or the vehicle may be the result. each axle (left and right)
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
i Further information on tires and rims is around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire i The following pages also list the approved
inflation pressures for cold tires is located rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental with winter tires. Winter tires are not
tire inflation pressure information for available as standard or optional factory
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads equipment, but can be purchased from an
Technical data

less than the maximum loaded vehicle authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


condition can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler approved for your vehicle model may
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be require the purchase of rims of the
checked regularly and should only be recommended size for use with these
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
manufacturer’s maintenance and the standard or optional factory-
recommendation included with the vehicle. equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
your vehicle. For more information contact
For information on recommended tire an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 355
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Rims and tires 355

Same size tires

E 350 Luxury BlueTEC35 E 350 BlueTEC36


17" Rims (light alloy) 8.0 J x 17 H2 8.0 J x 17 H2
wheels Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm) 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires37 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 99H XL
MOExtended38 (Extra Load) M+S

Winter tires37,39 245/45 R17 99V XL 245/45 R17 99H XL


(Extra Load) M+Si (Extra Load) M+Si
MOExtended38

E 350 Sport BlueTEC35 E 350 BlueTEC36

Technical data
17" Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2 8.5 J x 17 H2
wheels Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm) 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires37 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 99H XL
MOExtended38 (Extra Load) M+S

Winter tires37,39 245/45 R17 99V XL 245/45 R17 99H XL


(Extra Load) M+Si (Extra Load) M+Si
MOExtended38

E 350 Luxury35
E 550 Luxury35
17" Rims (light alloy) 8.0 J x 17 H2
wheels Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires37 245/45 R17 99H XL (Extra Load) M+S

Winter tires37,39 245/45 R17 99H XL (Extra Load) M+Si

35 USA only.
36 Canada only.
37 Radial-ply tires.
38 Must be used in conjunction with tire pressure loss warning system or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System only.
39 Not available as factory equipment.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 356
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

356 Rims and tires

E 350 4MATIC36
E 350 Luxury 4MATIC35
18" Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
wheels Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires37 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S

Winter tires37,39 245/40 R18 97H XL (Extra Load) M+Si

E 350 4MATIC (Sport Package)36


E 350 Sport 4MATIC35
E 550 4MATIC36
E 550 Sport 4MATIC35
18" AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Technical data

wheels Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm)


All-season tires37 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S

Winter tires37,39 245/40 R18 97H XL (Extra Load) M+Si

Mixed size tires

E 350 Sport40
18" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires41 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load)
M+S
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 2.13 in (54 mm)
All-season tires41,42 265/35 R18 97V XL (Extra Load)
M+S

36 Canada only.
35 USA only.
37 Radial-ply tires.
39 Not available as factory equipment.
40 USA only.
41 Radial-ply tires.
42 Must not be used with snow chains.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 357
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Rims and tires 357

E 350 Sport40
E 550 Sport40
18" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-season tires41 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load)
M+S
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 2.13 in (54 mm)
All-season tires41,42 265/35 R18 97V XL (Extra Load)
M+S

E 63 AMG

Technical data
18" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires41,43 255/40 ZR18 (99Y) XL (Extra Load)
MO1
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 2.05 in (52 mm)
Summer tires41,42,43 285/35 ZR18 (101Y) XL (Extra
Load) MO1

E 63 AMG
E 63 AMG (Performance Package)
18" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Winter tires41,43,44 255/40 R18 99V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 2.05 in (52 mm)
Winter tires41,43,44 255/40 R18 99V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si

40 USA only.
41 Radial-plytires.
42 Must not be used with snow chains.
43 Must not be used on vehicles that are equipped with ceramic composite brake disks.
44 Not available as factory equipment.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 358
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

358 Rims and tires

E 63 AMG (Performance Package)


19" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires41 255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.05 in (52 mm)
Summer tires41,42 285/30 ZR19 (98Y) XL (Extra Load)

E 63 AMG
E 63 AMG (Performance Package)
19" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.0 J x 19 H2
Technical data

Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)


Winter tires41,44 255/35 R19 96V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.05 in (52 mm)
Winter tires41,44 255/35 R19 96V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si45
or
285/30 R19 98V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si42

Spare wheel

! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.

i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.

i The E 350 BlueTEC does not have a spare wheel.

41 Radial-plytires.
42 Must not be used with snow chains.
44 Not available as factory equipment.
45 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz-Center.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 359
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 359

E 350
E 350 4MATIC
17" wheel Rim (light alloy) 4.0 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.54 in (39 mm)
Minispare tire46 T 155/70 R17 110M
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar)

E 550
E 550 4MATIC
18" wheel Rim (light alloy) 4.5 B x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm)
Minispare tire46 T 155/60 R18 107M

Technical data
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar)

E 63 AMG
19" wheel Rim (light alloy) 6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset 0.55 in (14 mm)
Collapsible tire46 175/50-19 97P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 51 psi (3.5 bar)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service

46 Must not be used with snow chains.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 360
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

360 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,


lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil E 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine
filter E 350 BlueTEC oils
E 350 4MATIC
E 550 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG47 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
Automatic E 350 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission E 350 BlueTEC Transmission Fluid
E 550
E 350 4MATIC 10.5 US qt (9.9 l)
Technical data

E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 48 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
Front axle E 350 4MATIC 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil
E 550 4MATIC
Rear axle E 350 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
E 350 BlueTEC 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
E 550
E 350 4MATIC 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Castrol SAF-XJ49
Transfer case E 350 4MATIC 0.74 US qt (0.7 l) MB Automatic
E 550 4MATIC Transmission Fluid

Power steering All models, approx. 0.95 US qt (0.9 l) MB Power Steering


except E 63 AMG Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
E 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Chevron Texaco
CHF 9109

47 Enginewith oil cooler.


48 Automatictransmission with oil cooler.
49 AMG vehicles with differential lock.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 361
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 361

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,


lubricants, etc.
Brake system All models approx. 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 350 approx. 8.9 US qt (8.4 l) MB 325.0
E 350 4MATIC Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
E 350 BlueTEC approx. 12.2 US qt (11.5 l)
E 550 approx. 10.9 US qt (10.3 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG approx. 11.6 US qt (11.0 l)
Fuel tank All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Gasoline engine:
Premium unleaded

Technical data
Fuel tank All models, approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) gasoline (Minimum
reserve except E 63 AMG Posted Octane 91
E 63 AMG approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) [Avg. of
96 RON/86 MON])
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models, 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp except Washer
cleaning E 350 BlueTEC Concentrate50
system (Y page 367)
E 350 BlueTEC 3.7 US qt (3.5 l)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 367)

Approved engine oils Maintenance System will result in engine or


emission control system damage not
Engine oils are specifically tested for their covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
suitability in our engines and durability for our Warranty.
service intervals. Therefore, only use
Please follow Maintenance System
approved engine oils and oil filters required
recommendations for scheduled oil
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
changes. Failure to do so will result in
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a engine or emission control system damage
specification other than those expressly not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
required for the Maintenance System, or Warranty.
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the

50 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 362
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

362 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Use the table below to determine the Air conditioning refrigerant


MB sheet number.
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
Model Engine, MB sheet lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
type number system.
E 350 272 229.5 ! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
E 350 4MATIC lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
E 350 BlueTEC 642 229.51
E 550 273 229.5
Brake fluid
E 550 4MATIC
G Warning!
E 63 AMG 156 229.551
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the through the absorption of moisture from the
Technical data

outside of oil containers. atmosphere.


Under extremely strenuous operating
Viscosity grades for engine oils conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity reducing the system’s efficiency.
according to the lowest air temperature
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
expected before the next oil change.
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance
Booklet for replacement interval.

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz


is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information.

Premium unleaded gasoline


G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
Engine oil additives personal injury.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
They may damage the engine. Damage or materials near gasoline!
malfunctions resulting from blending oil Turn off the engine before refueling.
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
Benz Limited Warranty. inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.

51 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.


212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 363
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 363

Direct skin contact with fuels and the ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your used.
health. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
! To maintain the engine’s durability and knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used. Diesel engine
If premium unleaded gasoline is not Only use commercially available vehicular
available and low octane gasoline is used, ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
follow these precautions: (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled meets the ASTM D975 standard. Failure to
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up use ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon FUEL (ULSD) can severely damage the
as possible. vehicle’s exhaust after-treatment device.
RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with

Technical data
acceleration. improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
RDo not exceed an engine speed of retailer.
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
light load such as two persons and no ! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
luggage. blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
RDo 2/ The fuel system and engine will otherwise
not exceed 3 of maximum
be damaged, which is not covered by the
accelerator pedal position if the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain. For further information on diesel fuel pump
labeling, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The Biodiesel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl
octane number (posted at the pump) must be Ester) containing fuels
91 min. It is an average of both the Research Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of B5
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane (standard ULSD which may contain a
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also maximum of 5% biodiesel) in all Common-rail
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. injection (CDI) and BlueTEC diesel engines.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates biodiesel, e.g. B20, as well as straight
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and biodiesel may cause severe damage to your
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one engine/fuel system and are not approved.
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not Please ask your service station personnel for
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. further information. If the B5 biodiesel blend
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not is not sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. that it meets the ULSD standard, please do
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not not use it.
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
not cover damages caused by the use of fuels

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 364
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

364 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel AdBlue®


standards.
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid.
Gasoline additives ! Only use AdBlue® complying with
A major concern among engine ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only ! Rinse surfaces that have come into
the use of quality gasoline containing contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon with a moist cloth and cold water
deposits. immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
After an extended period of using fuels already, use cold water and a sponge.
without such additives carbon deposits can AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
build up, especially on the intake valves and the affected surfaces.
in the combustion area, leading to engine
High ambient temperatures
Technical data

performance problems such as:


RWarm-up hesitation If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above
RUnstable idle 122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for
example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas
RKnocking/pinging
vapors may escape when opening the
RMisfire AdBlue® tank.
RPower loss G Warning!
In areas where carbon deposits may be When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
encountered due to lack of availability of tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
gasoline which contains these additives, the AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
recommended. are particularly irritating for your skin,
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
listing of approved products. Follow nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
directions on the product label. watering eyes.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and may Low ambient temperatures
be harmful to the engine operation.
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of
! Damage or malfunction resulting from approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is
poor fuel quality or from blending additional factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating
fuel additives other than those tested and system. The vehicle can thus be operated at
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz temperatures below 12‡ (-11†).
vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned Special additives
or Extended Limited Warranties.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 365
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 365

water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
aftertreatment system could be damaged. the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
Damage caused by using additives or interval.
diluting with water are not covered by the Coolant system design and coolant used
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Purity Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the of equal specification are used to renew the
exhaust gas aftertreatment. coolant concentration or bring it back up to
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g. the proper level.
during repair work, the same liquid must not For information on other Mercedes-Benz
be used to refill the tank as its purity is no approved products of equal specification,
longer guaranteed. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Technical data
! Impurities caused for example by other
service products, cleaning agents, and dust To provide important corrosion protection,
result in increased emissions, the solution must be at least 50%
malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
damage. freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
Coolants anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
RCorrosion protection Therefore, do not use more than this amount
RFreeze protection of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
point) Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
The cooling system was filled at the factory system checked for signs of leakage). Please
with a coolant providing freeze protection to make sure the mixture is in accordance with
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion label instructions.
protection.
The water in the cooling system must meet
! Add premixed coolant solution only. minimum requirements, which are usually
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/ satisfied by normal drinking water.
Antifreeze separately from each other, If you are not sure about the water quality,
could cause engine damage not covered by contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Center.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the Anticorrosion/antifreeze
pressurized cooling system is reached at
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
approximately 266‡ (130†).
parts. The use of aluminum components in
The coolant solution must be used year round motor vehicle engines necessitates that
to provide the necessary corrosion protection anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 366
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

366 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

such engines be specifically formulated to Before the start of the winter season (or once
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use a year in hot southern regions), you should
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
result in a significantly shortened service life. concentration checked.
Therefore, the following product is strongly The coolant is also regularly checked each
recommended for use in your vehicle: time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent. Mercedes-Benz Center for service.

Model Approximate freeze protection


-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system E 350 4.4 US qt (4.2 l) 4.9 US qt (4.6 l)
E 350 4MATIC
E 350 BlueTEC 6.1 US qt (5.8 l) 6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
Technical data

E 550 5.5 US qt (5.2 l) 6.0 US qt (5.7 l)


E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 367
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 367

Washer system and headlamp


cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.

X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate


“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.

Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.

Washer fluid mixing ratio


For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)

Z
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 368
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

368
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 369
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Service and Literature


Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to make changes in


design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time July 17, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
212_AKB; 2; 41, en-US 2009-07-17T09:14:21+02:00 - Seite 370
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

É21258458817ËÍ
2125845881

Order no. 6515 3473 13 Part no. 212 584 58 81 Edition B 2010

Você também pode gostar